jpij 
 
 itJlf ' 
 
 Z^mJj'mj/jjgii 
 
 J^ji 
 
 
 ^^^^^^^icz?/-^ :^i; 
 
 \ Vvv 
 
 t3 
 
 „ "A^J'\Si*'l- TBI' //' 
 
 r '' (E( ar or 
 
 ',^^r XJii if f 
 
 
 ^s^..
 
 
 >C-*^ 
 
 
 ^aw' iff (-( 
 
 ■^jr(gr etc 
 
 THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 RIVERSIDE 
 
 
 jgy^ 
 
 rm^ 
 
 
 !■»■■»■■ 
 
 £■* Libris 
 
 : c. 
 
 K. OGDEN 
 
 .jlT /?'■ t}> 

 
 ' V 
 
 •\ o-
 
 V
 
 
 A 
 
 TREATISE ON HARMONY 
 
 \^ BY THE 
 
 Eev. Sir F^ A. GOEE OUSELEY, Bart., MA., Mus. Doc. 
 
 PROFESSOR OF MUSIC IX THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD 
 
 AT THE CLARENDON PRESS 
 M.DCCC.LX^^[II
 
 MTyo
 
 €Iar.entr0iT ^ress Btxm 
 
 PRmCIPLES OF HARMONY 
 
 OUSELEY
 
 Hoution 
 MACMILLAN AND CO. 
 
 FUBLISHEBS TO THE UNIVEBSITT OF 
 
 xioxti
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 The object aimed at in this volume is the combination of true philosophical prin- 
 ciples with simplicity of explanation. It also endeavours to include all necessary- 
 details in the smallest possible compass. 
 
 So many treatises on Harmony have appeared since the beginning of this 
 century, that some apology is perhaps due for adding yet one more to the number. 
 The author must plead as his apology, the conviction that although the existing 
 treatises on the subject contain much very valuable matter, yet all seem to him 
 to be either founded on erroneous principles, or faulty in arrangement. Some mix 
 up together the elements of Harmony, Counterpoint, and Pianoforte-practice; others 
 start from principles not based upon nature, but too often contradicted by the 
 now better ascertained phenomena of acoustics; others repudiate physical science 
 altogether, and treat of Music as though it were only an emotional art. The 
 present volume tries to avoid these and other similar errors. 
 
 Wherever existing works explain or illustrate any point with clearness, they 
 have been quoted freely and acknowledged with gratitude. But in other and 
 more frequent cases it has been necessary to take up entirely fresh ground, and 
 to employ new explanations and illustrations. It is confidently hoped that the 
 system thus evolved may prove useful to the student, by giving him natural and 
 rational explanations of the facts of Music, and of the rules deduced from those 
 facts. The author has aimed throughout at a consistent theory, founded in nature, 
 progressively expanded, and involving no purely arbitrary rules. He now lays the 
 results of his endeavour's before the public.
 
 viii PREFACE. 
 
 His warmest thanks are due to many who have aided him in the production 
 of this work, especially to Professor Pole, Mus. Doc, for his admirable illustration 
 of the comparative magnitude of intervals, and the lucid explanations accom- 
 panying it, which invest the work with a scientific value it would not otherwise 
 have possessed. 
 
 In conclusion, a suggestion is offered as to the best way of using this little 
 work. The student is recommended to study Harmony and Counterpoint con- 
 currently, working at them a little at a time, alternately. He will find that 
 neither can be perfectly mastered without the other. With this view, the author 
 proposes, before long, to bring out a Treatise on Counterpoint, based on those of 
 Fux, Mai'pm'g, Reicha, and Cherubini, which will be so constructed as to run 
 parallel to the present volume, as far as possible ; and he desu*es that the two 
 works may be regarded as pai-ts of one whole, for the instruction of such as desire 
 to grasp the subject in its completeness. 
 
 St. MiCH-iEL-'s College, Tenbuey, 
 January, 1868.
 
 TO 
 
 THE REV. G. W. KITCHIN, M.A. 
 
 THIS TREATISE 
 
 IS AFFECTIONATELY DEDICATED 
 
 BY HIS OLD FRIEND 
 
 THE AUTHOR
 
 EKRATA. 
 
 Page 32. First stave of music from top of page, under the last two chords, 
 
 6 6 B6 be 
 
 for 4 4 read 4 4 
 
 2 2 b2 b2 
 
 Page 34. Second stave of music from top, bar 2, for 
 Page 47. Second stave of music from bottom, bar 5, for 
 
 ^ 
 
 :cz 
 
 — read 
 
 -^ 
 
 221 
 
 4^±- 
 
 Page 53. Second stave from top, bar 3 
 
 , for g 
 
 -.'S>- 
 
 ^^ read y?W=?^_ 
 
 -^- 
 
 read 
 
 E 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 Page 85. Bar 6 of example, bass stave, for V^ ^^j, — read V^ y^^y 
 
 Page 88. Line 4 from bottom, for t]4 read :5 ; and in line 2 for B5 read D4 
 
 3 3 b b 
 
 Page 89. Second stave from top, bar 5, for - V ^ l rj I'ead 4^ 
 
 '^Q rJ 
 
 Page 97. Second stave from top, for 
 
 read 
 
 ..88 
 
 Page 108. Last bar but one of Exercise on Dissonances, for - read 5 
 
 Page 114. Second stave of music, bar 1, for 
 
 £ 
 
 't 
 
 d^ read / 4 s &- 
 
 F 
 
 eJ ^" 
 
 Page 129. Last stave of music, in bars 4 and 7, for 
 
 Page 136. First stave, first bar, for 
 
 ySi rea 
 
 •q^^ read @ ^-f^ 
 ad ^7~^ ^ 
 
 Page 139. Second stave from top, in bar 1, for '^ read *'^; in bar 3 for jfs 
 
 b6 T . , (js be 
 
 read 4^; and in bar 5 for Jfo read 44- 
 2 b b
 
 Paere 149. Lowest stave, bar S, for \ ^^ read $ bs 
 
 D 
 
 9 D 
 
 Page 163. In second bar of example, for 
 
 -if — 
 
 hn 
 
 ^gtd 
 
 V 7 u,*^^ 
 
 
 J a^ 
 
 /m\' I 
 
 le;. 
 
 
 v^ 
 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 read 
 
 5 
 
 c 
 
 Page 169. 
 Page 174. 
 
 Page 178. 
 
 Page 192. 
 
 Last stave, bar S, for ^^ read '^^ 
 
 In fourth chord of example, for B read A 
 
 I 
 2^= 
 
 Second stave, bar 6, for - /W- 
 
 -& 
 
 read 
 
 fe 
 
 e/ 
 
 The Jt in the signature of the example should be omitted 
 
 Page 20O. Upper stave, bar 2, for ^^^ fj 
 „ Lowest stave, bar 4, for y^-g!— ^ 
 
 ,ead ^r: p^1=p: 
 
 I— J— read vfiv- Sl— S *! ^ - 
 
 r f^^ 
 
 Page 205. 
 Page 210. 
 
 Lines 1 and 2, for " subdominant " read ^^ supertonic 
 First bar of exercise, for 
 
 -tS>- 
 
 r^-H <S' — read 
 
 )■ — ^2:^ — @ — 
 
 -&»- 
 
 ^ 
 
 Page 212. Second stave, bar 1, for 
 
 f 
 
 St 
 
 read 
 
 fcdE^-3 
 
 i 
 
 Page 217. Last bar but one, for C in the bass read CJ 
 
 Page 219. Under fourth bar from top, for J read ^ 
 
 Page 220. Exercise 13, bar 6, for ^ read | ; and in bar 10, for | read | 
 
 Page 221. Exercise 14, bar 3, under last note insert 6 
 
 Page 225. In exercise 18, bar 2, for ^ read 6 
 
 -(S> 
 
 :?:2 
 
 - read 
 
 rJ rJ 
 
 Page 227. Second stave from bottom, bar 3, for 
 
 „ Last stave, bar 2, for ^ read ^ 
 
 Page 248. Bar 4 should be the same as bar 3 
 
 Page 262. Line 10, for "or as the fourth below A'^ read "or as a fifth below A.'
 
 TABLE OF INTERVALS. 
 
 THE SAME COUNTING DOWNWASDS. 
 
 fttJ I f J j ^^rr 1''' ^ 
 
 I I 
 
 jzin 
 
 a 
 
 ^^^^^ 
 
 ^i^- ^kHi 
 
 s^^s 
 
 j ff?rrbj:^ 
 
 ^^ Trjfr^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ti=^ 
 
 *3 p 
 
 This nomenclature will be strictly adhered to throughout this treatise.
 
 A SHORT TREATISE 
 
 ON THE 
 
 PEINCIPLES OF HARMONY, 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 P^'eliminary Remarks. 
 
 1. It is presumed that the student who uses this book is abeady 
 acquainted with what are commonly considered the first elements of music. 
 A very brief summary of these will, therefore, be all that is required 
 here, before we begin to treat of harmony strictly so called. And it 
 will be sufficient for our pui'pose to indicate most of these elementary 
 matters in a tabular form, as our chief object in so doing is merely to 
 set forth the system of nomenclature which will be adhered to in these 
 pages. 
 
 2. In the first place, it is important that the student should have 
 clear views as to musical notation. For this purpose he is referred to 
 Hullah's admirable little Treatise on the Stave, than which notliing can 
 be more definite and intelhgible. 
 
 B
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 He will there learn, that our ordinary stave of five lines is derived 
 from what is called the great stave of eleven — 
 
 The three lines to which the letters G, C, and F are here appended, 
 represent fixed sounds of definite pitch : from these all others are counted. 
 Formerly, the whole eleven lines were occasionally used, and sometimes 
 six, seven, four, or three. But five lines have been found sufficient for 
 all purposes, and that number is now universally employed. 
 
 It is obvious that in selecting the five adjacent lines which we shall 
 use for our stave, we must be guided by a consideration of the notes we 
 have to write, and their place in the scale or range of musical sounds. 
 
 If we are writing for violins, flutes, or other high-toned instruments, 
 or for treble voices, or for the upper portion of keyed instruments, it 
 will be necessary to select the topmost fines of the great stave. These 
 five lines do not include either the fixed note C or the fixed note F, but 
 they do include the fixed note G, which is represented by the figure j[^ 
 called the G clef — or treble clef — or violin clef, and which will be ^ 
 placed so that the principal curl of it shall fall on the second line 
 
 counting upwards; thus q 
 
 If we are writing for bass instruments or voices, it will be necessary 
 to select the five lines at the bottom of the great stave. These will not 
 include either the fixed notes G or C, but only the fixed note F, which is 
 
 represented by the figure ^: or ^ , called the bass clef, and which will
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 3 
 
 be placed so that the two dots shall fall above and below the fourth line 
 
 counting upwards ; thus ^ ~@' 
 
 Instruments of large range, such as the organ, pianoforte, or harp, 
 require the combination of these two staves ; thus 
 
 and on comparing this with the great stave, it will be seen that it 
 contains the whole of it except the middle line, which represents the 
 fixed note C. 
 
 If we are writing for instruments of medium range, such as the viola, 
 or the alto and tenor trombones, or for contralto or tenor voices, neither 
 of the above staves will be found convenient ; the one being too high 
 and the other too low in the scale : therefore we must select some other 
 set of five liaes, to suit the requirements of the case. Whichever set we 
 select will include always two and sometimes the three fixed notes ui 
 the great stave ; and as we have already appropriated the clefs repre- 
 senting G and F to the highest and lowest staves respectively, it will 
 conduce to clearness and distinction if we use the symbol of the fixed 
 
 note C, which is thus formed, u , or H , to distinguish our medium 
 staves. 
 
 Of such staves only three are now in use. 
 
 The most acute is called the soprano, and is used in instrumental 
 scores of oratorios, and in old Church music, for the soprano or treble 
 voices. It consists of the 6th, 7th, 8th, 9th, and 10th lines of the great 
 
 stave, countiag upwards, and is expressed thus „ , — ^-G. 
 
 B 2
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 The next is the truly medium stave, and consists of the 4th, 5th, 6th, 
 7th, and 8th lines of the great stave, counting upwards. It is used 
 for the viola, or alto violin, for the alto trombone, and for the alto 
 
 voice parts in scores. It is expressed thus C- 
 
 F 
 
 The last is called the tenor clef (or, more properly, the tenor stave), 
 and is used for the tenor voices in scores, as well as for the tenor 
 trombone, and sometimes also for the higher notes of the violoncello 
 and bassoon. It consists of the 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, and 7th lines of the 
 
 great stave, counting upwards, and is expressed thus 
 
 For further details the student is referred to Hullah's book above- 
 mentioned, or to Marx's " Theory and Practice of Musical Composition," 
 (translated by Saroni. New York, 1852). 
 
 3. It will be sufficient to give a list of the different kinds of notes 
 and rests, an ordinary acquaintance with them being presupposed. 
 
 A Breve |Io|| is equal to 
 
 two Semibreves 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 G> 
 
 
 or to 
 
 four Minims 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 p 
 
 
 1 
 
 f P 
 1 • 
 
 or to 
 
 eight Crotchets p 
 
 1 
 
 p 
 
 1 
 
 p f 
 
 or to 
 
 0":^. r^ cc It ti cr G' tm- -'» 
 
 sixty-four Demisemiquavers, and so forth.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 5 
 
 The corresponding 7'ests (to represent intervals of silence) are the 
 
 breve 
 
 , the semibreve ^^^^ 
 
 , the minim ---- , the crotchet [*, the 
 
 quaver *|, the semiquaver sj, and the demisemiquaver ^. 
 
 A dot after a note or rest makes it half as long again : thus o*, or 
 a dotted semibreve, is equivalent to three minims, or six crotchets, or 
 twelve quavers : [O*, or a dotted minim, is equivalent to tlnree crotchets, 
 
 or six quavers, or twelve semiquavers. 
 
 If a second dot is added, it will lengthen the note or rest half as much 
 again as the first dot: thus i***, or a doubly dotted crotchet, is equi- 
 valent to seven semiquavers, or foiu-teen demisemiquavers ; for it consists 
 of the value of a crotchet, a quaver, and a semiquaver, i. e. two quavers, 
 one quaver, and a semiquaver, i. e. four semiquavers, two semiquavers, 
 and one semiquaver, i. e. 4+2 + 1 = 7 semiquavers. 
 
 When a note or a rest is to be lengthened indefinitely, this figure ^^, 
 called a ijcmse, is placed \uider or over it. 
 
 For further details and exercises on this branch of musical knowledge 
 we must refer to more elementary treatises. 
 
 4. Supposing the student to be famihar with the use of bars and 
 double bars, with the theory of accent, and the art of beating time, it 
 wiU be sufficient for our purpose to give a time-table, to shew the system 
 and arrangement adopted in this book.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 a. Common or Duple Time — divided into 
 
 i. Simple, and ii. Compound. 
 
 in a bar. 
 
 (g or Double Common, 4 rzt 
 (1^ or Alia Breve, 2 |C5 in a bar. 
 
 (3 01* - or Common, 4 |# in a bar. 
 
 4 I 
 
 or 2 # in a bar. 
 
 r 
 
 — or 4 |0» in a bar. 
 4 I 
 
 ]2 
 "8" 
 
 6 
 4 
 
 _ or 2 (#• in a bar. 
 8 I 
 
 or 4 !#• in a bar. 
 I 
 
 or 2 |0* in a bar. 
 
 jS. Triple Time — divided into 
 i. Simple, 
 
 - or 3 o or 1 o* in a bar. 
 2 I 
 
 3 
 
 - or 3 |# or 1 fO* in a bar. 
 
 4 I I 
 
 3 
 
 - or 3 |# or 1 !#• in a bar. 
 
 8 I I 
 
 16 
 
 or 3 |# or 1 !#• in a bar 
 
 : 
 
 and 
 
 
 
 ii. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 9 
 4 
 
 or 
 
 3p 
 
 1 
 
 • in a bar. 
 
 9 
 
 8 
 
 or 
 
 3 p. 
 
 1 
 
 in a bar. 
 
 9 
 16 
 
 or 
 
 1/ 
 
 in a bar. 
 
 5. It may be taken for granted tliat the student knows tlie meanings 
 of the figures J|;, b, Q, x, bb, and the use of them, both as accidentals 
 and in the signature. If not, we must again refer Mm back, to the 
 elementary treatises, contenting ourselves with a tabular list of the keys, 
 major and minor, with their several signatures.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Major keys with shai-ps. 
 
 7 sharps CJf 
 
 6 sharps FJf 
 
 5 sharps B|^ 
 
 4 sharps Ep 
 
 3 sharps Ap 
 
 2 sharps Dp 
 
 ] sharp Gp 
 
 Minor keys with sharps. 
 7 sharps Aj( 
 
 6 sharps 
 
 • n 
 
 5 sharps G|j! 
 
 4 sharps C Jf 
 
 3 sharps Fjf 
 
 2 sharps Bp 
 
 1 sharp Ep 
 
 Major natural key . . Cp 
 
 Minor natural key 
 
 AP 
 
 -d 
 
 i\Iajor keys with flats. 
 
 1 flat Fp 
 
 2 flats Bb 
 
 3 flats Eb 
 
 4 flats Ab 
 
 5 flats Db 
 
 6 flats Gb 
 
 7 flats 
 
 Cb 
 
 fm^ 
 
 Minor keys with flats. 
 
 1 flat Dp 
 
 2 flats Gp 
 
 3 flats cp 
 
 4 flats Fp 
 
 5 flats Bb 
 
 6 flats Eb 
 
 7 flats Ab
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Each of these major keys is supposed to be nearly related to that 
 minor key which has the same signature, and stands on a Hne with it 
 in the above table : hence the terms relative major and relative minor. 
 
 6. It will be necessary to give a table of intervals, although it is 
 supposed that the student has already mastered them before using this 
 book, because some of them have been variously named by different 
 writers, and it is essential, as a preliminary, to fix our own nomenclature, 
 which will be strictly adhered to in the following pages. 
 
 Intervals are divided into consonant and dissonant intervals, (or, as 
 they are sometimes called, concords and discords). 
 
 Consonant intervals are of two kinds, perfect and imperfect. 
 
 Imperfect consonant intervals are subdivided again into major and 
 minor. 
 
 Perfect consonances cannot be so subdivided. 
 
 Dissonant intervals also, like the imperfect consonances, are either 
 major or minor. 
 
 All intervals are susceptible likewise of certain alterations, called 
 augmentation and diminution; excepting only that major intervals can- 
 not be diminished, and that minor intervals cannot be augmented. 
 
 Perfect consonances alone can both be diminished and augmented. 
 
 Intervals 
 
 I 
 
 Consonant 
 
 Dissonant 
 
 Perfect 
 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 major mmor 
 h 
 
 major minor 
 
 §• B 
 
 
 c 
 p 
 
 g 
 
 &- 
 
 T 
 
 c 
 
 p 
 
 p 
 p 
 
 'ft-' 
 
 p. 
 
 P^ 
 
 B 
 
 p 
 
 p 
 
 B 
 
 c-t- 
 
 eri- 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 fl> 
 
 rt> 
 
 B 
 
 » 
 
 2 
 
 p 
 
 1-S 
 
 i-j 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 n> 
 
 rt> 
 
 
 
 
 
 tjD 
 
 O' 
 
 CI- 
 
 &- 
 
 ft- 
 
 ft- 
 
 Cr" 
 
 
 
 n> 
 
 fD 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q^ 
 
 ft. 
 
 
 
 ft-
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 9 
 
 The smallest unaltered interval is the minor second, or semitone : and 
 it is convenient to compare and measure all larger intervals by the 
 number of semitones they contain, or to which they are equivalent. 
 
 The perfect consonant intervals, according to the usual computation, 
 are the octave and the fifth ; to which may be added the fourth also, 
 though only under certain restrictions, to be considered hereafter. 
 
 The imperfect consonant intervals are the major and minor third, and 
 the major and minor sixth. 
 
 The dissonant intervals are the second and the seventh, each of which 
 may also be major or minor. 
 
 If the interval of a semitone be subtracted from any perfect or minor 
 interval, by means of a sharp or flat, to alter the pitch of the lower or 
 upper notes respectively, such interval is said to be diminished. 
 
 If by the same means a perfect or major interval be enlarged to the 
 same extent, such interval is said to be augmented 
 
 All augmented or diminished intervals so produced are called chro- 
 matic dissonances, except the two which occur in the diatonic major 
 scale, i. e. the augmented fourth or tritone between the 4th and 7th 
 degree, and the diminished fifth between the 7th degree and the 4th 
 in the next octave. Of all which more will be said hereafter. 
 
 If an octave be added to any interval, its original character (as re- 
 gards divisibility into major, minor, augmented, or diminished) remains 
 the same ; only that in the case of the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, and 6th, they 
 are in that case sometimes designated as the 9th, 10th, 11th, 12th, 13th, 
 as will be more fully explained in a future section. 
 
 We here annex a list of all the intervals, illustrated in the key of 
 C natural. 
 
 Note. Some writers call augmented intervals " extreme." Others call augmented perfect 
 intervals " pluperfect." Others call diminished fifths " false fifths." Others call augmented 
 fourths " tritones." Others call minor sevenths and seconds " flat." Others call major 
 

 
 10 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 sevenths and seconds " sharp." Others call diminished fourths " flattened." Others call 
 augmented fifths "sharp." 
 
 But every one of these terms is unsystematic and unphilosophical, and some of them 
 are absolutely incorrect. 
 
 7. There are yet remaining a few technical terms which ought to be 
 explained in this preliminary chapter. 
 
 (a) A cliord is the simultaneous sounding of several different notes, 
 selected according to certain fixed principles and rules. 
 
 (j8) A triad is a chord of three notes consisting of a bass with its 
 third and fifth, e.g. 
 
 Triads are of three kinds : — 
 
 i. Major; ii. Minor; iii. Imjperfect, or diminished. 
 
 A major triad consists of a major third and perfect fifth. 
 A minor triad consists of a minor third and perfect fifth. 
 An imperfect triad consists of a minor third and diminished fifth. 
 
 (7) If the octave of the bass is added above a major or minor triad, 
 it constitutes what is called a common cliord. 
 
 ^OTE. The imperfect triad being (as its name imports) not formed after the same perfect 
 model as the major and minor triads, cannot be converted into a common chord by the 
 addition of the octave of its lowest note. 
 
 {Examples) fL ^ 
 
 * A major triad. 
 § Imperfect triad. 
 
 -^s- 
 
 m 
 
 -^ 
 
 '^^ 
 
 t 
 
 X 
 
 § 
 
 1[ 
 
 t A minor triad. 
 
 If Common chord major. 
 
 X Imperfect triad. 
 
 II Common chord minor.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 11 
 
 Besides these triads we occasionally meet with what is called an 
 augmented triad, which consists of a major third and augmented fifth, 
 
 or of two major thirds superposed ; thus 
 
 M 
 
 ^ 
 
 8. It may be as well here to explam one or two terms which belong 
 rather to counterpoint than to harmony, but to wliich reference must 
 necessarily be made in treating of the resolution of discords, and in 
 some other cases also. 
 
 i. Motion is of three kinds : — similar, obhque, and contrary. 
 
 a. Similar motion is said to exist between any two or more parts, 
 or voices, which ascend or descend simultaneously, but not in 
 
 unison ; e. g. 
 
 ^^g: 
 
 
 &C. 
 
 j8. Oblique motion is when one part remains without moving while 
 another ascends or descends ; e. g. 
 
 ici 
 
 
 xz 
 
 7. Contrary motion is when two parts, or voices, move in opposite 
 directions ; e. g. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 :jrj=^ 
 
 Avr r r 
 
 ii. Consecutive fifths or octaves are produced when two parts move so 
 as to produce the same interval (of a fifth or an octave, as the 
 
 c 2
 
 12 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 case may be) between tbem in successive chords. There are several 
 kinds of such consecutive fifths and octaves. 
 
 a. By similar motion ; e. g. 
 
 ^ 
 
 -(S^- 
 
 :,^=^ 
 
 a 
 
 or 
 
 /8. By contrary motion ; e. g. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -(S>— ' 
 
 -tS>- 
 
 :^d 
 
 or 
 
 5^^ 
 
 r 
 
 -p^ I 
 
 "?:^ 
 
 7. Hidden fifths or octaves, which occur when an unaccented note 
 intervenes without any change of fundamental harmony ; e. g. 
 
 --i^i 
 
 By the laws of strict counterpoint, every consecutive fifth or octave, 
 of any of the above kinds, is altogether forbidden. 
 
 Consecutive major thirds have been hkewise forbidden by some ancient 
 authorities, though modem composers use them very freely. Still it must 
 be admitted that several unaccompanied major thirds in succession do 
 produce a very disagreeable effect. Any one playing the following notes 
 on a keyed instrument will perceive their badness : — 
 
 ^ ^ ^ C^ — 
 
 Consecutive fourths are also strictly forbidden, unless accompanied
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 13 
 
 by thirds below them, when they become perfectly correct and pleasant 
 
 to the ear ; thus 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 -(S»- 
 
 is bad, while 
 
 Wff 
 
 is good. 
 
 It is unnecessary to go any further now into this matter, as the 
 harmonic principle involved will be duly explained in its proper place.
 
 CHAPTER 11. 
 
 Fii'st Principles of Harmony. 
 
 1. The origin of harmony must be sought in natural phsenomena. This involves an 
 acquaintance with the science of acoustics, and is therefore more or less foreign to the 
 peculiar subject of this treatise. Still, it will be necessary to obsei-ve here that the primary 
 chord given us by nature is the following : — root, octave, twelfth, fifteenth, seventeenth, and 
 nineteenth. 
 
 As an example of such a natural and primary chord, we wiU assume C as our root, or 
 generator, and give the notes which result from it as natural harmonics : — 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 q: 
 
 root 
 
 octave 12th 
 
 15th 
 
 -&■ 
 
 17th 19th 
 
 The interval of an octave is so perfect a concord, that it may be regarded as almost 
 equivalent to an unison. It is therefore possible for us to omit for the present the root 
 
 and its octave ■^^^- 
 
 2!2 
 
 "3r 
 
 , as they are sufficiently represented by its double octave 
 
 (or fifteenth), 
 
 ^ 
 
 Similarly, we may for the present omit the twelfth of the root, 
 sufficiently represented by its own octave 
 
 _ , as it is 
 
 , which is the nineteenth, or octave- 
 
 twelfth, or double-octave-fifth, of the original generator.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 15 
 
 We get then, as our residuum, the major triad 
 harmony of nature. 
 
 which is the primary 
 
 2. If we were to continue the natural series of harmonic sounds as they occur in nature, 
 we should arrive at some which would lead us out of the key in which we began, and which 
 in fact do not belong to that key at all, but to others related to it in a peculiar way, which 
 will be explained when we come to speak of modulation. 
 
 For instance, starting from the generator C, as before, we should find the following 
 sequence of notes succeeding those given above : — 
 
 r^^ ^ P - 
 
 ^^"p- ^ .. ^^ 
 
 ^2: 
 
 W^- 
 
 ^- 
 
 ^^=^2=^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 -j:2. 
 
 i? 
 
 ±zz± 
 
 O X o 
 
 o 
 
 Now of these there are four, marked x , which not only are foreign to the key of C, 
 but are out of tune in any key. 
 
 Four others, marked © , are merely repetitions of the intervals of the major triad in an 
 upper octave. They may therefore be considered as identical with the primary chord we 
 have already obtained. 
 
 Two only remain, D and B, which we can make use of for our present purpose. 
 
 On carefully examining these two notes, and combining them with the note G which 
 we already possess, we find that they constitute together a major triad. 
 
 To shew this more clearly, let us take the highest G in the above figure. 
 
 the B next above it, 
 
 ■^ 
 
 ^2_ 
 
 written beyond the double bar 
 
 ^i 
 
 : and let us take the higher octave of the D, which is 
 
 and this gives us the major triad 
 
 «y
 
 16 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 of which G may be regarded as the generator, just as C is the generator of the triad 
 
 3. Seeing that octaves may be neglected in these considerations, it will be convenient to 
 write this new major triad an octave lower, thus 
 
 ; and setting out the whole 
 harmonic series of G, of which it forms the principal part, we produce this scheme — 
 
 cz 
 
 i 
 
 :& 
 
 n 'P "- 
 
 3^#^ 
 
 No. i. 
 
 VI. Vll. VIU. IX. 
 
 XU. Xlll. XIV. XV. XVI. 
 
 Here it will be observed, that every note belongs to the key of C till we come to the 
 double bar : and although the note F, marked x , is not perfectly in tune, yet we can sub- 
 stitute a really true F without at all materially disturbing our new series of sounds. 
 
 Omitting, then, numbers i, ii, iii, viii, x, (and of course all beyond the double bar,) as we 
 did in the case of the harmonic series of the generator C, we get as our residuum the chord 
 
 , which is called the " dominant chord of nature," being based on the fifth of the 
 
 key; which fifth is called the, dominant, because it exercises the most powerful influence on 
 the harmony. 
 
 Reducing our two chords to the same octave, and writing them in juxtaposition, 
 , our ear at once detects a close relationship between them, and on 
 hearing the former of the two, it immediately feels a desire to hear 
 the latter also, and feels relieved and satisfied when it has been 
 sounded. 
 
 4. From the preceding section it will have been seen that while the dominant harmony 
 suggests the idea of chcmge or motion, and tends to the primary major triad, that primary 
 major triad suggests no such idea, but rather induces rest, and in fact determines the key 
 in which the music is written ; gives, as it were, the chai'acteristic tone to the music : hence
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 17 
 
 the original generator is called the Tonic, and its triad or common chord is called Tonic 
 harmony. 
 
 If we were to be confined to tonic harmony alone, we should be like a i)risoner within 
 the four walls of a gaol — we could never get out of one groove. Our fatigue would become 
 unbearable. 
 
 d: 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 S^ 
 
 s= 
 
 
 i-y=j-^ 
 
 ^h=^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 'n^^t^rr 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 rrf^==rrf 
 
 =^ 
 
 5S= 
 
 If this passage be played over several times, it will give a fair idea of the irksomeness of 
 purely tonic harmony. 
 
 On the other hand, if we were confined to dominant harmony, not only should we have 
 a continually unsatisfied craving after a Tonic chord, but we should be even more wearied 
 than in the above case. An example will sujfficiently prove this : — 
 
 ^3 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 ^ij=d: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -<s>-^ 
 
 \r^f-^^ 
 
 2=k 
 
 -m 
 
 JPL 
 
 -^ 
 
 rr 
 
 '^' 
 
 d^r^d-^^^ 
 
 d: 
 
 S 
 
 -fS*- 
 
 -Gh 
 
 -& 
 
 _»__ 
 
 1^2 
 
 S^ 
 
 '^^• 
 
 
 .«• 
 
 Play over this exclusively dominant piece, and it will remind you of a traveller wandering 
 homeless from place to place, seeking a welcome, and finding none.
 
 18 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 But an alternation of tonic and dominant chords will always excite and satisfy the ear,' 
 just as alternate activity and rest are salutary and pleasant to the body. 
 
 5, It may, then, be taken as proved, that the key-note or tonic, with 
 its third and fifth, satisfies the ear, and leads it to desire no further 
 change. For this reason, the close or " perfect cadence " of a piece of 
 music must always terminate in a tonic chord. 
 
 It may also be taken as proved, that the fifth of the tonic, which 
 is called the dominant, with its third, fifth, minor seventh, and major 
 ninth, does not satisfy the ear, but leads it to desire a change to the 
 tonic harmony. For this reason the dominant harmony never can 
 end a piece, but should precede the tonic. 
 
 And it is from this characteristic feature of the dominant harmony 
 that the whole system of the resolution of fundamental discords is 
 derived, of which we shall soon have to speak. 
 
 This is a most important first principle, and should be thoroughly 
 understood and mastered by the pupil before going any further. For 
 which object it is desirable that he should strike the following dominant 
 chords, pausing after each, and realizing the unsatisfactory impression 
 they leave on the ear : — 
 
 22: 
 
 ~JZZ. 
 
 M^ 
 
 b^ 
 
 -<s 
 
 -ci-^ 
 
 \:^ 
 
 HS>- 
 
 \i^ 
 
 "<>> 
 
 \y 
 
 -Gh 
 
 -^ 
 
 S>- 
 
 v^ 
 
 \U 
 
 \:^
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 19 
 
 To shew how the ear may be satisfied by a tonic chord succeeding 
 each of these dominant chords, let the student play the following : — 
 
 jQ_ 
 
 s 
 
 ^. 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 i± 
 
 Z21 
 
 -Gh 
 
 Si^ 
 
 !2 a 
 
 T2-- 
 
 ^ 
 
 :22: 
 
 ^ --^ 
 
 C2: 
 
 T^ 
 
 -"Gh 
 
 X^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 -<st- 
 
 x^ 
 
 is>- 
 
 s>- 
 
 "^?" 
 
 M=n=3B 
 
 =g: 
 
 iq: 
 
 ^^ 
 
 g 
 
 ;^^ 
 
 -!?(S^ 
 
 -^^^ 
 
 "^7" 
 
 -iZf:^ 
 
 12^:2 -_ !2^ 
 
 i2^ 
 
 J^L 
 
 e 
 
 172^ 
 
 -•S) 
 
 -ts^ 
 
 -?»^- 
 
 t54Si'- 
 
 ^Is*- 
 
 -9|S>- 
 
 -c^- 
 
 ^s^ 
 
 and he will perceive that in each case the tonic chord, which here suc- 
 ceeds the dominant, at once satisfies the ear, and produces the sensation 
 of rest. 
 
 6. It must next be observed, that it is not every note in the domi- 
 nant harmony which necessarily possesses the peculiarity of leading thus 
 to the tonic. For if we simply take the major triad of the dominant 
 root, there is notliing in it to shew that it is not a tonic triad : for 
 
 instance. 
 
 g= 
 
 ^ 
 
 may be simply the tonic harmony of the key of G. 
 
 But the moment we add the next note in order which belongs to 
 the dominant harmony, which in this case would be F, thus ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 we preclude all impressions of the key of G, or of G as a tonic root, for 
 
 D 2
 
 20 THE PEINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 tlie F here is natural, and therefore out of the scale of G, which of course 
 requires the F to be sharpened. 
 
 Moreover, the intei'val of a minor seventh, from G to F, and of a 
 diminished fifth, from B to F, at once destroy all the rest and jpei^ma- 
 nence of the chord. 
 
 This minor seventh, then, is clearly the characteristic note which 
 invests the chord with its distinctively dominant character. Hence this 
 chord is generally called the " chord of the dominant seventh." 
 
 Note. This chord is often called the " added seventh," because it is composed of a seventh 
 added to a major triad. It is also sometimes called the " fundamental seventh," to distin- 
 guish it from other chords of the seventh. Likewise some writers call it the " minor seventh" 
 chord. None of these designations are incorrect, but in this work it will be invariably styled 
 the " chord of the dominant seventh." 
 
 7. Tliis chord, as we have just seen, contains discords, and these are 
 made to satisfy the ear by means of the chord of the tonic, which must 
 follow immediately. When the discords have thus been rendered agree- 
 able to the ear, they are said to be resolved ; and this resolution of dis- 
 cords forms the most important element of the science of harmony. 
 
 The rule for resolving the chord of the dominant seventh is a very- 
 simple one : " Each of the discordant notes leads to and is resolved into 
 that note in the succeeding tonic chord which is nearest to it in pitch, 
 whether that note be above or below it on the scale." 
 
 Thus, in the chord i ^~"8 — , which is resolved into 7/K ^ > the F 
 
 goes to E, and the B to C, the bass note G of course goes to the bass 
 note C (root to root), while the D, being equidistant from C and E, may 
 go to either. 
 
 It appears, then, that the only notes (beside the root) which have 
 a compulsory resolution, are the third, B, and the seventh, F. Of these,
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 21 
 
 the " third of the dominant" always goes to the octave of the tonic root, 
 and is therefore called the " leading note/' while the seventh always falls 
 to the third of the tonic. 
 
 This is a most important rule, and leads to many essential conse- 
 quences. It should therefore be thoroughly learnt and appreciated at 
 this early stage of the student's progress. We accordingly give a few 
 examples in different keys, by way of illustration : — 
 
 8. It would seem that the tendency to a tonic resolution, which, as 
 
 we have seen, is the characteristic feature of the chord of the dominant 
 
 seventh, is attributable mainly to the discordant interval which exists 
 
 between the third and seventh, and which is either a diminished fifth, (if 
 
 the third be below the seventh,) or an augmented fourth, (if the seventh 
 
 be below the third,) as may be seen by a careful examination of the 
 
 preceding examples, where the intervals are purposely placed in various 
 
 positions. 
 
 Note. Any interval within an octave is susceptible of what is called " inversion." Which 
 may be thus explained : —
 
 22 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 If the lower of the tvvo notes forming any interval be changed into its upper octave, e. g. 
 I^ changed to /L ~r^ - J , the interval is said to be inverted, or, in other words. 
 
 the new interval thus formed is an inversion of the former : thus if the interval 
 
 ^ 
 
 be given, then its inversion will be 
 
 m 
 
 :^ 
 
 The same result will be obtained if the upper note be taken down an octave : thus — 
 
 P 
 
 It will be seen by the subjoined table that the inversions of 'perfect intervals are perfect; 
 of major, ai*e minor; of minor, are major; of augmented, are diminished; of diminished, 
 are augmented. 
 
 The student is recommended to copy out this list, and name all the upper and lower 
 intervals according to the table given in Chap. I. sect. 6. 
 
 Indeed, if a diminished fifth or an augmented fourth be played, alone 
 and unaccompanied, the same craving after resolution will ensue. Thus, if 
 
 2^^y be struck, the ear craves the regular resolution f^ ^ 
 
 -& 
 
 J
 
 and if the inversion 
 
 the regular resolution 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 23 
 
 be played, a similar craving is felt for 
 
 This effect, however, is enhanced by the discord which exists between 
 the minor seventh and the root, and more strongly still between the 
 minor seventh and the octave, where the interval of a major second is 
 
 produced. Thus i fr)—^^ — g— or ^f 
 
 IQ 
 
 ^- 
 
 -is»- 
 
 9. The dominant harmony contains yet another note besides those 
 we have been considering, as will be seen by a reference to Section 3 
 of this Chapter. It is called the major ninth, and it is occasionally 
 added to the chord of the dominant seventh, to strengthen, vary, and 
 enhance its effect, although it is not an essential element of that chord. 
 
 When thus enhanced, the complete chord is appropriately called the 
 " chord of the added ninth," or the " chord of the fundamental ninth," to 
 distinguish it from certain other chords of the ninth which will be ex- 
 plained hereafter. 
 
 The addition of this new dominant interval to the chord of the 
 dominant seventh does not alter the resolution of the two essential 
 notes of that chord (i. e. the third and the seventh). The third rises to 
 the octave of the tonic root, and the seventh falls to the third of the 
 tonic, just as they would were the ninth absent. 
 
 The ninth itself, being as it were a coadjutor and strengthener of 
 the seventh, pursues a similar course to that which is peculiar to that
 
 24 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 interval. While the seventh falls to the third of the tonic, the ninth 
 falls to its fifth. Thus 
 
 -& 
 
 :^3: 
 
 Here we see by an example the necessary resolution of the dominant 
 root, the third, the seventh, the ninth ; but how about the fifth, D % 
 If the ninth were not there, this note might either rise to E, or fall to 0, 
 being (nearly) equidistant from both. But the addition of the ninth. A, 
 renders it impossible for the D to proceed downwards to C, without 
 violating that rule of counterpoint which forbids consecutive fifths (see 
 
 Chap. I. sect. 8. no. ii.), for their joint progress would be 
 
 ^ 
 
 :P2: 
 
 Therefore the fifth of the dominant root (here D) is forced in this 
 case to adopt the alternative of rising to the third of the tonic (here E). 
 
 To shew this more clearly, we will arrange the notes of the chord 
 in the following position : — 
 
 m 
 
 :ezz2: 
 
 122115" 
 
 t:?~i 
 
 -1— (S>- 
 
 m 
 
 Note. Logier does not appear to recognize any dominant interval of harmony beyond 
 the dominant minor seventh. He regards the major and minor dominant ninths as no 
 more than substituted notes.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 In this Fetis agrees with him in his valuable Treatise on Harmony. 
 
 But this seems to be a very unphilosophical view of the case. For nature supplies us 
 with both these intervals, (the major and minor ninth,) one perfectly, and the other almost 
 perfectly, in tune, as will be shewn hereafter (Chaps. IV and VI), whereas the natural 
 dominant minor seventh is by no means so perfect. 
 
 Then again, it is not philosophical to account for an interval by the hypothesis of a 
 substituted note, and yet to allow of the coexistence and simultaneous use of that note and 
 of the one for which it is supposed to be substituted : e. g. 
 
 8 > Q 
 
 ^ 
 
 -3— Sit 
 
 IBZZZS 
 
 where the A according to these theorists would be substituted for G, and yet the G is 
 allowed to be sounded in another octave. 
 
 Surely it is more consistent with analogy, and more agreeable to the phjenomena of nature, 
 to regard the ninth here as an added harmonic, derived from the chord aflforded us by nature, 
 
 XT- 
 
 as will be more fully explained hei-eafter (vide Chaps. Ill, IV, VI). 
 
 E
 
 CHAPTER 111. 
 
 1. From what has been abeady said, it will have appeared that the 
 intervals of a chord may be inverted amongst themselves, and their 
 order of acuteness interchanged, without thereby altermg either their 
 relations to the root or to each other. 
 
 This may be illustrated by taking the triad or common chord of C, 
 and the chords of the dominant seventh, and of the added ninth, and 
 arranging them variously. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 .CL 
 
 e 
 
 ■^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 "7^r~ ^-1~r^ H— ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 ?2: 
 
 -^ 
 
 iS»- 
 
 -^ 
 
 :g=U 
 
 :^--gr 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 ^^y 
 
 --& 
 
 &c., &c. 
 
 @: 
 
 ?2: 
 
 P^zif^ 
 
 T^ 
 
 rJ rj 
 
 y^-rj rJ 
 
 ^ \^j ^~r5 g2 
 
 ^ 
 
 rj f j zp r^ r j^ 
 
 :B 
 
 :^i 
 
 ^ 
 
 S 
 
 ^- 
 
 -sf 
 
 -^ — f^ — s 
 
 & 
 
 -cP=g^ 
 
 -^hT- 
 
 S=^ 
 
 :& 
 
 -^2. 
 
 -f=^ 
 
 -^^ 
 
 -|Q- 
 
 &C.J &c. 
 
 P=r 
 
 S» lis — & — ts- 
 
 3^ 
 
 -&-
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 27 
 
 But we may now go a step further, and omit the root altogether, 
 substituting for it occasionally its octave in an upper part. 
 
 The effect of this will obviously be that one of the other notes of 
 the chord will be at the bottom of the harmony. 
 
 But although the root be in such a case unheard, yet it must be 
 always imagined. 
 
 All the other notes of the chord are equally derived from it, and 
 dependent on it. And the chords thus modified are called inverted 
 chords — or inversions — and their constituent intervals will require the 
 same treatment, for the most part, as though the root were sounded. 
 
 The effect on the ear, however, will not be the same, especially in the 
 inversions of the tonic harmony, for the sensation of rest and fixity will 
 be absent : and therefore " every piece of music must end with an un- 
 inverted tonic chord." 
 
 2. The tonic triad consisting of three notes, and either of the upper 
 ones being capable of being taken as the lowest note in the harmony, 
 by inversion, as above described, it is clear that only two such inversions 
 are possible — first, when the third is in the bass, and secondly, when the 
 fifth is in the bass. 
 
 When the third is in the bass, it is called the " first inversion of the 
 common chord ;" and as the octave of the root then forms the interval 
 of a sixth with the third which is placed in the bass, this chord is also 
 
 called the " chord of the sixth." For instance, deriving it from C, / ■i s Cj 
 
 E 2
 
 28 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 it will appear iii the following forms, according to the collocation of the 
 upper notes of which it is composed : 
 
 -f^ 
 
 -Q- 
 
 -f^ 
 
 
 C^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 t^ r^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 ^2: 
 
 q: 
 
 e 
 
 :?2: 
 
 -*s- 
 
 -<s 
 
 =^ 
 
 -Gh 
 
 s»- 
 
 kS^- 
 
 J- 
 
 &C.J &c. 
 
 p rj r^ p r^ r^-z— ^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 TZL 
 
 ^2: 
 
 ^2: 
 
 where it may be observed that either the octave of the root or its fifth, 
 (i. e. C, or G,) may be doubled, appearing in two octaves. Likewise, 
 the G may be left out, but C must not, as it is the characteristic note 
 of the chord. 
 
 When the fifth is in the bass, it is called " the second inversion of 
 the common chord," and, as the octave of the root then forms the interval 
 of a fourth with the fifth which is placed in the bass, and as, moreover, 
 the third of the root forms, with tliis same bass note, the interval of a 
 sixth, — this chord is also called the " chord of the fourth and sixth," 
 or, more concisely, the " chord of the six-four." For example, taking C 
 
 as oiu- root as before, 
 foUows : 
 
 IQ 
 
 --gr 
 
 , this chord will appear variously as 
 
 i 
 
 XT 
 
 -O- 
 
 P^ ffi 
 
 2^ 
 
 e 
 
 2^ 
 
 122: 
 
 *i 
 
 23: 
 
 S 
 
 ±=a 
 
 p::2_ 
 
 'rj rJ^ 
 
 ^2: 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 s^ 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 --g: 
 
 ■4S>- 
 
 -» 
 
 -o- 
 
 -iS 
 
 r ^ r^ r^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 2~r> q: 
 
 'f^ r^ r:t r:^ 
 
 r^ r n — r^ ^^ ^'^
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 29 
 
 This second inversion is less satisfactory than the first, and should be 
 more sparingly employed. 
 
 3. And perhaps this will be the most fitting place to introduce the 
 subject of what is known as " thorough-bass-figming." 
 
 This is a kind of musical short-hand, of no great value, but occa- 
 sionally convenient, by which figures, placed under or over the bass notes 
 of a piece of music, are used to mdicate, vaguely but concisely, the kind 
 of harmony to be played with the given bass. 
 
 A bass note with no figures attached to it, indicates a simple imaltered 
 triad or common chord. If, however, one of the notes of the harmony 
 has to be modified by an accidental sharp or flat, such modification is 
 indicated by an accidental instead of a figure, (in the case of the third,) 
 or by an accidental added to a figure, (in the case of the fifth). Thus 
 the chords 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^ ^^'- 
 
 "-^^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 ^&r 
 
 -<^- 
 
 :p2: 
 
 ^± 
 
 ^- 
 
 ^-^ 
 
 may be thus expressed 
 
 z:± 
 
 -G^ 
 
 3 
 
 P 
 
 «5 
 
 -S* — " 
 
 The chord of the dominant seventh is always expressed by the 
 figure 7, either alone or with any accidental natural or flat which it 
 may require. If the fifth or third in the chord require it, accidentals
 
 30 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 may be used for them as in the case of the common chord. Thus the 
 chords 
 
 -^ 
 
 e=»3 
 
 fS>- 
 
 &- 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^^m 
 
 zd: 
 
 -& 
 
 j::z. 
 
 would be figured as follows 
 
 m 
 
 -s^ 
 
 T^ 
 
 I 
 
 C7 
 
 3 
 
 -<Si 
 
 ~JZZ. 
 
 b7 
 
 i 
 
 'i 
 
 The first inversion of the common chord is figured with a 6. The 
 second inversion of the common chord with a ^. Thus 
 
 i 
 
 3 
 
 IS p—^p r^^ 
 
 Pf^ 
 
 2± 
 
 ±mr^ 
 
 -t^- 
 
 9^ ^&<Sl- 
 
 m 
 
 T^ 
 
 -^ ft ^ 
 
 :c2: 
 
 S 
 
 e 
 
 :^i=:Jt^ 
 
 would be indicated as follows 
 
 6 J "-« "■« 
 
 ^f 
 
 °p^ 
 
 bt 
 
 ^ p ft^ 
 
 - ^ gp - 
 
 1^ 
 
 :P2: 
 
 Ifp^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 where it should be observed that it is usual to indicate a sharp sixth, 
 fourth, or second by a Hne drawn through the figure : thus 6, 4), %,
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 31 
 
 These s)niibols are of course perfectly arbitrary, and are merely used 
 for convenience and brevity, and to save an extra stave in certain 
 cases. 
 
 4. The chord of the dominant seventh consists, as we have seen, of 
 four notes. It is consequently susceptible of three inversions. 
 
 The first inversion has the third in the bass. The octave of the 
 root forms with this bass note the interval of a sixth, the dominant 
 seventh forms the interval of a diminished fifth, and the fifth of the 
 root forms the interval of a third. This chord is called the " chord of 
 the fifth and sixth," or, more concisely, the " chord of the six-five." It 
 is most correct, however, to designate it as the " first inversion of the 
 dominant seventh," to avoid confusion with other chords of similar 
 appearance but different character. It is figured ^, with any accidentals 
 which may be necessary. 
 
 The second inversion has the fifth in the bass. The octave of the 
 root forms the interval of a fourth, — the seventh, that of a third, — and 
 the third, that of a sixth, — with the bass note. It is most correctly 
 designated as the " second inversion of the dominant seventh ;" but it is 
 also frequently called the " chord of the six-four-three," from the intervals 
 
 of which it consists. It is figured 4, with whatever accidentals may be 
 requisite. 
 
 The third inversion has the seventh in the bass. The octave of the 
 root forms with this bass the interval of a second ; the fifth forms that 
 of a sixth ; and the third that of an augmented fourth. It is called 
 properly the " third inversion of the dominant seventh ;" but often also 
 the " chord of the six-four-two," or, the " chord of the second and fourth." 
 
 It is figured 4, with the requisite accidentals. 
 2
 
 32 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 We will now give examples of all these inversions, each with its 
 proper thorough-bass figuring : — 
 
 P ^b 3 2 2 2 
 
 Very often it wiU be a sufficient indication to figure the second inver- 
 sion ^, omitting the sixth; and to figure the third inversion |, or even 
 2 only. This may be done whenever no ambiguity can thence arise. 
 
 5. The inversion of a dominant chord does not in anywise change 
 the natural characteristics of the notes of which it is composed. The 
 same rules which held good, therefore, in the resolution of the funda- 
 mental chord, in its original condition, will equally hold good in the 
 case of its inversions. 
 
 Accordingly, in the first inversion, which has the leading note in 
 the bass, the bass note has a compulsory resolution upwards to the tonic 
 root, while the diminished fifth, which is the minor seventh of the domi- 
 nant root, is compelled to fall to the third of the tonic. For example — 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^fP 
 
 -<s- 
 
 s>- 
 
 ^-^ = 3— r 
 
 S 
 
 rJ jfr^ ^— ^ g^- 
 
 1^ 
 
 The second inversion has the fifth in the bass, and consequently this
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 33 
 
 note may either ascend to the thii'd of the tonic or descend to the 
 tonic itself, according to circumstances, the fifth of the dominant 
 having no comptdsory resohition. The third in this chord, being the 
 seventh of the root, must of course descend to the third of the tonic ; 
 while the sixth, which is the leading note, is compelled to rise to the 
 octave of the tonic root. 
 
 The tliird inversion has the dominant seventh itself in the bass, 
 which is therefore compelled to fall to the third of the tonic. But the 
 third of the tonic in the bass constitutes the first inversion of the common 
 chord : therefore the third inversion of the chord of the dominant seventh 
 must always be followed by the first inversion of the tonic common chord. 
 The augmented fourth in this chord is the leading note, and goes of 
 course to the octave of the tonic root. 
 
 In all the inversions, the octave of the dominant root remains without 
 motion, being converted into the fifth of the tonic. The next examples 
 will shew all this more clearly. 
 
 m 
 
 '-^^ 
 
 -&- 
 
 2i 
 
 Z2: 
 
 f- 
 
 -<st 
 
 ^w^- 
 
 t^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 ^ 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 iq: 
 
 XF'rj-^ g: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 "Cr 
 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
 'IZ2L 
 
 •^~ 
 
 r 
 
 T^ 
 
 ^G)- 
 
 2i: 
 
 ici: 
 
 -G^ 
 
 ^in^i 
 
 b6 
 
 F
 
 34 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 We will now give a longer example, including all the inversions of 
 the common chord and the chord of the dominant seventh, with their 
 various resolutions and coiTect thorough-bass figuring. 
 
 H 
 
 _c^ 
 
 :d 
 
 JOL. 
 
 :g=^ 
 
 fe 
 
 -^- 
 
 jCk- 
 
 -G>- 
 
 iS"- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 HS"- 
 
 -s>- 
 
 g 
 
 -«s>- 
 
 :e 
 
 =P^ 
 
 1!S>- 
 
 q: 
 
 -Q_ 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 £i 
 
 ^z 
 
 z::i 
 
 lS>- 
 
 gE^ 
 
 S^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 22: 
 
 -«s^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -.C2- 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 :s 
 
 =P2: 
 
 ^=^^^=0 
 
 -«s^ 
 
 |S>- 
 
 ?::^ 
 
 1^- 
 
 :z:2 
 
 -s>- 
 
 1^2: 
 
 -(S»- 
 
 z± 
 
 "C5" 
 
 -«S>- 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 -J^2L 
 
 «=^ 
 
 -e>- 
 
 -G^ 
 
 S^3 
 
 -s^ 
 
 -<S^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 =3= 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 _Q „ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ZZ 
 
 -(S- 
 
 if^ 
 
 3^ 
 
 -!S»- 
 
 -^s — <s- 
 
 :?:? 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -&- 
 
 The student is recommended to copy this out, and to analyse each 
 chord carefully, putting the letter D over those chords that are dominant, 
 and T over those that are tonic, and drawing Hues from all the discordant 
 notes to those which resolve them, according to the foregoing rules.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 35 
 
 6. In the chord of the dominant seventh, in its original position, neither 
 the root nor the seventh can be omitted. The leading note may be, on 
 an emergency, but it is always better to avoid this. The fifth may be 
 omitted whenever it is convenient to do so, as it is not an essential note 
 in the chord. 
 
 In the first inversion of the dominant seventh the leading note is the 
 bass, and of course cannot be omitted. The seventh of the root, which 
 here becomes a diminished fifth, is the characteristic note, and therefore 
 cannot be spared. The octave of the root, which here is a sixth, may 
 occasionally be omitted ; but if this is done, the chord is converted into 
 a dimmished triad, and becomes weak and ambiguous, as we shall see 
 hereafter ; still, when necessary, it may be omitted. The fifth of the root, 
 which here is a third, may be omitted at pleasure, when convenient. 
 
 In the second inversion, the fifth of the root becomes the bass, and 
 cannot be omitted ; the fundamental seventh, which is here the third, 
 cannot be omitted, for the same reasons as in the former cases. The 
 leading note, which is the sixth in this inversion, ought not to be left 
 out, except when absolutely necessary. But the octave of the root not 
 only may be omitted, but it is generally better that it should be, because 
 of the harsh effect of the interval of a perfect fourth which it makes 
 with the bass. 
 
 In the third m version, the fundamental seventh being in the bass is 
 essential, and must remain. The octave of the root should hardly ever 
 be omitted. The leading note, which forms the augmented fourth, cannot 
 well be dispensed with ; but the fifth of the root, which is here a sixth, 
 may be omitted, whenever it is convenient. 
 
 These rules about omissions will be found specially useful when the 
 student begins to write music in less than four-part harmony. 
 
 F 2
 
 36 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Examples of imperfect chords, with the various omissions allowed- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 zz 
 
 -s>- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -^- 
 
 lor. 
 
 22: 
 
 -s>- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 s 
 
 -s>- 
 
 321 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 S: 
 
 -<s^ 
 
 i^z: 
 
 hS>- 
 
 i^z: 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 22: 
 
 -s>- 
 
 1221 
 
 05 
 
 -7 1 
 
 
 rzi 
 
 
 
 ^--i 
 
 n 
 
 Xl .-^ <"-^ 
 
 ^-^ r^ 
 
 >5 
 
 C^ 1 
 
 1^^ '^-^ 
 
 r^ 1 
 
 ^"i ^ r^ 
 
 
 1 
 
 c^ 
 
 II 
 
 y>\) ^-^ ^-^ 
 
 
 '^-^ 
 
 1 
 
 r^ 
 
 
 rj 
 
 ^-. w 
 
 J ^ ^ 
 
 /'i^• • — - 
 
 
 i'-:) ' 
 
 rj 
 
 r^ 
 
 ift)- 
 
 
 rj 
 
 
 rj 
 
 
 r^ 1 
 
 
 
 V-^ 
 
 
 1 
 
 r^ 
 
 r^ 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 7. It is allowable, and indeed often necessary, to donhle a part, i. e. 
 to let the same note be heard at once in two different octaves. 
 
 Now it is obvious that if we thus double a note whose progression 
 is compulsoiy, we must either break the compelling rule or fall into the 
 great contrapuntal error of consecutive octaves. For instance, if we double 
 
 the leading note "^ 
 
 ^<S)- 
 
 and resolve the chord regularly, both 
 
 the notes E will go to F ; thus 
 
 E 
 
 producmg the consecutive octaves y cL-b^ 
 
 221 
 
 ^ 
 
 Q r^ 
 
 therefore the first general rule is, that " the leading note and the domi- 
 nant seventh must not be doubled,"
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 37 
 
 The root and the fifth, however, may be doubled whenever it is con- 
 venient. For the dominant root may either go up a fourth or down a fifth 
 to the tonic root. And its octave has, besides this, the power of remaining 
 without motion. Moreover, either the root and its octave may also, 
 under certain circumstances, go to the third of the tonic, though this 
 is necessarily of very rare occiu-rence, for contrapuntal reasons. And 
 the fifth of the dominant root may either ascend or descend one degree 
 in its resolution ; when the dominant chord is inverted, moreover, it may 
 go up or down by a skip to the fifth of the tonic root. 
 
 In the second inversion of the chord of the dominant seventh, a licence 
 is allowed ; namely, that of doubling the fundamental seventh itself, when 
 the octave of the root is omitted ; and in that case it is considered suf- 
 ficient for one part, which has this interval, to resolve it regularly by 
 descending to the third of the tonic : the other, which is the double of 
 it, may then rise to the fifth of the tonic ; thus — 
 
 hSH 
 
 I^ 
 
 --^ 
 
 -Gt 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 =^ 
 
 22: 
 
 It is hetter in this case to resolve the upper note regularly, and let the 
 loiver one rise instead of falling ; though sometimes even this caution 
 is not strictly observed. 
 
 The fifth of the dominant root may either resolve upwards to the 
 third of the tonic, or downwards to the tonic itself or its octave. It 
 may also go by a skip to the fifth of the tonic, whenever such a pro- 
 gression Mill not involve consecutive fifths. 
 
 The best opportunity for this will be in the third inversion, when
 
 38 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 the progression of the bass is not to the tonic root, but to its first in- 
 version. The annexed examples will shew the various ways m which 
 the root and the fifth may be doubled — 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 _Q^2. 
 
 S5^ 
 
 
 iS 
 
 ^^=g: 
 
 .jQ_ 
 
 -Gf- 
 
 rj fj 
 
 zz: 
 
 1^2: 
 
 rjrj 
 
 '^ZiL 
 
 S: 
 
 ^2: 
 
 -<Sf- 
 
 jL^ 
 
 ^rj,rj rj-_ 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 1^2: 
 
 "C^ 
 
 -s- 
 
 -s>- 
 
 -o- 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 &e., &c. 
 
 1^21 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 :s2: 
 
 3: 
 
 ~rjr- r\ 
 
 IZH 
 
 -<s><s>- 
 
 8. There is yet one case which remains to be noticed, which is when 
 the chord of the dominant seventh is resolved by the second inversion 
 of the tonic triad, instead of the original common chord of the tonic. 
 This occurs only in the course of a piece of music, never at its close ; 
 for the second inversion is no position of rest, but quite the contrary. 
 Example- 
 
 i 
 
 The student's ear will at once tell him that something must follow this 
 ere rest can be gained. 
 
 9. We must now speak of the chord of the added ninth and its 
 inversions. 
 
 This chord has five notes in it, and is therefore susceptible of four 
 inversions. It is fovmd, however, in practice, that the fourth of these is 
 seldom available. Still it will be as well to give the whole here, and 
 then to state the cautions and limitations which are required.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 39 
 
 The first inversion has the third in the bass ; thus 
 
 I 
 
 F 
 
 The second inversion has the fifth in the bass ; thus 
 
 m 
 
 fS»- 
 
 The third inversion has the seventh in the bass ; thus 
 
 (S^ 
 
 And the foiu"th inversion has the ninth in the bass ; thus 
 
 7=v (S> 1 
 
 © — F= 3 
 
 Now it will be perceived, on examining these chords, that all the 
 intervals except the ninth (A) are precisely the same as in the inversions
 
 40 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 of the dominant seventh. Consequently the resohition of these notes is 
 the same as it is in the former case ; except where the new interval of 
 the added ninth might cause consecutive fifths to occur. We have already 
 shewn that such is the case in the original position of the chord of the 
 added ninth : for if the fifth be resolved downwards to the tonic or its 
 octave, it makes consecutive fifths with the ninth ; thus 
 
 -& 
 
 :r± 
 
 Therefore in this case the fifth is of necessity resolved by ascending to 
 the third of the tonic. And this holds good also in the inversions. 
 The first inversion is thus resolved — 
 
 ^=rjr:^'' 
 
 -^ 
 
 or else thus 
 
 -^± 
 
 -is> — ei>& 
 
 in 
 
 (where the D skips downwards to the G). The latter plan is, on the 
 whole, preferable. 
 
 In the second inversion, the fifth, being in the bass, cannot go to 
 the tonic root, but is forced to go to the third of the tonic ; thus 
 
 :z2:
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 41 
 
 In the third inversion of course the same resolution must take place, 
 (i. e. to the first inversion of the tonic common chord,) because the domi- 
 nant seventh is in the bass ; thus 
 
 l(S>- 
 
 P^ 
 
 This is perhaps the pleasantest of these inversions, and the easiest to 
 manipulate. 
 
 The fourth inversion is crude and harsh, and should be avoided. In 
 it the ninth is in the bass : consequently its natural resolution is into 
 the second inversion of the tonic triad ; thus 
 
 ^ 
 
 T2: 
 
 In this case, the ninth being below the fifth, no consecutive fifths 
 are produced, and therefore the fifths may either ascend or descend. 
 
 10. The ninth may go into its resolution before the rest of the 
 chord ; thus 
 
 
 -Gh 
 
 ^± 
 
 r± 
 
 e=n 
 
 =s 
 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 «=^ 
 
 Ty 
 
 :^± 
 
 -o- 
 
 i^z: 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 -^ 
 
 -o- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -«s^ 
 
 T^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 G
 
 42 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY 
 or thus — 
 
 -f- S r3 n 
 
 y 
 
 ^ 
 
 r^ 
 
 rv n 
 
 ((\ >^ r^ II 
 
 11 ; c^ c^ W 
 
 tJ 
 
 — 1^— 
 
 
 
 iP^ 
 
 -^— 
 
 zp:_ 
 
 _^^ — H 
 
 V^ ' 1 II 
 
 II 
 
 This renders the fourth inversion rather less unwieldy, but still it is 
 very harsh and awkward. 
 
 11. Probably this harshness results simply from the fact that the 
 interval of the ninth is not susceptible of regular inversion, as it is 
 beyond the limits of the octave. In the chord of the added ninth, the 
 added note is essentially a ninth and not a second, seeing that it is 
 originally added on above the seventh. Therefore it must always be 
 kept at the distance of a ninth from the root, or the octave of the root, 
 in order to preserve its essential character. But in the fourth inversion 
 of the chord of the added ninth this feature is destroyed by the position 
 of the ninth in the bass. Hence the harshness and awkwardness of this 
 ugly inversion. 
 
 12. The thorough-bass figuring of the added ninth is §. The first 
 
 766 7 
 
 inversion is figured 6; the second 5; the third |; and the fourth §; 
 
 ^32 2 
 
 together with any accidental flats or sharps which may be required. 
 
 13. The chord of the added nmth is so full of notes, and consequently 
 of dissonances, that it is greatly improved by omissions and curtailments. 
 These must now be considered in order. 
 
 When this chord is uninverted, the best note to omit is the fifth.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 43 
 
 both because it is not essential to the character of the chord, and also 
 because by this omission all danger of consecutive fifths with the ninth 
 is avoided ; and in the resolution the third of the tonic triad need not 
 be doubled, as it otherwise must be. The leading note may also be 
 omitted, as the seventh and ninth are sujBB.cient without it to give a 
 distinctively dominant character to the chord. But neither the root, the 
 seventh, nor the ninth can be omitted. 
 
 In the first inversion it is always desirable to omit the octave of the 
 root, as this note forms very harsh discords both with the seventh and 
 ninth. The fifth may also be omitted freely, for the reasons given 
 before. The leading note, being in the bass, is essential, and of coiu"se 
 cannot be omitted. 
 
 Neither the seventh nor the ninth of the root can be ever left out. 
 
 Note. This rule may perhaps be occasionally relaxed in tlie case of tlie seventh, when 
 it could not be introduced without contravening the rules of counterpoint. But such licence 
 is not recommended. 
 
 In the second inversion, the fifth, being in the bass, cannot be dis- 
 pensed with. The octave of the root, however, is better away. The 
 leading note, seventh, and ninth of the root cannot be omitted. 
 
 Note. Here again some relaxation of the nile is sometimes necessitated in the case of 
 the seventh. But the chord when thus weakened loses much of its dominant character. 
 
 In the tliird inversion, which has the seventh in the bass, (and 
 therefore to be retained as essential,) the octave of the root may be 
 omitted, and so may the fifth, although the latter omission renders the 
 chord somewhat bare. The leading note and the ninth can on no 
 account be dispensed with. 
 
 In the fourth inversion, which has the ninth in the bass, it is almost 
 always necessary to leave out the octave of the root ; indeed the chord 
 
 G 2
 
 44 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 is hardly ever seen in its complete form, on account of its extreme 
 harshness. The Jifth may also be omitted, and even the seventh and 
 leading note, though these two last omissions almost divest the chord 
 of its dominant character : whichever of these two is omitted, therefore, 
 the other must always be retained. 
 
 The following are the usual forms of this chord, with the omission 
 of intervals, and with resolution and figuring : — 
 
 The chord of the added ninth with the fifth omitted. 
 All the resolutions in this case are compulsory. 
 
 m 
 
 ts>- 
 
 T^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 B=z^ 
 
 S- 
 
 2± 
 
 The first inversion, with the octave of the root 
 omitted. The fifth resolved by a skip, to avoid 
 consecutive fifths. 
 
 Note. The leading note is in French called "la note sensible;" and the first inversion of 
 the added ninth with the octave of the root omitted is therefore called " la septieme de sen- 
 sible." But inasmuch as this designation ignores the true derivation of the chord, it has 
 not been adopted in this work. 
 
 The first inversion, with the fifth of the root 
 omitted. 
 
 r:?
 
 -&- 
 
 :a 
 
 -^±. 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 45 
 
 The first inversion, with the octave and fifth of the 
 root both omitted. 
 
 
 -Gi- 
 
 Bl 
 
 -s^ 
 
 zz 
 
 The first inversion, with the dominant seventh omit- 
 ted. This should generally be avoided. 
 
 fefe 
 
 HS>- 
 
 -<S>L 
 
 1^2: 
 
 The second inversion, with the octave of the root 
 omitted. 
 
 I 
 
 m 
 
 -s>- 
 
 -fS>- 
 
 
 ~X2. 
 
 The second inversion, with the octave and seventh 
 of the root both omitted. This, however, is not 
 recommended.
 
 16 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 :^==^ 
 
 The third inversion, with the octave to the root 
 omitted. 
 
 ^— f^^ 
 
 |S>- 
 
 T^- 
 
 ^ 
 
 '^- 
 
 The third inversion, with the fifth of the root 
 omitted. 
 
 -Q- 
 
 :b ^~- 
 
 -P rj 
 
 The third inversion, with the octave and fifth of the 
 root both omitted. 
 
 da 
 
 ?^ gd -^^ The fourth inversion, with the octave of the root 
 omitted. Even thus it is too harsh to be used, 
 ^ ^^ ' except in very rare cases. 
 
 '-^'-
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 47 
 
 -Gh 
 
 ZZ 
 
 S 
 
 Z2: 
 
 The fourtli inversion, with the octave and fifth of 
 the root both omitted. This is just tolerable, and 
 may be occasionally used, with caution. 
 
 We can also in every case allow the ninth to fall to its resolution 
 before the other notes of the chord. This very much facilitates the use 
 of the fourth inversion. Examples — 
 
 S J J J ,1 J j 
 
 ?2 
 
 ^Bgp 
 
 ^ 
 
 J^ 
 
 u 
 
 ^ 
 
 A 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^- 
 
 T2L 
 
 T^ 
 
 -4^ 
 
 -<2. 
 
 is>- 
 
 (S>- 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^- 
 
 9 8 
 7 - 
 
 7 6 
 5 - 
 
 I '- 
 
 6-6 
 5 4 
 
 6 - 
 5 4 
 
 fc^iLd: 
 
 J=^ 
 
 _C^_ 
 
 (S»- 
 
 ^^ 
 
 f^ 
 
 s 
 
 is>- 
 
 &c., &c. 
 
 PSEE^ 
 
 '¥=^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 :q 
 
 -^- 
 
 -1^- 
 
 ^. 
 
 6 7 
 
 6 7 3 
 
 14. Some of the above chords have a strong resemblance, on j^9aj9er, 
 though not when sounded, to the dominant seventh and its inversions. 
 The thorough-bass figuring is also very often similar or identical. It
 
 48 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 will be as well, therefore, to shew how to distingLiish the chords belonging 
 to one series from those which belong to the other. 
 
 I 
 
 which is the first inversion of the chord of the added 
 
 # 
 
 _C2_ 
 
 ninth, with the octave of its root, G, omitted, might at first sight be 
 
 mistaken for a chord of the dominant seventh on the root B. But the 
 
 chord of the dominant seventh on B would require D and F to be 
 sharp, not natural, as here, and would be written thus 
 
 -^2- 
 
 f 
 For in the chord of the dominant seventh the tliird, or leading note, is 
 
 always major, and the fifth perfect : whereas in the first inversion of 
 
 the chord of the added ninth, the third is minor and the fifth 
 
 diminished. 
 
 Again, 
 
 which is the second inversion of the chord of 
 
 the added ninth with the octave of its root, G, omitted, might at first
 
 THE PEINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 49 
 
 sight be mistaken for the first inversion of a dominant seventh on the 
 dominant root B flat. But such a chord would require both the B and 
 the A to be flattened, and not natural, as here ; thus 
 
 * 
 
 ^-- 
 
 ^^S 
 
 For in the first inversion of the chord of the dominant seventh, the sixth 
 is minor and the fifth diminished : whereas in the second inversion of 
 the chord of the added ninth, the sixth is major and the fifth perfect. 
 
 Again, 
 
 which is the third inversion of the chord of 
 
 (S» — 
 
 the added ninth, with its root, G, omitted, might at first sight be mis- 
 taken for the second inversion of a chord of the dominant seventh on 
 the root B flat. But such a chord would require both the B and the 
 A to be flattened, and not natural, as here ; thus 
 
 m 
 
 -o- 
 
 ^l
 
 50 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 For in the second inversion of the chord of the dominant seventh, the 
 fourth is perfect and the third minor : whereas in the third inversion of 
 the chord of the added ninth, the fourth is augmented and the third 
 major. 
 
 Again, 
 
 which is the fourth inversion of the chord of 
 
 m 
 
 the added ninth, with its root, G, omitted, might at first sight be mis- 
 taken for the third inversion of a chord of the dominant seventh on the 
 root B natural. But such a chord would require both the D and the 
 F to be sharp, and not natural, as here ; thus 
 
 m 
 
 ife 
 
 --^ 
 
 For in the third inversion of the chord of the dominant seventh, the 
 sixth is major and the fourth augmented : whereas in the fourth inver- 
 sion of the chord of the added ninth, the sixth is minor and the fourth 
 perfect. 
 
 Before going any further, we would strongly recommend the student 
 to transpose all the examples m this Chapter into several other keys. 
 In no other way can he impress all the intervals, chords, and resolutions
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 51 
 
 so firmly on his memory. We also subjoin a longer example, wliich he 
 is advised first to analyse and then to transpose — 
 
 zt 
 
 £Eg 
 
 :2^ 
 
 S 
 
 :^=£ 
 
 -<si 
 
 22 
 
 -(S«- 
 
 =s 
 
 i^:^ 
 
 22: 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^2 — c^^ 
 
 -G> 
 
 -j:^ 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 f^^9- 
 
 r^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 =2=25 
 
 l6 
 
 b5 
 
 i-^t 
 
 23 
 
 :i^3 
 
 22 
 
 t22: 
 
 rJ rJ 
 
 J^- 
 
 -(S^- 
 
 r±:^E=^ 
 
 3 
 
 S 
 
 ^21 
 
 fci 
 
 T2L 
 
 21: 
 
 ^±=^ 
 
 -<s> 
 
 'i 
 
 
 -o 
 
 
 ^^m 
 
 -oi 
 
 ^ 
 
 zi: 
 
 22 
 
 22- 
 
 3: 
 
 47 — r2- 
 
 22: 
 
 :^ 
 
 22t 
 
 -fS'- 
 
 f 
 
 22: 
 
 :^ 
 
 to: 
 
 22: 
 
 22_ 
 -(S>- 
 
 jdzz M=^ 
 
 ^ 5^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 3^ 
 
 S 
 
 I o - 
 
 rJ r J 
 
 i 
 
 -O- 
 
 
 -^- 
 
 H 2 
 
 -fS"- 
 
 Z2] 
 
 S=° 
 
 -<S^ 
 
 22" 
 7
 
 52 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Note. It is needless to give any rules about the doubling of the notes of the chord 
 of the added ninth, as that chord is so fiiU in itself that it seldom admits of such doubling. 
 It may be as well, however, to state that the same rules which were given as to the doubling 
 of notes in the choi'd of the dominant seventh and its inversions, will equally apply in this 
 case also ; with this one addition, that the ninth itself must never on any account be 
 doubled. 
 
 "We may also remark that it is allowable occasionally to interchange dissonant notes in 
 a fundamental discord, provided they afterwards are resolved according to rule, and that 
 the root does not alter while the interchange is being made ; for example — 
 
 It is always desirable to let the interchanging parts proceed by contraiy motion, as here. 
 
 Often, too, a licence is granted ; a seventh or ninth is allowed to skip to the leading note 
 on the same bass, without any interchange of parts ; thus 
 
 J- 
 
 ^- 
 
 i 
 
 d: 
 
 1^21 
 
 22: 
 
 122: 
 
 22ir: 
 
 "8 ~'^ 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 is: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 122: 
 
 22: 
 
 :zz: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 zz: 
 
 1^21 
 
 :^z: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 Nay, more, the seventh may skip sometimes to the fifth on the same bass, instead of 
 being resolved regularly; thus —
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 53 
 
 fl 
 
 J^^ 
 
 
 / d 
 
 
 ^^ ^ 
 
 r^o* 
 
 (f3 ^ 
 
 
 t/ 
 
 rm\' <"^ 
 
 
 l^- 
 
 
 v_^ 
 
 c^ 
 
 
 
 though of course this is regarded as a licence. 
 
 Another relaxation of the rule is permitted sometimes when another note on the same 
 bass intervenes between a dissonant interval arid its resolution; thus 
 
 -t^- 
 
 J- 
 
 S 
 
 ^ 
 
 -C2- 
 
 z:^: 
 j^^ 
 
 s 
 
 f^- 
 
 <s>- 
 
 -o- 
 
 r- 
 
 iq: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 — Gh- 
 
 isz 
 
 1^21 
 
 -eS*- 
 
 -(^ 
 
 irz: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 :z2: 
 
 -K^ 
 
 15. In thorough-bass figuring it is usual, when a note is resolved on 
 the same bass, to figure the intei^al to which it passes, even if it be an 
 octave, a fifth, or a third ; thus 
 
 fctd: 
 
 :q: 
 
 or 
 
 #£ 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 ^=d 
 
 or 
 
 m^ 
 
 -Gt- 
 
 
 or 
 
 @5 
 
 icz: 
 
 -f^ 
 
 r^ -D 
 
 / 
 
 p* 
 
 ((^ 
 
 
 V y r^ ' 1 
 
 
 r»xiL ' 
 
 1^- ft 
 
 1 
 
 >~^ 1 
 
 1 
 
 And when the other parts do not move, the fact is usually indicated 
 by horizontal lines drawn from them ; thus —
 
 54 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 ii^ 
 
 S 
 
 -o- 
 
 ■^ 
 
 m 
 
 r 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 i^z: 
 
 and the same lines are drawn when the bass moves, while the other 
 parts stand still ; thus 
 
 i 
 
 w- 
 
 -&- 
 
 ::?:5: 
 
 'C> 
 
 m^. 
 
 0| 7 ^ ^ 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 which last example might also have been figured thus 
 
 m^ 
 
 m 
 
 3 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 We will now give a figured bass and treble, and the student is to 
 fill in two inner parts, according to the figiu-es, carefully avoiding conse- 
 cutive fifths and octaves, and scrupulously resolving every dissonance 
 according to the preceding rules : 
 
 ^ 
 ^=ii 
 
 r J ^ ' 
 
 'ZJl. 
 
 '&- 
 
 -&- 
 
 @^ 
 
 la: 
 
 22: 
 
 ± 
 
 -o^ 
 
 -^ — ^- 
 
 22: 
 
 -&- 
 
 -o- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 ■is>- 
 
 zz: 
 
 i
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 55 
 
 *i 
 
 -s>- 
 
 :izL 
 
 ^2: 
 
 -^± 
 
 Z2 
 
 -<S' 
 
 221 
 
 -^- 
 
 32: 
 
 S^ 
 
 -eS- 
 
 la 
 
 :^ — p 
 
 I 
 
 -«s^ 
 
 ¥ 
 
 :z2: 
 
 :s2 
 
 i^z: 
 
 f 
 
 N. B. The student is advised now to go back to the beginning of Chap. II, and study 
 the sections printed in small type, before he advances any further. 
 
 c^^k::Hy€-^o
 
 CHAPTEE IV. 
 
 i 
 
 Batio of vibrations in a given time — 
 12 3 4 5 6 
 
 10 '' 
 
 ,„ , 13 I 14 ^15 
 
 12 !.-.b,Q.fl^ 
 
 16 
 
 -^ 
 
 ■^p-fe^Qo. ip: 
 
 "n^^^ 
 
 19 20 
 
 :9^ 
 
 7zr 
 
 -iS>- 
 
 ^&- 
 
 :^- 
 
 9J 
 
 I — f lT- 
 
 2,n^ 1 
 
 
 
 l> 
 
 -« 
 
 r-H 
 
 e3 
 
 fl 
 
 f3 
 
 o 
 
 <M 
 
 
 O 
 
 rt 
 
 ^ 
 
 r^ 
 
 •rH 
 
 -i-i 
 
 r3 
 
 ■-rt 
 
 ITi 
 
 (Ti 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^= 
 
 
 CO 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 h 
 
 »?^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 id 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 <u 
 
 -Ti 
 
 > 
 
 n 
 
 ^ 
 
 (M 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 Oi 
 
 10 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 11 
 
 
 CO 
 
 ^ 
 
 6X) 
 
 12 
 
 > 
 
 CO 
 
 13 
 
 CO 
 
 14 
 
 CO '^ 
 
 tH CO 
 
 o 
 
 15 
 
 CO 
 
 a a 
 
 16 
 
 
 17 
 
 CI 
 
 05 
 
 18 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 cS 
 
 n 
 
 -t? 
 
 -;j 
 
 o 
 
 C) 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 ,£3 
 
 ,d 
 
 
 -4-3 
 
 "^ 
 
 •^ 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 
 05 
 
 19 
 
 > 
 
 d 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 d 
 
 20 
 
 -(J 
 
 rd 
 -4-3 
 -^ 
 
 d 
 
 This paradigm of harmonics has been placed at the head of this 
 Chapter, because frequent reference will have to be made to it. The
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 57 
 
 student is advised to study and copy it, as upon it all our superstructure 
 will be built. 
 
 2. '" In the first place, it will be remarked that in this series of har- 
 monics the distances or intervals between the adjacent notes become 
 progressively less as we proceed upwards. 
 
 Thus : the interval between the generator and the first harmonic is 
 an octave — the next interval is a perfect fifth above that — the next is 
 a j)erfect fourth — the next is a major third— the next a minor thkd — 
 and so on. 
 
 Now, rejectmg those sounds which are out of the key, B flat and F 
 sharp, let us take the three notes which come between them, C, D, and E, 
 and we find that they form a real diatonic progression (i. e. the fii'st three 
 notes of the diatonic scale of C major). 
 
 Let us then take these three notes as a melody to be harmonized. 
 
 For this purpose, the fii'st thing will be to discover the fundamental 
 basses. 
 
 Now, seemg that C and E are harmonics of the root C (as above 
 given), and that D is not only so, but is also the second harmonic sound 
 produced by the root G, as we have seen in Chapter II ; let us take 
 these sounds, C, G, C, as oiu- basses, and we shall at once effect oiu* 
 
 object. 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 ]/ 
 
 
 ^ — 1 
 
 rv 
 
 A 
 
 r^ 
 
 
 
 rrn 
 
 
 
 
 "W 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^' 
 
 
 Ov^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 ^'^-^ 
 
 
 
 V^ r^ 1 
 
 n 
 
 
 . 
 
 * This section is entirely derived from Logier's admirable " System of the Science of Music ;" London, 
 1827, pp. 48, et seqq.
 
 58 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 The fundamental basses being thus discovered, we can now proceed 
 to add harmonies, according to the rules laid down in this book. 
 
 Our result is as follows : — 
 
 r-f ^ ^ -1 
 
 > 
 
 rj 
 
 s^^ 
 
 rv 
 
 
 ff\ 
 
 
 ^*^ 
 
 
 
 ^ J "r^ "^ ^^ ' 
 
 t/ 
 
 /S^- ^^ 1 
 
 (€>■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 v_^ 
 
 rj 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 
 
 Here, then, we get a harmonized scale of three notes. How are we 
 to get beyond these ? 
 
 Let us turn to the general paradigm at the head of this Chapter, 
 and we shall find that the harmonic corresponding to no. 7 (or ^ of that 
 string or tube whose whole length would give the generator C) is B flat. 
 
 This note is not a part of the scale of C, but it is its fundamental 
 minor seventh ; and when it is added to the triad of C, the immediate 
 result is that C ceases to be a tonic root and becomes a dominant. 
 
 Then the ear is immediately seized with an irresistible craving after 
 a tonic resolution. 
 
 To satisfy this, the seventh must descend and the third must rise, 
 as we have already explained in Chapter II, and thus we find om'selves 
 landed in the key of F. 
 
 This process is called a moclidatio7i, and will be further explained 
 in a future Chapter. 
 
 We have by this means added one more note to our original scale 
 of three ; and that note is F natural. 
 
 Taking F, then, for our new tonic generator, and treating it exactly 
 as we treated C, it mil supply three notes, F, G, and A, corresponding
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 to the C, T>, and E which we took for our original scale of three 
 notes. 
 
 Combining these two series, and connecting them harmonically by 
 means of the dominant seventh, B flat, we shall produce a scale of six 
 notes, or a hexachord, as follows : — 
 
 :c2: 
 
 :S2: 
 
 &S=; 
 
 -O- 
 
 S: 
 
 S: 
 
 :g-- 
 
 Z2_ 
 
 hi 
 
 Z2: 
 
 :z2: 
 
 1^21 
 
 122: 
 
 "O- 
 
 -^5' 
 
 Our scale of melody, taken alone, belongs to the key of C, but our 
 harmonies belong partly to the key of C and partly to that of F. 
 
 If we wish to add three more notes according to this system, and 
 by a similar process, we shall modulate into the key of B flat, of which 
 F is the dominant. And in the same way, by pursuing a similar course, 
 we should next modulate into the key of E flat, of which B flat is the 
 dominant. To this process there is no limit. 
 
 z^ — <o- — ■ " -^<s>- 
 
 ^ 
 
 2Z 
 
 'ZJ- 
 
 S: 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 &c. 
 
 SES 
 
 ^Q- 
 
 -^- 
 
 -Gf- 
 
 ^Q 
 
 L£^ ^ : 
 
 ^&- 
 
 221 
 
 -Gh 
 
 ^&- 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 "C5- 
 
 b7 
 
 hi 
 
 bl 
 
 1)7 
 
 &c. 
 
 itM 
 
 h ^ CDW 
 
 2 
 
 Generator 1 
 
 I 2
 
 60 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 From these premises Logier * draws the conclusion that " no scale 
 can naturally consist of more than three sounds, for which there are only 
 two fundamental basses required, viz. the tonic and dominant." 
 
 He also shews that the " subdominant" (or the fifth below the tonic, 
 or the fourth of the scale ascending) is in reality no true root of any 
 part of a natural scale, but only the generator, or tonic, of a new one. 
 
 From all wliich he sums up the following general rule : — 
 
 " Whenever we use a [fundamental] seventh, and thus proceed to a 
 new key, we modulate into that key." 
 
 3. From the discoveries in the preceding section, it has been seen 
 how to form a compound scale which shall modulate continually and 
 progressively into new keys : but it has not yet been shewn how to 
 derive from nature a true diatonic scale which shall begin and end in 
 the same key. 
 
 As far as the sixth note of the scale, we have to a certain extent 
 succeeded in our endeavour to form and harmonize the scale ; but there 
 we broke away altogether, and hopelessly. 
 
 Having wandered into the key of the subdominant, our only way of 
 returning must be by a modulation into the original tonic again. 
 
 But, by the above rule of Logier's, this is to be effected by the inter- 
 position of the chord of the dominant seventh. 
 
 * "System of the Science of Music," pp. 50, 51.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 61 
 
 It will be observed here, that at the sixth note of this scale the 
 E flat (or dominant seventh leading to the key of B flat) has not been 
 introduced. The sixth chord may then be considered as a tonic chord, 
 and at rest. 
 
 But our object now is not to rest there, but to complete the scale of 
 C in our melody, and at the same time to modulate back from the key 
 of F into that of C by means of the dominant harmony on G. The 
 minor seventh of G, being F, here supplies a combining note for the 
 harmony, (indicated in the above example by a bind,) otherwise these 
 two chords would be totally disjoined. 
 
 It will also be remarked that the introduction of the leading note, 
 B natural, in the seventh place of the scale, causes the semitones to faU 
 between the 3rd and 4th, and 7th and 8th, according to the rule of all 
 diatonic major scales. 
 
 By this forcible introduction of the dominant harmony of G the 
 ascending major scale of C has been harmonized. 
 
 But still there remains an awkward harmonic disconnection between the 6th and 7th 
 of the scale, which can never be entirely got over. 
 
 The fact seems to be, that the leading note has so strong a tendency upwards to the 
 octave of the tonic that it cannot bear reference to any lower interval. Its appropriate 
 place would rather appear to be helow the key-note from which the scale is started. 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 -^ — < " ^ 
 
 as then every chord by which the scale is harmonized would be naturally and strongly 
 connected with the next. 
 
 If such be a true view, then the leading note would be simply a preparatory note, 
 introducing a scale of the compass of a hexachord — ascending. This view of the natural 
 formation of a harmonized ascending scale will be seen to be of some value when we come 
 to consider the minor scale. But that must be i-eserved for the present.
 
 62 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 4. By the use of the inversions of the common chord, and of the 
 chord of the dominant seventh, great variety can be introduced into 
 the harmonic accompaniment of the ascending major scale. 
 
 It will be a very useful exercise for the student to take the scale 
 of and harmonize it according to the following varied basses and 
 figures. And after that he can still further improve himself by trans- 
 posing his work into other keys. 
 
 No. 1. 
 
 3 
 
 :c2: 
 
 -B 
 
 -.r± 
 
 i^: 
 
 22: 
 
 iq: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -& 
 
 -^^ 
 
 IQ 
 
 -^- 
 
 'r^ r ^ 
 
 e 
 
 :^ 
 
 C2: 
 
 :^ 
 
 1^- 
 
 :^2: 
 
 :^ 
 
 4. 
 
 /mr \ ^^ f-^ ^^ II 
 
 l^- 
 
 
 h-' 
 
 fZi 
 
 
 rj 
 
 h^ 
 
 
 
 v»^ 
 
 _rJ _ 
 
 _ . 
 
 L^_ 
 
 
 \ 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 rj II 
 
 ' L_ L_ '. \ L 
 
 l6 
 b5 
 
 5. 
 
 (S>- 
 
 ^- 
 
 ^2: 
 
 ^ 
 
 t:2i 
 
 f^- 
 
 T2-- 
 
 -iSh- 
 
 '.ZJl 
 
 5. The descending diatonic scale now comes for consideration. 
 Here, of course, the leading note will not help us, as it rises but
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 63 
 
 does not fall. By treating the seventh of the scale as simply part of 
 the common chord of the tonic G, we can get over this difficulty ; thus 
 
 ^ 
 
 IQ 
 
 -Gi 
 
 -^- 
 
 22: 
 
 :z2 
 
 The next stage in our proceedings will be to consider ourselves in the 
 key of G, and to regard the three notes B, A, and G as a natural scale 
 in that key, just as we did with respect to the scale of three notes 
 ascending. Our result will be as follows : — 
 
 -jr^- 
 
 -<S(- 
 
 -^^- 
 
 -Gh 
 
 -^ 
 
 W 
 
 :^ 
 
 -Gh 
 
 3E3 
 
 I 
 
 All we require now is a connecting link between these last chords 
 and the three lowest notes of the scale of C, viz, E, D, and C, which 
 notes we shall of coiurse harmonize according to the same method. 
 
 i 
 
 22 
 
 "?:3 
 
 -C 
 
 s^=R 
 
 ^
 
 64 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Now the fourth note of the scale being F, and F being also the very 
 dominant seventh which we require, let us adopt it, and thus we shall 
 get the descending diatonic scale of C complete, with correct basses and 
 harmonies. 
 
 tonic tonic dominant tonic dominant tonic dominant tonic 
 
 1^21 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 -O- 
 
 ^ 
 
 1^21 
 
 Generators 1 C 
 
 ^ 
 
 ~ZJ' 
 
 ■i^ 
 
 -G>^^ 
 
 :5^ 
 
 -^- 
 
 -«s>- 
 
 -s>- 
 
 -<s- 
 
 G 
 
 "C2_ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 
 -Gf- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 C7 
 
 -^ 
 
 =^ 
 
 6. Another way of harmonizing this descending scale is by regarding 
 the note A as a part of the chord of the added ninth, in which case 
 the result will be — 
 
 T. 
 
 T. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 D. 
 
 T. 
 
 221 
 
 :SE 
 
 :c2= 
 
 ~G^ 
 
 -E^- 
 
 "g^ 
 
 22: 
 
 "c?- 
 
 ICZ. 
 
 c> 
 
 -& 
 
 zc? 
 
 
 
 22: 
 
 -s^ 
 
 B: 
 
 S 
 
 -s>- 
 
 G 
 
 :^2: 
 
 -^ 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 -@- 
 
 Generators I C 
 
 (The lines drawn from note to note indicate the resolutions of discords.) 
 
 (The dotted lines indicate the crossing of the parts to avoid consecutive octaves.)
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 65 
 
 This last method answers best when inversions are used ; thus — 
 
 :q; 
 
 :?2: 
 
 '7:j- 
 
 :q: 
 
 -ZJlL 
 
 Sf 
 
 Z2: 
 
 '^U" 
 
 -Ci: 
 
 1^:2: 
 
 -Gt- 
 
 -e^ 
 
 :r2: 
 
 -G>- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 V2: 
 
 s 
 
 ^- 
 
 There are many other ways of harmonizing both the ascending and 
 descending diatonic scale, but they involve certain rules of harmony 
 which have not yet been reached in this Treatise, and are therefore for 
 the present postponed. 
 
 K
 
 CHAPTEE Y. 
 
 1. We must now consider the origin of what is called the "minor mode." {Scarcely 
 any subject in the whole science of music has so much perplexed theorists. 
 
 The explanation here offered is therefore put forward with some diffidence, although the 
 author is himself convinced of its coiTcctness. 
 
 The necessity for such an explanation arises from the conviction that " nothing which 
 is agreeable to the ear can be contrary to nature : " but " the minor mode is agreeable to 
 the ear ;" therefore " the minor mode is not contrary to nature" — L e. it is derived from 
 natural phaenomena, and, consequently, can be explained by deductions from those phsenomena. 
 In order to render such explanation intelligible, it is necessary here to make a digi'ession, 
 for which, it is hoped, no further apology is needed. 
 
 2. Referring to the paradigm of harmonics at the head of Chap. IV, and having regard 
 to those which cori'espond to prime numbers, i.e. 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19, it will appear 
 that their degree of ferfection gradually decreases as they ascend in pitch, at least so far 
 as No. 13. 
 
 To explain this by examples. The octave, or the ratio 1:2, is absolutely perfect. 
 
 The fifth above this, which is at the distance of a twelfth from the root, or the ratio 
 1:3, is also generally called perfect. And so it is in a certain sense. 
 
 But it has one imperfection, viz. that if we continually ascend by intervals of a fifth, 
 we shall never exactly reach an upper octave of the root. For the cycle of twelve fifths, 
 C, G, D, A, E, B, FJ, C#, G#, DJ, A#, EJJ, and B#, is not the same in its results as seven 
 octaves of C : in other words, after i-educing the two results to the compass of one octave, 
 it is found that B# is sharper than the octave of the root, giving (instead of the ratio 1 : 2) 
 an interval which is represented by 2^® : 3^^
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 67 
 
 Now, the true octave is iu the ratio 1 . 2, while this interval is 2^* : 3^^, or 2G2144 : 
 531441. The difference, then, between them will be found by comparing these ratios : which 
 is done by multiplying the 1 : 2 by 262144 ; i. e. 1 : 2 = 262144 : 524288 : whence it appears 
 that the interval arrived at by ascending in fifths exceeds the true octave by the fraction 
 5^4088 ' ^ residuary interval, which is called the " Pythagorean comma." 
 
 For this reason all the fifths, in tuning keyed instruments, are tuned a little flatter than 
 perfection, by one twelfth of the Pythagorean comma, an interval so minute that the ear 
 cannot detect it. 
 
 The next interval corresponding to a prime number is the major third, which occurs in 
 the second octave, and thus bears the ratio 1 : 5 to the root. 
 
 This interval is much more imperfect than the fifth, and, in tuning a keyed instniment, 
 will require much gi-eater alteration, or tempering (as it is called). For the cycle of three 
 major thirds, C, E, Gtf, and BJJ, falls short of the true octave ; giving the ratio 4^ : 5^, 
 instead of the ratio of the octave, 1 : 2, which exceeds it by the comma yff , or " enhar- 
 monic diesis." 
 
 This imperfection is obviously much more appreciable than that of the fifth, especially 
 when it is remembered that in " tempering" it has to be equally distributed among no more 
 than three major thirds. 
 
 The next prime number in the series (no. 7) gives the interval of the fundamental minor 
 seventh. But, as has been already observed, it gives it very much too flat. So much so, 
 that most theorists have demurred to accepting it as the origin of dominant discords and 
 of modulation. 
 
 Rameau *, who, I believe, first noticed it among the acute harmonics of a vibrating 
 sti'ing, called it " le son perdu," the lost sound, and passed it over as insignificant. 
 
 But, even in the last century, there were some writers who to a certain extent recognized 
 its place in the harmonic system f. 
 
 It is admitted by Chladui | to be midway between consonances and dissonances, although 
 he deprecates its use. 
 
 He, however, uses these remarkable words : " On pent cependant presumer que la cause, 
 pour laquelle I'accord le la septiSme, (ut, mi, sol, si ^), et celui de la sixte supei-flue, (ut mi> 
 sol, laj), ne sont pas aussi desagreables ^ I'oreille, que Ton pourrait le croire, d'api-es leurs 
 
 * " G^n^ration Hannonique;" Paris, 1737, (vide Chap, i.) 
 
 + Vide Pizzati, " La Scienza de' Suoni e dell' Armonia;" Venice, 1782, (Part. IV, Chap, ix.) Also 
 Tartini, "Trattato di Musica j" Padua, 1754, (p. 126.) 
 X "Traits d' Acoustique ;" Paris, 1809, (p. 28.) 
 
 K 2
 
 68 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 nombres compliqu6s, tient k ce que I'oreille substitue h. ces nombres les rapports 4:5:6:7, 
 dans lesquels Fintervalle ^ differe de la septieme -- du comma g|, et de la sixte supei-flue 
 du comma encore plus petit jff •" But surely, as we admit of the temperament of fifths 
 aud thirds, without denying the genuineness of those found in nature, so we may regard 
 the ordinaiy minor seventh as a tempered modification of the fimdamental seventh found 
 among the harmonic sounds of nature. 
 
 Similarly, we may regard the harmonics corresponding to the prime numbers 11 and 13 
 in our paradigm as repi'esenting the augmented fourth and the minor sixth in the third 
 octave : — although the former is much too flat, being nearly midway between the perfect 
 and augmented fourth ; and the latter is much too sharp, being also intermediate between 
 the major aud minor sixth. 
 
 The next prime number, 1 7, however, gives us the interval of a minor ninth, very nearly 
 in tune, being only a very little too flat, and almost identical with that intei-val on an equally 
 tempered instrument*. This number, then, we may at once admit among our fundamental 
 discords, and use as freely as the major ninth or the minor seventh. 
 
 The next prime number is one of the utmost importance (No. 19), as it gives us the 
 minor third of nature, and may be regarded as the source of the whole system of the 
 minor mode. 
 
 It is almost in tune. Indeed it is more satisfactory to the ear than the minor third as 
 usually represented by the ratio 5 .; 6. 
 
 Reducing it to the first octave, it is represented by the ratio 16 : 19, and only falls short 
 of the usual ratio 5 : 6 by the very small comma gV. 
 
 Regarding the major triad as 16 : 20 : 24, and the minor triad, as here derived, as 
 16 : 19 : 24, nothing can be more simple and natural than their relations one to the other. 
 Even Chladni admits this t, where he says " Peutetre quand on se sert quelquefois de I'accord 
 parfait mineur au lieu du majeur, ou du majeur an lieu du mineur, I'oreille est raoins hlessee{'.) 
 parce qu'elle substitue 'k la tierce mineur | I'intervalle yf, en entendant une variety de 
 rapports, comme 16 : 19 : 24, et 16 : 20 : 24." 
 
 Let us, then, assume the fundamental minor third of nature to be |-|, or that produced 
 by taking |g- of the length of a string or tube. 
 
 It will only remain to shew why the usual figures, 5 : 6, cannot be taken for this pur- 
 
 * This derivation of the minor ninth is duly recognized by Catel, in his well-known " Traits d' Har- 
 monie;" Paris, 1802, (p. 6.) 
 
 t Chladni, " Traits d' Acoustique ;" (p. 29.)
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 69 
 
 pose — in other words, why the minor triad is not correctly represented by the ratios 
 10 : 12 : 15. 
 
 3. Referring once more to our general paradigm at the head of Chap. IV, and seeing 
 which are the notes represented therein by the ratios 10, 12, and 15, we find them to be 
 E, G, and B, or the minor triad of E. But the root of all the notes in this series is C, 
 not E. And C cannot be the root of the minor triad of E. Therefore the numbers 10, 
 12, and 15 do not correctly produce a genuine minor triad. Therefore the ratio 10 : 12 (or, 
 which is the same, 5 : 6), does not represent a real fundamental minor third. 
 
 But it does really give the interval between the thii-d and fifth of the major triad, as 
 the paradigm will shew. 
 
 There are, then, in nature two different minor thirds, only one of which is fundamental ; 
 or, as it may be expressed, one of them, ^, is the root with its minor third, the other, |, is 
 the third and fifth with the root omitted. 
 
 4. It may, then, from these arguments, be fau-ly assumed that the 
 mmor triad has its origin in nature, analogously to the major, and that 
 it is part of the tonic series. 
 
 The dominant must always have its third or leading note major ; 
 otherwise it would be too far from the note to which it leads, and 
 from which it is necessarily a semitone distant. 
 
 5. On referring to Chapter I, it will be seen that every major key 
 has a minor key connected with it, called its " relative minor." This 
 connection can hardly be said to be of natural origin, inasmuch as the 
 harmonics of the root of the major key do not give us the common chord 
 of its relative minor. But as several of the intervals of their scales 
 are common to both, and as their " signature" (or the flats or shai'ps in 
 the stave) is the same, and as, moreover, it is very easy and very usual 
 to go either by modulation or by harmonic progression, (which term 
 shall be explained hereafter,) from one to the other ; it will be most
 
 70 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY 
 
 convenient on the whole to ilhistrate the derivation and harmonization 
 
 of the minor mode by starting from the key-note A, and taking as our 
 
 model the process adopted for the scale of C major in the preceding 
 Chapter. 
 
 6. For this purpose we will shew the scale of three notes in the 
 major and minor modes, side by side — 
 
 Major. Minor. 
 
 a 
 
 122: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 -©- 
 
 i^: 
 
 -G- 
 
 1^21 
 
 1^2: 
 
 -g-- 
 
 
 -(S- 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 m 
 
 Z2: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 Now although these two scales look very similar at first sight, yet 
 are they essentially unlike ; and the minor sounds eminently unsatis- 
 factory. 
 
 The reason of this is, that the harmony of the second note of the 
 major scale is essentially dominant, seeing that it will admit of the 
 addition of a seventh; thus — 
 
 I 
 
 i^z: 
 
 -s>- 
 
 -o- 
 
 -o- 
 
 22 
 
 f^- 
 
 s 
 
 "^z: 
 
 221 
 
 Z2: 
 
 whereas the harmony of the second note of the minor scale, as written 
 here, is not, and cannot be, dominant, inasmuch as it contains no leading 
 note, the third being minor. It is simply the minor triad of E, and has 
 no connection with the chords with which it is here associated.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 71 
 
 To correct this, it is merely necessary to put a sharp before the G, 
 when it immediately becomes a leading note : — 
 
 iq: 
 
 ^- 
 
 ^^ 
 
 hS»- 
 
 xz: 
 
 1^2: 
 
 icz: 
 
 to which we may add the seventh if we please — 
 
 .<s>- 
 
 :g^ 
 
 ^& 
 
 ^ 
 
 1^21 
 
 'JZZ. 
 
 :_ tizi^z 
 
 s 
 
 In forming the harmonized major scale, the fii'st three notes were 
 followed by three others, similar, and similarly harmonized, in the key 
 of the subdominant. Pursuing the same course, as far as possible, with 
 the minor scale, the result will be as follows — 
 
 22: 
 
 --g-- 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 "^IT" 
 
 -/S>- 
 
 ?^s 
 
 m 
 
 -jr:2i 
 
 :z2: 
 
 221 
 
 hS- 
 
 -^- 
 
 221 
 
 i i 
 
 This will do very well. But it differs from the scale in the major, 
 inasmuch as there is no modulation into the key of D betw^een the third 
 and fourth note. This is inevitable, because the tliird note of the scale
 
 72 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 is necessarily a minor third to the root A, and therefore cannot be used 
 as part of a dommant chord. Still, there is sufficient connection to satisfy 
 the ear, and a real modulation does take place at the next note, where 
 the leading note, G% is introduced. 
 
 As we have thus got out of the key of A into that of D minor, we 
 are obhged to modulate back again to our original key : and tliis obliges 
 us to introduce the leading note, Gj$, into the melody as the seventh note 
 of the scale. The whole will then stand as follows — 
 
 # 
 
 -«s>- 
 
 -o- 
 
 22: 
 
 -s>- 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 1^2: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 } 
 
 It will not escape notice, that between the sixth and seventh notes 
 of the minor scale, as here shewn, there is the interval of an augmented 
 second. This constitutes the chief characteristic of a regular minor 
 scale. 
 
 7. In Chapter IV, towards the end of section 3, it is shewn how awkwardly the sixth 
 and seventh notes of the diatonic scale hang together. This is even more apparent in the 
 minor scale, in consequence of the introduction of the very dissonant interval of the aug- 
 mented second between those notes. If the leading note be, as it were, prefixed to the 
 minor hexachord (or scale of six notes), all this awkwardness vanishes at once ; thus — 
 
 :i^=^:^=^: 
 
 P: 
 
 :£ 
 
 ^2: 
 
 :e 
 
 Every chord connects itself with those next it, without difficulty, and without harshness. 
 There is therefore no small i-eason to surmise that this is the most natural form of the scale.
 
 THE PKINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 73 
 
 8. Before proceeding to harmonize the descending minor scale, it will 
 be necessary to introduce a new dominant interval, or fundamental dis- 
 cord — the minor ninth. This is one of the most important elements of 
 modulation, and affords a greater variety of resources than any other 
 known combination of notes to the experienced harmonist. It will be 
 well, therefore, to devote a Chapter to it alone.
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 1. It will be seen on reference to the paradigm prefixed to Chapter 
 lY, that the 17th harmonic gives us the minor ninth in the fourth 
 octave from the root. It is therefore a natural harmonic. 
 
 But it is clearly no part of the tonic harmony, for it is out of the 
 key. Nor is it in the hey of the dominant ; for the minor ninth, for 
 example, of the dominant G is A flat, which neither belongs to the 
 scale of G nor to that of C major. 
 
 But it does belong to the scale of C minor, although it is a harmonic 
 of the dominant G. 
 
 It therefore is a very important addition to the dominant harmony, 
 because it only belongs to it as such, and by no means belongs to the 
 same root considered as a tonic, being necessarily and essentially domi- 
 nant, and leading downwards to the fifth of the tonic quite as irresistibly 
 as the leading note leads upwards to the octave of the tonic, or the 
 dominant seventh downwards to its third. 
 
 When the tonic is of the minor mode, the force of the dominant 
 seventh is weakened, because, instead of falhng a semitone to its reso- 
 lution, it has to fall a whole tone, since the tonic third is minor. Compare 
 the two —
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 -9 1^— 
 
 75 
 
 sa 
 
 'Gh- 
 
 SEE 
 
 semitone 
 
 r 
 
 whole tone 
 
 :^2 
 
 But the minor ninth at once makes up for this defect, by its own 
 strong dominant tendency to the fifth of the tonic. 
 
 i 
 
 -f^- 
 
 -is- 
 
 ^i 
 
 ^ 
 
 isi: 
 
 The two together form as strong a dominant chord as can be required. 
 And the additional indication of the minor mode which this mterval 
 gives, renders it of especial value when we wish to introduce and fix 
 that mode. 
 
 The major ninth is not suitable for the minor mode, on account of 
 its incongruity with the sixth note of the minor scale, which is mmor, as 
 we have seen, and with that same note considered as the third of the 
 subdominant triad, which, as we have also seen, is minor also. Therefore 
 the minor ninth must be substituted for the major in the minor mode. 
 
 Its resolutions, inversions, and figuring are analogous to those of the 
 chord of the added major ninth, only that the accidental flats and sharps 
 involved will of course be different ; and in tliis difference there is also 
 this advantage, i. e. that there is no danger of mistaking the inversions 
 
 L 2
 
 76 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 or figuring of the chord of the minor nmth for those of the dominant 
 seventh ; for in the former the accidentals are always combined of a con- 
 trary Tcind'^f which is never the case in the latter. 
 
 A few examples wiU shew all these points at one view. 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 a 
 
 -&- 
 
 22: 
 
 
 221 
 
 The chord of the minor ninth uninverted, properly- 
 resolved and figured. 
 
 J The same, with the ninth resolved to the octave 
 on the same bass, before the resolution of the 
 '^ ' other parts. 
 
 The next two examples give the ninth in an inner part, and below 
 the leading note. This is always allowable with the minor ninth, and 
 gives it a great advantage over the major, — where such a position is 
 not recommended. 
 
 -(^3- 
 
 :^ 
 
 s 
 
 r- 
 
 -<s> ' 
 
 -<s» — 1 
 
 1221 
 
 5^ 
 
 22- 
 
 S 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 -SH 
 
 'jr^L. 
 
 I 
 
 * i. e. shai'ps against flats ; thus 
 
 ^- 
 
 is easily to be distinguished fi-om
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 77 
 
 S= 
 
 ^ 
 
 i 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 :«^ 
 
 I 
 
 P5 
 
 -«S»- 
 
 -^- 
 
 :i^: 
 
 D5 
 
 5^ 
 
 -<^ 
 
 P5 
 
 s 
 
 s; 
 
 -("S*- 
 
 -«^- 
 
 s= 
 
 ■B: 
 
 -^s- 
 
 i2: 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 i 
 
 -^ 1 
 
 <v 
 
 The first inversion of the chord of the minor 
 ninth, — where observe the forced movement of 
 the fifth B up to C, to avoid consecutive fifths. 
 As, however, one of the fifths is diminisliedy 
 this precaution is sometimes neglected by mo- 
 dern composers. 
 
 ^ The same, with the ninth resolving before the 
 rest. Here the progression of the fifth is per- 
 fectly free and safe. 
 
 The second inversion. Here the fifth, being in 
 the bass, must not descend to the tonic, as the 
 consecutives would be between the extreme 
 parts, and therefore offensive. 
 
 :^ 
 
 ±t 
 
 -^ 
 
 or. 
 
 -Gh 
 
 'JZL 
 
 i-J^ 
 
 fe 
 
 -<S»- 
 
 hS>- 
 
 1221 
 
 When the ninth is resolved in this way, the hidden consecutives between 
 the extreme parts may be tolerated (as in bar 2), but it is very much 
 better as in bar 1.
 
 78 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 '^ Q '^ o I This method of resokition takes away all difficulty 
 about the descent of the bass. It may equally 
 apply to the first inversion if required. 
 
 -<s^- 
 
 zz: 
 
 I 
 
 -«s>- 
 
 32: 
 
 & 
 
 -o- 
 
 The third inversion, regularly resolved. 
 
 -s>- 
 
 CJ 
 
 1^ 
 
 s 
 
 S: 
 
 -^ 
 
 -O- 
 
 i^z: 
 
 The same, with the ninth resolved before the 
 rest. 
 
 6-6 
 f" 2 
 
 iJ 
 
 1^2^21 
 
 -«S- 
 
 -<S^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 The same, resolved so as to enable the fifth to 
 descend. 
 
 6-6 
 
 2
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 79 
 
 ^ 
 
 S 
 
 -^^- 
 
 iq: 
 
 The fourth inversion. This should be avoided, 
 because of its harshness and unsatisfactory reso- 
 
 hition on the ?• 
 4 
 
 ^ 
 
 I 
 
 or. 
 
 -rj r j z: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 q: 
 
 ^ 
 
 I 
 
 Two ways are here shewn of improving the resolution of this ugly chord. 
 The former is not very satisfactory, but the latter is good. In tliis 
 inversion, the ninth being below the fifth, no consecutive fifths can 
 occur. 
 
 2. Hitherto we have been speaking of the chord of the minor ninth 
 and its inversions, without omitting any interval. Like the chord of 
 the added ninth, however, (see Chap. III. 13,) this chord is all the better 
 for such curtailment ; and the general rules for the omission of its various 
 intervals in each inversion are similar to those given in the case of the 
 chord of the added ninth. 
 
 But when the octave of the root is omitted from the chord of the 
 minor ninth, a very remarkable and important series of chords is dis- 
 covered, which demand special consideration.
 
 80 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 3. The first inversion of the chord of the minor ninth, omitting the 
 octave of the root, is known as the " chord of the diminished seventh," 
 and is so named after its characteristic interval — 
 
 It is susceptible of three inversions, all of them being of the greatest 
 use m harmonizing — 
 
 =^ 
 
 ■o- 
 
 m. 
 
 T 
 
 3 
 
 -^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^l 
 
 6 
 f 
 
 Now on examining the chord of the diminished seventh, it will be 
 seen that it consists entirely of minor thirds superposed — GltfB, BD, and 
 DF. And on examming the inversions, they will be found to consist 
 in each case of two minor thirds and one augmented second ; thus — BD, 
 DF, and FGJI; DF, FGjf, and GflB; and FGJf, GJfB, and BD. 
 
 On all keyed instruments, the same key stands for Gil and Ab, And 
 although they are not the same note really^ yet they are so nearly the 
 same that one may be always substituted for another with impunity. 
 Indeed, the construction of our instruments, the method of tuning now 
 universally prevalent, and the requirements of free modulation, render 
 such interchanges imperatively necessary. 
 
 Note. The interval which actually exists between two such notes is named the " Enhar- 
 monic Diesis," and is represented by the fraction i|4. 
 
 Sec short Examples at the end of this work, Nos. 6, 7, and 12.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Any note, then, may be changed into that which is nearest it in 
 pitch, and which is represented by the same key on all keyed instru- 
 ments, e.g. Gjl into Ab, Aj$ into Bb, Bfl into CQ, CJ|: into Db, DJ into 
 Eb, M into FQ, F^ into Gb ; and conversely, Gb into FJf, Fb into EQ, 
 Eb into m, Bb into C^, Cb into Bt3, Bb into Aj?, Ab into Gjf. 
 
 This sort of interchange is called an "Enharmonic Change!' The ear 
 is, as it were, deceived by it, just as it is by the tempering applied to 
 the fifths, thirds, and sevenths, as described in Chapter V. Whence it 
 follows that the chord of the diminished seventh and all its inversions 
 may be alike regarded as in fact composed of three minor thirds ; 
 thus — 
 
 1st minor third < 
 
 Gft 
 F 
 
 or Ab 
 F 
 
 B or 
 
 Ab 
 
 Cb or B 
 Ab or GJf 
 
 D or Ebb 
 B or Cb 
 
 2nd minor third \ 
 
 ^ B 
 
 F 
 D 
 
 F 
 D 
 
 Ab 
 F 
 
 Ab or GJj: 
 F or E# 
 
 B or cb 
 
 Gj$ or Ab 
 
 3rd minor third 4 
 
 B 
 
 D 
 B 
 
 F 
 D 
 
 F or EJf 
 D or Cx 
 
 GJf or Ab 
 Eif or F 
 
 The minor thirds may also be reckoned the other way 
 
 (i) F to Gft or Ab; 
 
 (2) G$f or Ab to B or cb ; 
 
 (3) B or cb to D or Ebb; &c. 
 
 For every one of the intervals composing this chord may be enharmoni- 
 cally changed, as is here shewn. 
 
 M
 
 82 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Hence it may be seen how very useful this chord is in modulating 
 from key to key. For example — 
 
 d= 
 
 B F3- 
 
 ^. 
 
 -^^ 
 
 t 
 
 m 
 
 -jtX 
 
 -<s 
 
 &- 
 
 23 
 
 ^- 
 
 s»- 
 
 HS>- 
 
 it 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 ~C7 
 
 -"^^ 
 
 4p: 
 
 (S»- 
 
 :^^ 
 
 =^==g^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 -x± 
 
 Roots A 
 
 E 
 
 A 
 
 A 
 
 D 
 
 A 
 
 Keys 
 
 D 
 
 
 t X. 
 
 fa^ 
 
 ^2: 
 
 :<:2: 
 
 -is>- 
 
 4S?- 
 
 -^ 
 
 -s*- 
 
 51 
 
 -^ 
 
 -^' 
 
 KS'- 
 
 Bb 
 
 Eb 
 
 #= 
 
 J2 p ^ ^^nzqp^Jgz::: 
 
 ^21 
 
 ipzizzp^ 
 
 :|^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 Roots Eb BQ EQ B 
 
 KeysEb Ep 
 
 E 
 
 E 
 
 A 
 
 B 
 
 E 
 
 E 
 
 A 
 
 ; 
 
 E 
 
 In this example — 
 
 Bar i. contains the minor triad of A, and the first inversion of the 
 dominant triad of E, with the seventh omitted. 
 
 Bar ii. contains the minor triad of A ; and the third inversion of the 
 chord of the minor ninth of A without the octave of the root : 
 being therefore the second inversion of the chord of the dimi- 
 nished, seventh, leading to the next chord.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 83 
 
 Bar iii. contains the first inversion of the minor triad of D ; and the 
 first inversion of the chord of the minor ninth of A, without 
 the octave of the root — being the chord of the diminished 
 seventh. 
 
 Bar iv. contains an enharmonic alteration of the last chord, whereby 
 it is converted into the fom'th inversion of the minor ninth of 
 C, without the octave of the root — being therefore the third 
 inversion of the chord of the diminished seventh. In the last 
 half of the bar, the bass resolves the minor ninth by descenduig 
 to the root, and the rest of the chord remains as a chord of the 
 dominant seventh on C. 
 
 The student ^vill now be able to carry on this process of analysis, by 
 the aid of the rules already given. He is begged, however, to take 
 especial notice of the enharmonic change in bar vi., which he vd]\ have 
 to examine very carefully. He will do well, also, to observe the roots 
 and keys, as indicated in capital letters below the bass stave. 
 
 4. In bar x. of the preceding example, the common chord of E major 
 is marked thus f . This has been done to draw attention to the fact 
 that here the chord of the minor ninth has been followed by a major 
 triad. This licence is always allowable; although the character of tliis 
 chord is more essentially minor than major, as has been sufficiently shewn. 
 By means of this licence, an even more extended usefidness is gained, 
 and the composer is enabled by it to modulate stiU more freely. 
 
 5. It is then possible from one chord of the diminished seventh 
 to modulate directly into a great variety of keys : for instance, taking 
 
 M 2
 
 84 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 our start from A minor, the following resolutions of the diminished 
 
 F 
 seventh ^ will at once appear : — 
 
 ^^ 
 
 3 
 
 
 ~i:jl 
 
 s 
 
 22 
 
 ^=1 
 
 <S- 
 
 :^=to 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -^ 
 
 «E 
 
 :tt?2: 
 
 &=J|^z±f^=^: 
 
 © 
 
 A major 
 
 C minor 
 
 C major 
 
 -A == 1 I J V \ \ - 
 
 m r~'^r=^ 
 
 o- 
 
 «p= 
 
 # 
 
 -^<<s>- 
 
 Fjl minor 
 
 FJf major 
 
 D jf major 
 
 i^i=fe 
 
 w5^^r$^S^g=#=^ 
 
 fl^ 
 
 J-^S*- 
 
 f 
 
 <s^ 
 
 4 
 
 ite: 
 
 ^=ffR 
 
 |(S>- 
 
 fezzz^ 
 
 <s>- 
 
 itcz 
 
 ^ 
 
 "g^- 
 
 5!2: 
 
 D Jj! minor 
 
 Eb mi 
 
 mmor 
 
 Eb 
 
 major 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^^^=|i^WE^i^ 
 
 3 
 
 12^21 
 
 :^g: 
 
 ^^ 
 
 z:?" 
 
 izs: 
 
 B^: — b ^ 
 
 [221 
 
 Gb 
 
 major 
 
 Gb 
 
 minor
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 85 
 
 At f , bars viii. and ix., the equivalent notes have been omitted, and 
 the enharmonic change taken for granted, This is the usual way of 
 writing such modulations, for the sake of simplicity. 
 
 We may here quote a very good example from Catel (Traite 
 d'Harmonie), which clearly exhibits the enharmonical resources of the 
 chord of the diminished seventh — 
 
 >Q_ 
 
 11. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 111. 
 
 4f^ 
 
 4tQ_ 
 
 4fQ. 
 
 ife: 
 
 n:2L 
 
 ^m- 
 
 \&- 
 
 -G>- 
 
 -Gh 
 
 -G»- 
 
 m^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 '-^- 
 
 =S^ 
 
 g; ivv - 
 
 -^- 
 
 -«s>- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -f^^- : 
 
 3^2: 
 
 b5 
 
 Roots 
 
 >Q_ 
 
 b5 
 
 6 
 
 t 
 
 b7 
 5 
 
 «5 
 
 >E=i 
 
 22: 
 
 :(=z 
 
 :^^; 
 
 *=: 
 
 \' 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 C9 
 
 85 
 
 In this example the diminished seventh >h and all its inversions 
 are successively presented in bars ii. — vi., and all the various roots given 
 from which they are severally derived. Yet, if played on a keyed 
 instrument, the chords in these five bars remain unchanged, as will be 
 at once perceived on playing them. 
 
 6. Before proceeding any further, it will be well to give a rule by 
 which to discover the root of any fundamental harmony.
 
 86 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 For this purpose it will be necessary to refer to the general table 
 of the keys with their signatures, given in Chapter I, sect. 5. 
 
 Now, it will be found a convenient plan, to class the key-notes 
 according to their signatiu-es, calhng that key the sharpest key which 
 has the greatest number of sharps ; and, generally, in comparing two or 
 more keys together, calling that the sharpest which has the most sharps 
 or the fewest flats in its signature. 
 
 And we may apply the same mode of speaking to the ludiviclual 
 notes themselves : for instance, E Q may be called a sharper note than 
 Dp, because the signature of that key of which it is the tonic has two 
 more sharps than belong to the key of D. 
 
 Similarly, F may be called a sharper note than B b ; and, generally, 
 we may call the notes in the subjoined Hst sharper or less sharp accord- 
 ing to the order in which they stand; those to the left hand being 
 sharper than those to the right. Thus, in the list of notes — 
 
 Ctt, FjJ, B, E, A, D, G, C, F, Bb, Eb, Ab, Db, Gb, Cb ; 
 
 CJt is the sharpest of all notes; then comes F^, and so on, decreasing 
 in sharpness till we reach Cb, which is the flattest of all. 
 
 This is simply a convenient mode of naming the various notes by 
 way of comparison, the special advantage of wliich we shall now proceed 
 to shew. 
 
 7. " In every fundamental chord, the leading note is the sharpest note 
 to be found." 
 
 To this rule there is no exception, and by means of it the root of 
 every fundamental chord can easily be found.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 87 
 
 For example, let us try to discover the root of the following 
 chord — 
 
 M 
 
 :q 
 
 On reference to the Hst or table in the last section, it will be seen that 
 of the notes composing this chord the sharpest is A ; therefore A is the 
 leading note ; therefore F is the root ; and it is evidently the first inver- 
 sion of the chord of the minor ninth without the octave of the root, 
 otherwise called the chord of the diminished seventh. And from this 
 it follows, in the regular course, that the chord belongs to the key of 
 Bt^ minor. 
 
 This rule is so compendious, so simple, and of such general apphca- 
 tion, that it ought to be thoroughly mastered, and continually applied, by 
 every student of harmony. 
 
 To it may also be added the following subsidiary rule — 
 
 " If there is a minor ninth in any chord, that ninth will be the 
 flattest note." 
 
 Thus, in the above example the flattest note is Gb, which is thereby 
 known to be the miaor ninth of F, the root. 
 
 If, however, there be no minor ninth in a dominant chord, then the 
 flattest note will be the dominant seventh.
 
 88 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Thus, in the annexed chord, the flattest note is D, which is the 
 dominant seventh of E, and the whole chord is a chord of the added 
 ninth on that root : 
 
 =i^ 
 
 .^2_ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 99 
 
 i 
 
 8. Let us now apply these rules to the enharmonic variations of the 
 chord of the diminished seventh and its inversions — 
 
 ^^- 
 
 '^^ 
 
 &- 
 
 ^ 
 
 ,«s»- 
 
 -m- 
 
 "oio^- 
 
 "gg: 
 
 In No. i. the sharpest note is CJf, therefore the root is AQ, and the 
 
 L 
 
 chord is a diminished seventh ^J. 
 
 In No. ii. the sharpest note is EQ, therefore the root is CQ, and the 
 
 .6 
 
 chord is in its last inversion 04 . 
 
 % 
 In No. iii. the sharpest note is Ajf, therefore the root is Y%, and the 
 
 6 
 chord is the first inversion of a diminished seventh Q4 . 
 
 3 
 
 In No. iv. the sharpest note is Gp, therefore the root is Eb, and the 
 chord is the second inversion of a diminished seventh Q5 . 
 
 In the first case the chord leads to D minor (or major) ; in the second
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 89 
 
 to F minor (or major) ; in the third to B minor (or major) ; and in the 
 fourth to Ab minor (or major). 
 
 The student will now analyse the following exercise, detecting the 
 roots, and describing every chord — 
 
 S^ 
 
 2i 
 
 i 
 
 --^^=^ 
 
 ® 
 
 :§fl=4 
 
 -S»- 
 
 Gh- 
 
 .J. 
 
 -&- 
 
 g^^ 
 
 £i 
 
 1 
 
 -^ 
 
 ~jzi: 
 
 ^ 
 
 ±^ 
 
 i^ 
 
 :Jf^ 
 
 :^=3P 
 
 -Gh 
 
 "1 
 
 6 
 f 
 
 t —^^J^ 
 
 ■^Gh 
 
 i 
 
 ist 
 
 :^ 
 
 «s<s>- 
 
 -«si — &i- 
 
 ^fe^ 
 
 l^it^^^^g: 
 
 i^ &^^~b3 
 
 E 
 
 ■b a<jQ.g, -g ^B 
 
 --g-- 
 
 122: 
 
 -^^ 
 
 :?2: 
 
 (S^ 
 
 -r^ — r^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 -G> 
 
 1^21 
 
 :rj: 
 
 -^s*- 
 
 i^ 
 
 b5 
 
 -«s 
 
 b7 
 b5 
 
 t> b7 b 
 
 
 d: 
 
 /^Ts 
 
 i 
 
 22 aS 
 
 [^ — g zzLz^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^^= 
 
 "c^ 
 
 ^^ -^- b^ 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 S 
 
 is>- 
 
 ^^=B^= 
 
 2:± 
 
 :^ 
 
 :^z 
 
 3i 
 
 :zii: 
 
 ^ 
 
 Itc^' 
 
 -iS^ 
 
 "^>" 
 ^O' 
 
 9 8 I b7 
 
 Note. If the root and leading note be both omitted from the chord of the minor 
 ninth, it is reduced to an imperfect or diminished triad — 
 
 i 
 
 «y 
 
 N
 
 00 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY 
 
 In this form it is impossible to detect its root, excei)t by a consideration of the 
 succeeding cliord. 
 
 If that chord be on the tonic A, the preceding example will of course be an imperfect 
 chord of the minor ninth on the dominant root E. 
 
 -S- 
 
 E 
 
 A 
 
 But if the succeeding chord be on the tonic C, then the doubtful chord must be 
 regarded as an imperfect chord of the dominant seventh on G. 
 
 f^ 
 
 W=^^ 
 
 G 
 
 C 
 
 It is therefore the most equivocal and unsatisfactory of all the simple chords in 
 music.
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 1. Having introduced and explained the chord of the minor ninth 
 and its derivatives in the last Chapter, we may now proceed to apply it 
 to the harmonization of the descending minor scale. 
 
 In Chapter V, section 6, the ascending minor scale was worked out : 
 and it was shewn in the following section, that between the sixth and 
 seventh degrees of this scale the chromatic interval of an augmented 
 second occurs. 
 
 In forming and harmonizing the descending minor scale, care will be 
 required in the treatment of this awkward interval. 
 
 ^^^^EEP^^^^EEg 
 
 :^± 
 
 ^AEEEEAEA 
 
 On setting out the melody, it will be observed that all the notes of 
 it belong to the dominant chord of E, except the first, sixth, and eighth. 
 We need not, then, unless we choose, have any dealings with the 
 subdomlnant D, or with any harmony but that of the tonic and 
 dominant. 
 
 N 2
 
 92 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 :a: 
 
 g— ^-eg: 
 
 22: 
 
 "C5- 
 
 1^21 
 
 -s>- 
 
 1221 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 :e2: 
 
 12:2: 
 
 22: 
 
 :z2: 
 
 Roots 
 
 A 
 A 
 
 E 
 E 
 
 E 
 
 6 
 
 E 
 
 E 
 
 A 
 
 Keys A E A 
 
 But here there appears a somewhat irregular treatment of the domi- 
 nant seventh between the third and fourth chords ; thus — 
 
 fS>- 
 
 :2:2: 
 
 5E^= 
 
 -f^ 
 
 :g =p= F 
 
 And although this progression is tolerated by licence, on account of the 
 contrary motion between the extreme parts, yet it is by no means elegant. 
 
 It will therefore be better to look on the note E in this scale as part 
 of the tonic harmony, and to harmonize thus — 
 
 E 
 
 -IS»- 
 
 q=ip2: 
 
 g=^ 
 
 -<Sh 
 
 ^P^ 
 
 3S 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 Roots 
 Keys 
 
 A 
 A 
 
 % 
 
 E 
 E 
 
 -&- 
 
 E 
 
 1?:^=:^: 
 
 O" 
 
 ?=2: 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 A 
 
 E 
 
 :^i=t 
 
 E 
 
 :?^ 
 
 A
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 93 
 
 Or, if we prefer to introduce the subdominant triad D, we can do 
 
 so with good effect, as follows — 
 
 J^^^^^l^ 
 
 S 
 
 m 
 
 C2: 
 
 --^ 
 
 i^ 
 
 :q 
 
 €J u 
 
 Roots 
 
 Keys 
 
 A 
 
 E 
 E 
 
 6 
 f 
 
 E 
 
 A 
 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 6 
 4 
 
 A 
 
 i 
 E 
 
 A 
 
 A 
 
 And this can be varied by using different inversions. 
 
 On the sixth chord we shall have some observations to make in a 
 subsequent Chapter, as, in such cases as this, it is not, strictly speaking, 
 so much an inversion of the tonic triad, as a double dissonance by sus- 
 pension ; on which see Chapter VIIT, section 7. 
 
 2. It is often convenient to alter the minor scale, so as to avoid 
 the augmented second between its sixth and seventh degree. This is 
 usually done by sharpening the sixth m ascending, and by flattening the 
 seventh in descending. 
 
 The scale then departs from nature, and becomes entirely artificial. 
 It will then stand thus — 
 
 i^: 
 
 4t^ 
 
 -<S'- 
 
 -^-a^ 
 
 -^- 
 
 1^2: 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 :q: 
 
 :q: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 :??^E^ 
 
 1^2:
 
 94 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Such an alteration necessitates a total change in the harmonization. 
 The following appears to be the best method : — 
 
 I 
 
 iS 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 :q: 
 
 -^^-IQ- 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 i^SzIg: 
 
 JUL 
 
 -O- 
 
 - rj rj 7^ —7-J- 
 
 ^ 
 
 Z^^Z 
 
 "r^ 
 
 s 
 
 :z^ ry 
 
 --g: 
 
 e> — <^- 
 
 -<&- 
 
 -o- 
 
 _c*t- 
 
 -(S^ 
 
 -e>- 
 
 -s*- 
 
 # 
 
 122: 
 
 22: 
 
 -<s- 
 
 1^ 
 
 -s>- 
 
 'IZL. 
 
 4J^2Zz^zttQ: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 221 
 
 6 
 
 Q5 
 
 I 
 
 3. It will be useful now to give examples of the harmonizing of 
 scales minor and major when the scale is given to the bass part. As 
 an exercise to the student, only the bass and figures will be given, and 
 it will be for him to supply the three upper parts, and to assign the 
 proper roots of each chord : 
 
 #a 
 
 -^- 
 
 -f^^- 
 
 -s>- 
 
 4Q-ip 
 
 jQ_ 
 
 J^lJ2^ 
 
 1^=22 
 
 ■tS)- 
 
 :^2z 
 
 6 
 
 B5 
 
 6 6 
 
 ' f 
 
 m 
 
 -&- 
 
 I^Z 
 
 -o- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 ^^=-^-- 
 
 :^=^: 
 
 =^=p= 
 
 -t^- 
 
 - f^—^—^ _ 
 
 D6 
 
 ■^—&- 
 
 221 
 
 6 6 
 
 -^' 
 
 -Gi- 
 
 rj rjr_ 
 
 :i^:±=S 
 
 1^21 
 6 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 ^=3= 
 
 r^
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 1. All the discords hitherto described have belonged to one class, 
 viz. " fundamental discords." That is, they have all been parts of the 
 dominant harmony, as derived from nature. But besides the funda- 
 mental discords, there are others of various kinds, some of which it is 
 time to explain. 
 
 2. It may be well, in this place, before going fiurther, to define a 
 few terms more accurately than has yet been done in this Treatise. 
 
 i. A Concord is a combination of root, third, and fifth, such as the 
 major and minor triads — (and perhaps their inversions also, though 
 they are imperfect concords). 
 
 ii. The sounds of which a concord consists are called Consonances. 
 
 iii. When any one of the sounds composing a concord is removed, 
 and some other sound substituted in its place, the perfection and 
 satisfactoriness of the concord is destroyed, and a different and 
 contrasting effect produced. The intruded new sound which pro- 
 duces this result is called a Dissonance. 
 
 iv. The chord in which the dissonance is heard is called a Discord.
 
 96 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 3. The discords and dissonances of fundamental dominant harmony 
 liavc been discussed. It is necessary now to speak of Dissonances by 
 Suspension ■*'. 
 
 Let the following melody be played, accompanied only by its funda- 
 mental bass. It is satisfactory to the ear, though tame and bald : 
 
 I 
 
 _Q_ 
 
 'G>- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -G>- 
 
 S 
 
 i^z: 
 
 -s»- 
 
 1221 
 
 :z2: 
 
 But let the sound G in the melody be continued through part of 
 the succeeding bar, without altering the bass (as in the following 
 example), and the ear will immediately begin to long for the delayed 
 note F. And if each note in this melody be similarly treated, we shall 
 have 
 
 22: 
 
 «s>- 
 
 221 
 
 2IZ 
 
 izz: 
 
 Wlien an interval of a melody (or of an inner part) is thus kept back 
 in descending, it is called a susjoension. 
 Thus, in the preceding example, 
 
 G suspends F, 
 F suspends E, 
 E suspends D. 
 
 * This is principally derived from Logier's "System," ut sup. pp. 62-G5.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Or, if viewed in relation to their bass notes, 
 
 The ninth suspends the eighth, 
 The fourth suspends the third, 
 The sixth suspends the fifth. 
 
 These include all the dissonances by suspension. 
 
 The following are examples of each : — 
 
 97 
 
 
 -<S- 
 
 "C5" 
 
 :c2i 
 
 -«s*- 
 
 'C?" 
 
 s 
 
 -iS^ 
 
 2^=^=^: 
 
 n-R 
 
 -ts>- 
 
 ''Z±k 
 
 .Q_ 
 
 ^?^:^^B 
 
 m 
 
 i^z: 
 
 :q: 
 
 22: 
 
 icz: 
 
 221 
 
 :q: 
 
 X2_ 
 
 i^z 
 
 t z 
 
 \ 3 
 
 Here the dissonance of the fourth is produced by suspending the third. 
 
 -s*- 
 
 -<s- 
 
 ~rT 
 
 -e>- 
 
 ;i 
 
 Q_ 
 
 ^± 
 
 J^ 
 
 (S>- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 Si 
 
 ,Si 
 
 -«s>- 
 
 S— n 
 
 -<S' iS>- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -o- 
 
 -Gf- 
 
 22: 
 
 izz: 
 
 :22: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -<s^ 
 
 -<s^ 
 
 -«s>- 
 
 9 8 
 
 9 8 
 
 Here the dissonance of tlie ninth is produced by suspending the eighth. 
 
 'TJ — C 
 
 22: 
 
 :g: 
 
 <o> r rJ 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 ^zi 
 
 ^^f^ 
 
 -C^ 
 
 -<S'- 
 
 g=E 
 
 -S^ 
 
 H^ 
 
 -(S> 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 -!S>- 
 
 T^ 
 
 22: 
 
 22: 
 
 22: 
 
 22: 
 
 221 
 
 22: 
 
 22: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 6 5 6 5 6 5 
 
 Here the dissonance of the sixth is produced by suspending the fifth.
 
 98 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 4. The suspension, then, being produced by a lagging note — a note 
 behind the rest in the progression from one chord to another, — it follows 
 that these dissonant notes must exist as consonances in the previous 
 chord, before they became dissonances by being, as it were, left behind. 
 
 The rule, then, may be thus stated : — 
 
 "All dissonances must be introduced by consonances," or, in other 
 words, " The sound which constitutes the dissonance must first be heard 
 in the preceding chord as a consonance." 
 
 And tliis is called preparing a dissonance. 
 
 And it is also evident from this, that in whatever part (treble, bass, or 
 inner) the dissonance occurs, in that same part it must also be prepared. 
 
 It will also be noted, that the dissonance always descends one degree 
 upon the following consonance. 
 
 And this is called resolving a dissonance. 
 
 A few examples will make this clearer : — 
 
 221 
 
 -@- 
 
 -O- 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 m- 
 
 1221 
 
 -O- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 If we wanted to introduce the dissonance of the fourth into this har- 
 mony, we might do so, perhaps, as follows : — 
 
 :c2E 
 
 ,<s»- 
 
 =?2 
 
 -fS>- 
 
 
 Z2: 
 
 :^2: 
 
 -<^
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 99 
 
 But on inspecting the progression of these parts, it will soon be seen 
 that the fourth is not i^repared. 
 
 To remedy this defect, it must be introduced into the same part in 
 the preceding bar ; thus — 
 
 F 
 
 Z2T2 
 
 (S>- 
 
 E 
 
 -G>- 
 
 rU 
 
 -S^ 
 
 m 
 
 22: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 And the same process would enable us to introduce the dissonance of 
 the ninth into the last bar ; thus — 
 
 :22ZC2 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^2 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 o- 
 
 ICZ 
 
 ■^:2: 
 
 m 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -s>- 
 
 :q: 
 
 And the dissonance of the sixth should be prepared and resolved in 
 the same manner. 
 
 The following rules will be useful : — 
 
 I. The dissonance of the fourth may be introduced whenever the 
 fundamental bass (or root) descends a fourth or ascends a fifth. 
 
 II. The dissonance of the ninth may be introduced whenever the fun- 
 damental bass ascends a fourth or descends a fifth. 
 
 o 2
 
 100 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 The preceding example will serve to illustrate both these rules. 
 
 5. The preceding remarks refer only to dissonances by suspension 
 occurring in uniiiverted chords. By employing inverted basses, a great 
 variety of effects by suspension may be obtained. 
 
 In every case care must be taken " never to let the suspending note 
 be heard together with the note it suspends.^' Thus 
 
 ^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 :^: 
 
 -cr 
 
 :^2= 
 
 would be wrong ; as the suspended B is heard in the tenor part. In 
 a free style, however, such a combination is occasionally met with. 
 
 Still, it is necessary for the student to keep to the rule ; excepting 
 only in the case of the ninth by suspension, wbich may be used with 
 the eighth, 2')'^^ovided the parts proceed by coiitrary motio7i, and only 
 then. Indeed, even in this allowed case, the licence should be sparingly 
 used. Thus, for instance, 
 
 would bo allowed by licence, while the following —
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 101 
 
 is*- 
 
 ^- 
 
 i 
 
 ;^E^^ 
 
 -G>~ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ITj- 
 
 -^ 
 
 would be altoo'ether inadmissible. For it is evident that hidden coiise- 
 cutive octaves would be produced — 
 
 -<s^ 
 
 iH 
 
 fc?^ 
 
 6. In the first inversion of the common chord, the fundamental dis- 
 sonance of the ninth becomes a seventh to the inverted bass, as follows : — 
 
 Roots 
 
 *y 
 
 -& 
 
 -G>- 
 
 I^ 
 
 y«^- 
 
 1221 
 
 Here the leading note, B, is allowed by licence to fall to G, to avoid 
 the transgression of the above nile for the resolution of dissonances. 
 
 In this inversion the fLmdamental dissonance of the sixth becomes 
 a fourth to the inverted bass ; as thus —
 
 102 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Roots 
 
 -y- — 1 
 
 1 — 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 1 n 
 
 ^^ — ^ 
 
 
 
 — ^H 
 
 J — ^ 
 
 
 feh-fe 
 
 — 
 
 _cJ eL- \—^— 
 
 _c-^ (S'— ■ 
 
 tJ 
 
 . ... f 
 
 -J 
 
 
 f^^— 
 
 f^— 
 
 r^ 
 
 j-^ 
 
 rj 
 
 v^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4 3 
 
 I 
 
 4 3 
 
 /m^' -^ 
 
 
 
 
 vfj- 
 
 — -^ 
 
 
 
 
 V-^ 
 
 
 ^-^ 
 
 
 rj 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 — & — 1 
 
 
 6 5 
 
 6 6 
 
 In the second case here given, the dominant seventh, F, has been allowed 
 to fall to C instead of E, in order to avoid breaking the same rule. 
 
 In this inversion the fundamental dissonance of the fourth necessi- 
 tates the suspension of the inverted bass itself ; thus — 
 
 Roots 
 
 ^ 
 
 -C2_ 
 
 -O- 
 
 g f^-D 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 22: 
 
 :q: 
 
 -Gf- 
 
 i^- 
 
 cn 
 
 Z2: 
 
 for the inverted bass is always to be looked upon as an upper melody 
 transposed into the lowest place, and therefore to be treated in all 
 respects as such.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 103 
 
 In the second inversion of the common chord, the fundamental 
 dissonance of the fourth becomes a seventh to the inverted bass, 
 thus — 
 
 Roots 
 
 g 
 
 JCZ. 
 
 :^: 
 
 r 
 
 iq: 
 
 &- 
 
 122: 
 
 In this inversion the fundamental dissonance of the ninth becomes 
 a fifth to the inverted bass, thus — 
 
 Roots 
 
 #^^^^ A- 
 
 -r^ 
 
 -& 
 
 ^ 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 In this inversion the fundamental dissonance of the sixth in-
 
 104 
 
 THE PKiNCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 volves the suspension of the inverted bass itself, producing the fol- 
 lowing : — 
 
 Roots 
 
 -i 
 
 -r± 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -o- 
 
 - ^— r^ 
 
 -.■s*- 
 
 1^21 
 
 In the inversions of the chord of the dominant seventh the various 
 dissonances will appear as follows. The student will understand them 
 without further explanation. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -P 
 
 -Gh 
 
 ^ 
 
 ~rjr:z^ 
 
 -Gf- 
 
 :gr"-sep»-^ 
 
 Z5: 
 
 122 
 
 ^2=jz^=:t 
 
 ^ 
 
 d=d: 
 
 I^ 
 
 gd] -ri- b^=Hzg2 
 
 1^21 
 
 --^-g- 
 
 ici 
 
 22: 
 
 1^2 
 
 22: 
 
 :q; 
 
 -«s>- 
 
 JZ^ 
 
 Z2 
 
 Z2 
 
 Z2: 
 
 "-—(S*- 
 
 7 - 
 
 t 8 
 
 :^S> ' 
 
 6 - 
 5 - 
 4 3 
 
 ^ 
 
 z:2 
 
 221 :zq: 
 
 :22: 
 
 ziz: 
 
 :z2 
 
 22i:r^z 
 
 ::<S>- 
 
 :^S>- 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 Roots 
 
 4 3 
 
 7 
 
 t 3
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 105 
 
 m^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 :q: 
 
 -o- 
 
 -«s»- 
 
 iq: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 :?^=;^ 
 
 1^21 
 
 Z2: 
 
 7 6 
 
 6 - 6 
 
 5 4 
 
 7 6 
 
 i = 
 
 :r±: 
 
 Z2 
 
 z:2: 
 
 ^i?3: 
 
 zz: 
 
 Z2 
 
 i^z: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 :^- 
 
 B/oots 
 
 :<S>- 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 :«S>- 
 
 i I 
 
 3 3 - 4 3 
 
 In none of these cases has the dissonance of the ninth been admitted, 
 because it becomes identical, practically, with the chord of the added 
 ninth, already described ; or, if minor, with the chord of the minor ninth. 
 
 The student will now be able to add dissonances by suspension to the 
 chords of the added and minor nmths and their inversions, by carefully 
 adliering to the rules given above. We will therefore give a bass with 
 figures, and with the roots indicated, for him to harmonize. 
 
 To render this easier, however, the following rules will be useful. The 
 first and second have already been given in other words. 
 
 I. When the fundamental bass (or root) descends a foui'th, or ascends 
 a fifth, the dissonance of the fourth may be introduced, prepared 
 by the octave. 
 
 i 
 
 =F 
 
 12:2: 
 
 'Z^ 
 
 ^m 
 
 2^ 
 
 -G>' 
 
 ?<S>-
 
 lOG 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 II. When the root ascends a fourth, or descends a fifth, the dis- 
 sonance of the ninth may be introduced, prepared by the fifth. 
 
 
 :C2: 
 
 -G>- 
 
 =F 
 
 W^ 
 
 S>z 
 
 1^21 
 
 -«S>- 
 
 III. When the root descends a fourth, or ascends a fifth, the dis- 
 sonance of the sixth may be introduced, prepared by the third. 
 
 ly. Wlien the root ascends a second, the dissonance of the ninth, 
 prepared by the third, and that of the fourth, prepared by the 
 fifth, may be introduced. 
 
 i 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 s 
 
 ^: 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 -«s>- 
 
 -1^- 
 
 ~r^ 
 
 5 — 
 
 'JIJZ 
 
 -G^ 
 
 1^21 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 V. Wlien the root ascends a third, the dissonance of the sixth, pre- 
 pared by the third, may be introduced.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY 
 
 107 
 
 m 
 
 'j:^ 
 
 2:^: 
 
 VI. When the root ascends a sixth, or descends a third, there can 
 be no dissonance. 
 
 VII. When the root descends a second, or ascends a seventh, the 
 dissonance of the sixth, prepared by the fifth, or that of the 
 fourth, prepared by the third, may be introduced. 
 
 - "^ . .^1 J 
 
 iq: 
 
 -iS>- 
 
 -G^- 
 
 -^■ 
 
 A- 
 
 -JZll 
 
 -fE^- 
 
 -^ 
 
 "C?" 
 
 -^2_- 
 
 *^2=H 
 
 -iSi- 
 
 jf5 
 
 [When inverted basses are used, and dominant harmonies 
 added, certain additional rules may be added.] 
 
 VIII. When the root of preparation bears a dominant seventh, and 
 ascends a fourth, or descends a fifth, the dissonance of the fourth, 
 prepared by the seventh, may be mtroduced. 
 
 -St 
 
 r^ 
 
 T^ 
 
 -G>- 
 
 A 
 
 r 
 
 -IS'T 
 
 22^21 
 
 P 2
 
 108 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 IX. When the root of preparation bears an added ninth or a minor 
 ninth, and ascends a fourth, or descends a fifth, the dissonance 
 of tlie sixth, prepared by the ninth, may be introduced. 
 
 fc^ 
 
 =^ 
 
 :^2: 
 
 hS^ 
 
 -^- 
 
 9 ^— 6 I 
 
 ^ 
 
 0= 
 
 ^iSh 
 
 221 
 
 :P= 
 
 1^21 
 
 -(^^ 
 
 1221 
 
 Exercise on Dissonances. 
 
 )h-t 
 
 -G^ 
 
 '-9- 
 
 -Gt^ 
 
 1^2: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 G 
 
 -& 
 
 ~«^ 
 
 -Gt- 
 9 8 
 
 G 
 
 -s>- 
 
 G 
 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 7 6 
 
 G 
 
 D 
 
 F=P= 
 
 1^- 
 
 :r=t 
 
 <r> 
 
 -<s?- 
 
 -s^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 i^: 
 
 -s^ 
 
 -^s* 
 
 i^ 
 
 G 
 
 G 
 
 7 6 
 
 c 
 
 t¥ 
 
 5 
 
 52 
 
 D 
 
 G 
 
 D 
 
 rrs 
 
 ^ 
 
 1^2: 
 
 -«s>- 
 
 hS»- 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 z:i 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 -v — 
 
 G 
 
 ^v_ 
 
 D 
 
 6 7 6 
 ) 
 
 c 
 
 8 7 
 
 % - 
 
 D 
 
 6 - 5 
 
 5 4 4 
 
 V 
 
 G 
 
 D 
 
 -H'&H- 
 t 3 
 
 G 
 
 7. When two dissonances can be regularly introduced on the same 
 root, according to the foregoing rules, they may be introduced simul-
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 109 
 
 taneously. They are then called double dissonances, and the chord into 
 wliich they are introduced is called a double discord. 
 
 Thus we may have the double dissonance of the fourth and ninth. 
 For example — 
 
 i 
 
 XT 
 
 3 
 
 -^Eif- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^S- 
 
 -f^- 
 
 iq: 
 
 We may likewise have the double dissonance of the sixth and fourth. 
 For example — 
 
 J. 
 
 -^± 
 
 1^2: 
 
 It is important to observe carefully the identity of the notes 
 composing this last double discord with those forming the second in- 
 version of the common chord. In nine cases out of ten, a 9 must be 
 
 4 
 
 treated as a dissonance, and not as an inverted triad; i.e. the dissonant 
 notes must be prepared and resolved according to the rules given in 
 this Chapter. 
 
 Whenever a J is followed by a § on the same bass, we may be sure 
 it is a dissonance, and must act accordingly. The root will then, of
 
 110 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 course, be different from what it would be, were the chord the inversion 
 of a triad. Thus the root of the first note in this bar, 
 
 "^7 
 
 ^ 
 
 is not G, but D ; and bears the double dissonance of the sixth and 
 fourth. Therefore both the B and the G must be sounded, in the 
 same parts, in the previous chord ; thus — 
 
 
 -«SI 
 
 -!&'- 
 
 "^ 
 
 z-tS 
 
 ^. 
 
 -^ 
 
 T^~ 
 
 Ib7 
 5 
 
 ">% 
 
 i. The dissonance of the ninth may be resolved on the sixth, if 
 the bass ascends a third — 
 
 1221 
 
 (S»- 
 
 .^ 
 
 '^^- 
 
 ~jrjr. 
 
 ii. The dissonance of the sixth may be resolved on the third, if the 
 bass ascends a third — 
 
 i 
 
 --g-- 
 
 id: 
 
 IC^I
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 ] 1 1 
 
 iii. The dissonance of the sixth, may be resolved on the sixth, if the 
 bass descends one degree — 
 
 m 
 
 C21 
 
 -B 
 
 -TTJ- 
 
 iv. The dissonance of the fourth may be resolved on the sixth, if the 
 bass descends a fourth, or ascends a fifth — 
 
 -«s- 
 
 g 
 
 icz: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -c;^ 
 
 -<©- 
 
 -&- 
 
 T^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 4-21 
 
 i^ 
 
 :z2: 
 
 1 
 
 9. It Tvdll also be useful to remember that while fundamental dis- 
 cords are resolved on another bass, discords by suspension are resolved 
 on the sa^ne hass. Also it is well to bear m mind that while funda- 
 mental discords require no |9repa?Tt^zo?i, but only resolution, discords 
 by suspension require both ^^j^e^^ara^io?^ and resolution.
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 1. In" Chapter VIII, section 3, it was said that " When an interval 
 of a melody (or of an inner part) is kept back in descending, it is called 
 a suspension. 
 
 It remains now to treat of the other case : " When an interval 
 of a melody (or of an inner part) is kept back in ascending, it is called 
 a retardation!' 
 
 The principle of the two is the same, only that the name of 
 suspension is not, strictly speaking, suitable to the case of a note kept 
 from asce7iding. 
 
 2. When the leading note is retarded, the dissonance of the major 
 seventh hy retardation is produced. 
 
 i 
 
 XT 
 
 221 
 
 -fSh- 
 
 -<^- 
 
 -G^ 
 
 1^2: 
 
 m^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 22: 
 
 A 
 
 1^21 
 
 This is prepared by the tliird, and can be introduced whenever the 
 root falls a fifth, or rises a fourth.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 113 
 
 When the fifth is retarded, the dissonance of the second hy retardation 
 is produced. 
 
 I 
 
 :g: 
 
 =F 
 
 z:± 
 
 is: 
 
 -C2. 
 
 -G>- 
 
 1^2: 
 
 ■^ 
 
 id: 
 
 :^2" 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 i^z: 
 
 This is prepared by the fifth, and can be introduced whenever the 
 root falls a fifth, or rises a fourth ; if the fifth is so placed as to be 
 able to rise a degree. 
 
 These are the only fundamental retardations. 
 
 The rules for their preparation and resolution are much the same 
 as those which refer to suspensions. 
 
 3. When the two retardations are used together, a douhle discord 
 hy retardation is produced ; thus — 
 
 -A 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 T^ 
 
 1^2: 
 
 The student will be able to work out the application of these dis- 
 sonances to chords with inverted basses, by reference to the method 
 employed in the case of suspensions. 
 
 Q
 
 114 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 4. Eetardations and suspensions may likewise be variously combined 
 of which we will now give some examples.* 
 
 i^tett^ 
 
 ^Eg 
 
 gj , — &^ 
 
 
 ^m 
 
 'JOH 
 
 f^- 
 
 :^: 
 
 :JJ^ 
 
 -et- 
 
 'JUl- 
 
 -^- 
 
 TIT" 
 
 9 § 
 
 ^ 
 
 P5 
 
 -^ 
 
 -G>- 
 
 t^-=^ 3 
 
 -&r 
 
 ;*i 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 .■q: 
 
 -<s^- 
 
 :^ 
 
 i^. 
 
 '-P- -B- ^ 
 
 -(^- 
 
 P2: 
 
 iS 
 
 n^z 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 s 
 
 -/^ 
 
 -&- 
 
 :JtP 
 
 e^ 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -<^- 
 
 -JZT- 
 
 % 
 
 S! 
 
 -^ 
 
 -fS' 
 
 "O" 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 ^^ C^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 m 
 
 ^-=^ 
 
 2d=^ 
 
 :c2: 
 
 -TD 
 
 rcz: 
 
 53 
 
 -<Si- 
 
 ■•s*- 
 
 -<^- 
 
 12:2: 
 
 1^21 
 
 9 8 9 8 
 
 * See short Examples at the end of this work, No. 14.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 115 
 
 1^2: 
 
 q: 
 
 (S^ 
 
 :p^ 
 
 -«s^ 
 
 -<s- 
 
 z:2: 
 
 J, 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 :z2: 
 
 «=^ 
 
 -^- 
 
 <s>- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 ^— ^ 
 
 rD— \—r:3 
 
 P=^ 
 
 (S>- 
 
 :^ 
 
 :?2: 
 
 T^~ 
 
 iS>- 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 7 6 2 6 
 
 * This chord will be explained in a future Chapter. 
 
 -<^y(S^S(S/t)^y^>-^ 
 
 Q 2
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 1. In Chapter IV, section 2, Logier's rule was quoted, that " Wlien- 
 ever we use a [fundamental] seventh, and thus proceed to a new key, 
 we modulate into that key." And in the same place a regularly pro- 
 gressive modulation of this kind was given. 
 
 We will now give it in a more concise form. 
 
 
 g 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 -Gh 
 
 7^ 
 
 a 
 
 a^g 
 
 ^aiS^: 
 
 22__L^ 
 
 fe^=^i 
 
 -^^ 
 
 s^ 
 
 K>g3 l^'Sj^- 
 
 lu^ r:^ 
 
 a 
 
 122^ 
 
 ^51 
 
 e: 
 
 ip2=S 
 
 m 
 
 (S>- 
 
 (S>- 
 
 :z2 
 
 ^ 
 
 isi 
 
 6 
 
 b5 
 
 b7 
 
 be 
 b5 
 
 be b7 
 b 
 
 .be 
 
 b5 
 
 b 
 
 ^ 
 
 -t9- 
 
 :^2: 
 
 't^. 
 
 3§^ 
 
 -<5<- 
 
 Z2" 
 
 '=is: 
 
 -m^m^ 
 
 :^2z:bs^: 
 
 s-^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 «: 
 
 t^ 
 
 «S— " 
 
 i^ 
 
 3^ 
 
 ^3^ 
 
 ^e^«i 
 
 ^!S>- 
 
 xz 
 
 1^ 
 
 t^ 
 
 122: 
 
 tz=± 
 
 :^± 
 
 :^ 
 
 e 
 
 4 
 
 i 
 
 D7 
 
 57
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 117 
 
 This may be still further curtailed by the following method, whereby 
 the octave changes to a dominant seventh in each successive chord. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 r r 
 
 :^*£=^W 
 
 ^ 
 
 fer 
 
 '^^ 
 
 v^- 
 
 VSh- 
 
 m£ 
 
 'IZL. 
 
 --^ 
 
 tec 
 
 ^ 
 
 i*: 
 
 b5 
 
 be 
 
 b.5 
 
 be 
 
 /rs 
 
 1^^- 
 
 ^m- 
 
 S*— jt? 
 
 tl*- 
 
 l3: 
 
 It-i 
 
 g 
 
 _a 
 
 t:;^ 
 
 -(S«- 
 
 -^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 I^X 
 
 z^: 
 
 I ^^ — '1 I I 
 
 -^ 
 
 be 
 
 -^— r-^i- 
 
 iS: 
 
 1f^ 
 
 4j- 
 2 
 
 41- 
 2 
 
 (i 
 
 C7 
 
 \:^ 
 
 But the progression can even further be shortened by omitting all 
 the tonic triads and inversions, and regarding each successive chord of 
 the dommant seventh, or its inversion, as embracing the proper resolution 
 of the preceding one. 
 
 In this form the result will be as follows : — 
 
 :^^=^; 
 
 ^E 
 
 fc 
 
 ^&- -&- 
 
 &g=5g 
 
 %gHg='S=fi^ 
 
 Jld 
 
 -d- 
 
 A 
 
 
 ^S 
 
 I^S 
 
 ^21 
 
 2?:^ 
 
 *!^- 
 
 ^«S- 
 
 b5 
 
 D6 
 
 b5 
 
 where we may observe, 1st, that the leading notes all appear as though
 
 118 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 they were resolved downwards, iii defiance of nile. But the ear supplies 
 the omitted intervening tonic chord in each case, and thus is satisfied. 
 Moreover, the progression of the roots, each becoming a dominant to the 
 next, quite overi'ides the effect of the UTegular resolutions of the leading 
 notes, and carries the ear with it headlong in its downward course. There- 
 fore this mode of resolving leading notes is allowed, as a licence. We 
 observe, 2ndly, that the bass and treble both proceed chromatically by 
 similar motion, and at the interval of a diminished fifth. And we 
 observe, 3rdly, that the first and third inversions are used alternately. 
 
 Another form of this series is the fundamental position, thus — 
 
 'J-l^^- 
 
 (S»- 
 
 E^i^S 
 
 ^^ ^m ^^^ 
 
 1C5: 
 
 :il^ 
 
 m 
 
 Z2L 
 
 G^ — 
 
 t'^ 
 
 'ZH. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 i^ 
 
 i^: 
 
 -cr 
 
 
 D7 
 D 
 
 b7 
 
 b7 
 
 b7 
 
 b7 
 
 D7 
 
 E7 
 
 &c., &c., &c. 
 
 Such a series is called a " sequence of dominant sevenths." 
 
 2. Chords of the added ninth, as well as of the minor ninth, are 
 susceptible of similar treatment. The latter particularly so, in the 
 form of diminished sevenths, thus — 
 
 sd^ 
 
 
 i 
 
 BADE 
 
 where, by the enharmonic substitution of Gtt for A^ in the fourth chord
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 119 
 
 we change the bass from G (which it would have been) to E, and 
 thus confine our progression of roots to the three, E, A, and D. By 
 similar enharmonic alterations of the intervals of any of the chords, we 
 can of course introduce any roots we please, as was shewn in Chapter IV, 
 section 5. 
 
 We may call this series a " sequence of minor ninths," or, if we 
 please, a " sequence of diminished sevenths." 
 
 3. If we wish to modulate in the contrary direction, i.e. from 
 tonic to dominant continually, our process of curtailment will not be 
 quite so complete as that just described. 
 
 It will be well to begin our work thus — 
 
 ^- 
 
 ^: 
 
 -H — e* 
 
 — 1± — 1^1^. 
 
 *^p: 
 
 -& — «i^. 
 
 :2: 
 
 e>- 
 
 Z2^ 
 
 sa 
 
 os^ 
 
 i gU-4^— 3 
 
 i 
 
 T^ 
 
 B- 
 
 _^_ 
 
 IQ- 
 
 cz: 
 
 (S>~ 
 
 '^- 
 
 \?±. 
 
 1^ 
 
 -^- 
 
 
 ^£S=ii=^a=^s 
 
 ^^S?i 
 
 M-=jf 
 
 q: 
 
 
 S3i 
 
 #^ 
 
 i^: 
 
 @^p^=^ 
 
 jzi 
 
 -:^=^$^- 
 
 <r ^ 1 
 
 I?^ 
 
 W- 
 
 i^ 
 
 ■ t 
 
 jf5 
 
 «5 - 
 
 t - 
 
 b7 
 
 &c., &c., &c.
 
 120 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 This progression may be curtailed as follows- 
 
 ^S=i0 
 
 -G» 
 
 1^ 
 
 :p 
 
 :«^ 
 
 -^-- 
 
 i^zzd 
 
 #5 
 % 
 
 This may be called a " reversed sequence of dominant sevenths." 
 Also, such a phrase as — 
 
 ±^ 
 
 ^_ 
 
 ^m 
 
 :fe 
 
 %^ 
 
 53^^^ 
 
 'm 
 
 &c., &c. 
 
 may be called a " reversed sequence of minor ninths," or a " reversed 
 sequence of diminished sevenths." 
 
 All these sequences necessarily involve perpetual modulation from 
 key to key. Hereafter it will be necessary to explain another kind of 
 sequence which never modulates out of the key at all. 
 
 It will be a good exercise, meanwhile, for the student to introduce 
 dissonances by suspension and retardation into the various sequences 
 we have now described, and to vary the inversions employed in as many 
 ways as he possibly can.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 121 
 
 4. It is now time that we should give a few general rules for the 
 harmonizing of melodies, which wiU be found useful to the student. 
 They have, for the most part, been selected from Looier 
 
 i. When the fifth of the dominant chord is in the melody, it is 
 a good plan to take the third of the root in the bass, and 
 harmonize it as a §. 
 
 5 
 
 ii. When the thii'd of the dominant chord is in the melody, it is 
 best to take the seventh of the root for the bass, and har- 
 
 . ., 6 
 
 monize it as a 4. 
 
 iii. When the third is m the melody (whether of dominant or 
 tonic), and the seventh cannot be taken as the bass, adopt 
 the fundamental bass. 
 
 N.B. These three rules may be reversed, i.e. the intervals of the 
 bass and melody may change places. 
 
 iv. When the seventh is in the melody, the fifth may be taken 
 
 as the bass, and harmonized 4. 
 
 3 
 
 V. When the fifth is in the melod}^, the seventh may be taken 
 as the bass, and harmonized 4. 
 
 N.B. Whenever an accidental sharp occurs in a melody, we may 
 regard it as indicating a modulation, and it will usually be 
 the leading note ascending to the new tonic. Similarly an 
 accidental flat may be regarded in most cases as a minor 
 seventh descending to the third of the new tonic. Hence the 
 use of the following rules.
 
 122 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 vi. A note of modulation which ascends a semitone, modulates either 
 to the key which lies a semitone above it, whether major 
 or minor, or to the relative minor of the above-named major 
 key. 
 
 vii. A note of modulation which descends a semitone, modulates 
 either to the key of which it will be the major third on so 
 descending, or to the relative minor of that key, 
 
 viii. A note of modulation which descends a whole tone, modulates 
 either to the key which lies a whole tone below it, or to the 
 relative minor of that key, or to the key of the fifth below 
 the note to which it descends. 
 
 ix. A note of modulation which ascends a whole tone, can only 
 modulate to one key, to which it will be a major third after 
 thus ascending. 
 
 X. When any note is repeated, it may modulate to the key of 
 which it is the fifth. 
 
 ix. A note of modulation which ascends a fourth or descends a fifth, 
 modulates to a key to which it will be the octave, or to a 
 key to which it will be a fifth. In either case the modulation 
 may lead to a major or minor key.
 
 CHAPTER XL 
 
 1. Hitherto in deriving the various intervals of tonic and dominant harmony from 
 the natural harmonics of a root, we have confined ourselves to prime numbers, except in 
 the solitary instance of the major ninth. 
 
 This intei-val occurs in the third octave,* and is produced by i of the length of 
 a pipe or string, the ratio of the velocity of its vibrations being to those of the root 
 as 9:1. 
 
 Compared with the harmonic No. 3 (which is the twelfth of the root or the fifth in 
 the first octave), it is as 9 : 3, or as 3:1. Accordingly its pitch is the twelfth (or octave 
 fifth) above that intei'val. 
 
 It is on account of that intermediate link between the major ninth and the root 
 that it is a very pleasant intei'val to the ear, more so indeed than the untempered minor 
 seventh of nature, which is a prime number, 7. 
 
 2. The fifth of the root, or dominant, has been made the basis of the whole super- 
 structure of harmony; as has been sufficiently shewn in the preceding pages, especially 
 in Chapter II, sections 2 and 3, 
 
 Supposing now that it were found necessary to have a second derivative root, in order 
 to explain the formation or origin of certain fundamental discords, what harmonic of the 
 original root would ofier the best hope of a satisfactory solution? 
 
 Clearly that one which afibrds new secondary harmonics the least remote from the 
 tonic root. 
 
 * See Paradigm at head of Chapter IV. 
 B 2
 
 124 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 The first which would suggest itself would probably be the major third, which occurs 
 in the second octave, and is represented by the ratio 5:1. But on examining the 
 harmonics of it, Ave find that its perfect fifth is the same note (No. 15) as we already 
 possess as our dominant leading note, and that the next foreign interval it gives us 
 (i.e. its major third) is the augmented fifth of the root, or the augmented octave of the 
 dominant ; which would be represented by the No. 25, if the paradigm in Chapter IV 
 were carried far enough. 
 
 It is indeed possible that this interval so derived may occasionally be of use to account 
 for the introduction of the augmented triad, for instance — 
 
 and for certain progressions and modulations to be mentioned in their place. But on the 
 whole we may conclude that the major third of the root will not answer our purpose 
 as a supplementary or secondary root, since its available harmonics are both few and 
 remote. 
 
 Still less will the fundamental minor seventh answer ; for not only is it still more 
 remote, but it also produces intervals, every one of which would require the same great 
 amount of alteration and tempering as is required in its own case. 
 
 We are therefore driven to the major ninth, which will be found to answer well. 
 
 It is not so remote in reality as it at first sight appears to be, because it is produced 
 by a square number 3x3 = 9, and is therefore, as an interval, the fifth of the fifth of 
 the root ; or rather, as we should say, the dominant of the dominant. 
 
 It is therefore as intimately connected with the dominant, as the dominant is with 
 the tonic. 
 
 Moreover, as will be shewn when we come to speak of "the tonic pedal," all the 
 harmonics of this secondary root, even up to its minor and major ninths, will sound well 
 when combined with the tonic and dominant roots, separately or in conjunction. 
 
 "WTienever then discords of a fundamental character occur, which cannot be accounted 
 for by referring them to a dominant root, they must be classed as derived fi-om the 
 major ninth of the root, which is the dominant of the dominant, and which, from its 
 place in the diatonic scale as the second degi-ee, is named "the supertonic."
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 125 
 
 3. But it may be asked, ' Do cases often occur which require tliis expedient to solve 
 them ? ' To which the reply is, That they are of constant occurrence, and that it is mar- 
 vellous that theorists should have gone on confusing themselves with inadequate explanations 
 for generations past, without having recourse to so simple a method of accounting for 
 difficulties which were continually arising. 
 
 The earliest treatise in which recourse has been had to this method of explaining 
 certain choi'ds (as far as the author is aware), is Day's " Treatise on Harmony," London, 
 1845. He only aj^plies the principle to the "chord of the augmented sixth," but it is 
 really susceptible of a much wider application. 
 
 However, as this is perhaps the most obvious case, let us consider it first in order. 
 4. If we take the second inversion of a dominant seventh, such as 
 
 ^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 and lower the bass-note a chromatic semitone by an accidental flat, thus- 
 
 :lfe 
 
 zu- 
 
 [^2- 
 
 we shall produce a discord which is called "" a " French sixth " by many 
 writers, and is very common in modern music. 
 
 * Vide Crotch, "Elements of Musical Composition," pp. 71, 72 (4ti)., London, 1812).
 
 126 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Again, if we take the second inversion of a dominant seventh- 
 
 =#^ 
 
 z:^: 
 
 omitting the octave of the root, and lower the bass note as before — 
 
 m 
 
 dm: 
 
 we shall produce a discord which has been called an " Italian sixth" 
 This* has been in use in Italy and elsewhere for more than 150 years. 
 
 Again, if we take the second inversion of the chord of the minor 
 ninth, omitting the root, thus — 
 
 ?=^tfQ, 
 
 <s> ' 
 
 22: 
 
 and then lower the bass note, as before- 
 
 * Logier in his " System of the Science of Music " calls this chord simply the " chord of the sharp 
 sixth." But as the sixth is not sharp only, but augmented, it is better to call it, as Day does, the 
 " chord of the augmented sixth."
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 127 
 
 i 
 
 t^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 e/ 
 
 15^21 
 
 we produce a discord,"' which has been called by the same authorities 
 the " German sixth." 
 
 These names are very unmeaning and unsystematic; but as they are 
 frequently employed, it is well for tlie student to make himself familiar 
 with them, and with the chords they are used to denote. 
 
 5. Now it is clear that in each of these chords every note, except 
 the loioest tvhich has been altered, is derived from the root D, and 
 belongs to that key of which D is the dominant, viz. G. 
 
 But if the chord be played several times in succession, alternately 
 with the chord of G, thus — 
 
 S^ 
 
 -&■ 
 
 T T T T T T r f " r 
 
 T^ 
 
 if 
 
 r 
 
 f 
 
 r 
 
 IS 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 -G>- 
 
 the ear will be anything but satisfied, and will desii'e to hear the har- 
 mony of C ; as thus — 
 
 * Logier Ciills this tlie •' compuuiid sharp sixtli."
 
 128 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 -et- 
 
 ■x^ 
 
 r 
 
 -^Ijr 
 
 :^: 
 
 1^2: 
 
 ii^ 
 
 -& 
 
 :^: 
 
 12^ 
 
 -s»- 
 
 This is enough to excite a suspicion that G is here rather a dominant 
 than a tonic root. 
 
 And this suspicion is strengthened by the fact that, after the chord 
 of the augmented sixth, the ear will not tolerate the minor common 
 chord of G ; as thus — 
 
 :Jf^ 
 
 \y^- 
 
 -o- 
 
 -&- 
 
 In this case, the ear imperatively calls for the majo?'; thus proving that 
 the leading note is required, which is the only third in the dominant 
 harmony. 
 
 We may therefore fairly conclude that the chord of the augmented 
 sixth must be followed by a dominant chord. Therefore its root (so far 
 as it has been discovered hitherto by us) must be the dominant of a 
 dominant, i.e. the supertonic. Therefore it belongs to the key of which 
 it is the supertonic, and of which the chord into which it resolves 
 is the dominant.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 120 
 
 6. But now the question arises : What is the root of tliat altered 
 bass note which could not be derived from the supertonic root 1 
 
 Clearly it is the minor ninth of the dominant, and being itself 
 consequently an essentially dominant interval, it is the cause of that 
 tendency to the real tonic wliich was pointed out in the last section. 
 
 7. It will be seen that the interval of the augmented sixth is 
 formed between the minor ninth of the dominant root, and the leading 
 note of the supertonic — 
 
 and that the only interval derived from the dominant root is its minor 
 ninth. All the other intervals of the chord, whether it be in the forms 
 commonly called the French, the Italian, or the German, are obviously 
 derived from the supertonic root. Examples — 
 
 3 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^:^ 
 
 -G>- 
 
 -G^ 
 
 s 
 
 -<s^ 
 
 -<5h- 
 
 ^^- 
 
 1^21 
 
 22: 
 
 Z2; 
 
 7 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 icz: 
 
 -T2L 
 
 :z2: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 fS^ 
 
 % 
 
 i^z: 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 f& 
 
 m 
 
 121 
 
 -<5f- 
 
 Roots. '^9 
 
 Ib9 « 'I 
 S 
 
 ib9 
 
 d7 
 
 5 
 
 t
 
 130 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Where there are two roots, the figures of the secondary root are 
 written above, and those of the primary root below. 
 
 8. The following rules may be found useful in resolving this 
 discord : — * 
 
 i. If in the resolution both notes forming the augmented sixth 
 move, the lower one must fall, and the upper one rise a 
 minor second, to a note which is either the octave or the 
 fifth to the root of the next chord. Example — 
 
 :^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 -^.^^-— B-! 
 
 #2: 
 
 -f5> — 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 ^ 
 
 '-^^ 
 
 i 
 
 # 
 
 ii. If in the resolution one note only moves, while the other 
 remains still, the moving note may approach the other by a 
 clwomatic semitone. Example — 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 *=t 
 
 ""C3" 
 
 ><e- 
 
 r 
 
 1^ 
 I 
 
 iii. The intervals derived from the supertonic root are treated 
 (except as restricted above) just as if it were a simple 
 dominant, and as though the minor ninth of the other root 
 
 * Vide "Treatise on Harmony," by Alfred Day, M.D. (8vo., London, 1845), p. 124.
 
 THE PKINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 131 
 
 were away : provided only that they make no false pro- 
 gressions with that ninth. 
 
 We will now give some of the many different ways of resolving the 
 chord of the augmented sixth, whether accompanied by a third, a fourth, 
 or a fifth ; in other words, whether Italian, French, or Geiman. 
 
 No. 1. 
 
 No. 2. 
 
 No. 3. 
 
 ^=4^: 
 
 :^ 
 
 :i^ 
 
 -«^ 
 
 f 
 
 1^2: 
 
 -o- 
 
 »p=^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 --gr 
 
 r^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 :ff^ — r~^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -G>- 
 
 -^^- 
 
 m- 
 
 -fer- 
 
 '-^- 
 
 ^-^ A 
 
 e 
 
 1221 
 
 iq: 
 
 :cz 
 
 
 8 D7 
 
 8 a? 
 
 8-pD7 
 
 E/OOts. 7 
 
 
 ^: 
 
 -<sf 
 
 -s^ 
 
 122: 
 
 221 
 
 b9 
 
 -^- 
 
 ^- 
 
 b9 8 C7 
 
 07 
 
 bo 8 C^ 
 
 No. 4. 
 
 No. 5. 
 
 No. 6. 
 
 ^ 
 
 g 
 
 i 
 
 2:2: 
 
 3?: 
 
 
 IS 
 
 "^21 
 
 :it^ 
 
 
 -<^ 
 
 *i 
 
 
 -iS'- 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 ^^sJ-^ 
 
 1^21 
 
 ^S*- 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 :^ 
 
 :q: 
 
 ]2to: 
 
 zz: 
 
 r=r 
 
 jis- 
 
 Roots. ''9 
 
 3 
 
 b5 
 
 D6 
 4 
 
 :^ 
 
 b9 
 
 -& 
 
 1^21 
 
 -cz: 
 
 -^ 
 
 b9 \ 
 S 2 
 
 b9 
 
 -O- 
 
 22:
 
 132 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 No. 7. 
 
 No. 8. 
 
 No. 9. 
 
 e 
 
 (S>- 
 
 T^ 
 
 1^21 
 
 Roots. 7 
 
 -<s 
 
 3 
 
 l.- ^ l I 
 
 :^^ 
 
 «^=^ 
 
 
 rr 
 
 :g: 
 
 :flg=r3 
 
 rf 
 
 fs>- 
 
 ^21 
 
 'TTJ' 
 
 ^ t 
 
 HSt 
 
 s 
 
 Z2: 
 
 ^ 
 
 g — ^ 
 
 B 6 07 
 
 B4 4 6 
 
 -^ 
 
 3 
 
 ^21 
 
 ^g-- 
 
 122: 
 
 zz: 
 
 :^2: 
 
 -e? 
 
 b9 o - 
 
 4 3 
 
 b9 6 
 
 4 
 
 -^■ 
 
 b9 6 d7 
 
 4 5 
 
 No. 10. 
 
 No. 11. 
 
 No. 12. 
 
 i 
 
 Z3=^ 
 
 3 
 
 i^ 
 
 2:3: 
 
 3 
 
 1^21 
 
 :22Z 
 
 1^2: 
 
 «r^ 
 
 :js 
 
 -(Si- 
 
 "C7" 
 
 :S^ 
 
 rr 
 
 ^^ 
 
 :?=: 
 
 •TTT 
 
 r=fe 
 
 ^2: 
 
 :^: 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^21 
 
 -©- 
 
 -s^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 t 3 
 
 Roots. 7 
 
 1) 
 
 b9 
 
 
 22: 
 
 :^ 
 
 22: 
 
 b9 
 
 b9 
 
 22:
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 133 
 
 No. 13. 
 
 No. 14. 
 
 No. 15. 
 
 ^ 
 
 — <^ — 
 
 s 
 
 22: 
 
 -^x 
 
 -^^ 
 
 -rj 
 
 ^ 
 
 k^- 
 
 r 
 
 ■^- 
 
 =»s^ 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 T:^ 
 
 Z2Z 
 
 ^ 
 
 rr- 
 
 : y-R 
 
 ^ 
 
 ?2: 
 
 ^0-^ 
 
 I — I I — 
 
 ^ 
 
 irz. 
 
 'i::iL. 
 
 - 8 07 
 
 Roots. 7 
 
 ^- 
 
 n4 - 
 
 t 3 
 
 ? - 
 G4 - 
 
 S 
 
 iq: 
 
 :^ 
 
 :^z: 
 
 icz: 
 
 •59 8 C: 
 
 59 
 
 4 3 
 
 (59 
 
 6 5 
 4 3 
 
 No. 16. 
 
 No. 17. 
 
 No. 18. 
 
 
 ^a 
 
 *=^=R= 
 
 ^r-q»- 
 
 *»-5 
 
 ^ 
 
 zz 
 
 -iS'- 
 
 e 
 
 221 
 
 Z2: 
 
 P 
 
 -TTT 
 
 8 D7 
 
 Roots.''? = 
 
 « -. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 8 07 
 
 b5 - 
 
 ^? = 
 
 59 
 
 1221 
 
 5 — 
 4 3 
 
 bo 
 
 b9 - 
 
 -« #- 
 
 99 
 
 fl6 
 4 
 
 '% i 
 
 Z2:
 
 134 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 No. 19. 
 
 No. 20. 
 
 No. 21. 
 
 No. 22. 
 
 No. 23. 
 
 No. 24. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ~r2L 
 
 1ZL 
 
 ^='^: 
 
 :z2: 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 icz: 
 
 ^__&jJ_J_^_g_tii:if^— 5^ 
 
 ~-^y-^-^-= 
 
 :b^i=^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 i^z: 
 
 i^ 
 
 221 
 
 E2 
 
 6 B7 
 
 Roots. 7 
 
 ^ 
 
 22: 
 
 G7 
 
 Q7 
 
 7 
 
 h9 57 
 
 ^2: 
 
 1^21 
 
 6 B7 
 
 -<S- 
 
 -(S' & 
 
 b9 £7 
 
 122:
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 13; 
 
 No. 25. 
 
 No. 26. 
 
 No. 27. 
 
 ^ 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 i^3— -^Qizt:^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 ^rX 
 
 :^^ 
 
 1^2: 
 
 32: 
 
 4;^ 
 
 a 
 
 2iz: 
 
 "c:? 
 
 221 
 
 ^<^- 
 
 j&- 
 
 ^ 
 
 --^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 J^2. 
 
 :z2: 
 
 ifi 
 
 icT 
 
 :^z: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 hS^ 
 
 -lS»- 
 
 
 |S7 
 
 b9 
 
 B7 
 
 B7 
 
 '9o 
 
 Roots. 7 
 
 
 
 b? 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r»\' 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 l^' r- 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 v^ cj 
 
 
 rj 
 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 '-A 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 <si— 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 <si— J 
 
 
 — s' — 
 
 (»H 
 
 
 
 
 b9 
 
 B7 
 
 b9 
 
 No. 28. 
 
 No. 29. 
 
 No. 30. 
 
 
 1^2: 
 
 I^X 
 
 :^ 
 
 221 
 
 -»Sf- 
 
 -«s 
 
 22: 
 
 -'^^^ St 
 
 ^-g-- 
 
 °=3S=^ 
 
 ^-g:- 
 
 ^^- 
 
 icz: 
 
 ^s>- 
 
 1^21 
 
 ^S- 
 
 221 
 
 B6 
 4)- 
 
 Roots. 7 
 
 % 
 
 b9 
 
 C7 
 
 be 
 
 4 
 
 221 
 
 D6 
 
 7 
 
 % 
 
 b9 
 
 'I 
 
 221 
 
 07 
 
 7 
 
 ^- 
 
 b9 
 
 "b7~ 
 
 be 
 
 4 
 
 2z:
 
 136 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 No. 31. 
 
 No. 32. 
 
 No. 33. 
 
 -JTJlZ 
 
 ^-g-- 
 
 -^x 
 
 -«s- 
 
 :^i$^^2zte: 
 
 _cz; 
 
 ^(S> 
 
 221 
 
 ^<^- 
 
 iq: 
 
 ^<s- 
 
 i^z: 
 
 B6 
 
 B6 
 4 
 
 Roots. 7 
 
 b5 
 
 b9 
 
 7 
 
 
 be 
 
 4 
 
 b5 
 
 
 D6 
 4 
 
 -<S1 
 
 221 
 
 -SI 
 
 :q: 
 
 -(S 
 
 :^ 
 
 22: 
 
 b9 
 
 -<Si^ 
 
 B7 
 
 b9 
 
 -&■ 
 
 D7 
 
 b9 
 
 D7 
 
 &c., &c., &c. 
 
 With reference to these examples, it will be well to observe that, 
 in every one of them, the supertonic discord is first resolved, and, 
 after that, the dominant discord. 
 
 In Nos. 3, 4, 26, and 27, the Eb descends to C before going to 
 its proper resolution D, in order to avoid consecutive fifths with 
 the bass. 
 
 In Nos. 5, 8, 9, 12, 15, 18, 20, and 21, the dissonance of the sixth 
 by suspension is not duly prepared. But it may be remarked, that 
 the rule about preparation is often relaxed in the case of the dis- 
 sonance of the sixth ; especially if it have the fourth with it, and 
 if this latter dissonance be duly prepared, which is the case here, 
 all through. 
 
 In Nos. 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, and 33, the inter- 
 vening octave to the dominant root is omitted, for the sake of curtail-
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 137 
 
 ment, and the minor seventh introduced by chromatic descent of the 
 leading note, as explained in Chapter X, section 1, shewing how a 
 chord of the augmented sixth may form part of a regular sequence. 
 
 In Nos. 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, and 33, by the use of the fourth 
 inversion of the chord of the minor ninth, a resolution is effected on 
 the second inversion of the tonic triad. But this is hy no means 
 recommended, although it is strictly speaking allowable. 
 
 9. By the use of an enharmonic change, the augmented sixth and 
 the minor seventh become interchangeable ; by wliich means great 
 variety of modulation may be obtamed : for instance — 
 
 Roots 
 
 b7 b9 
 
 where these intervals are enharmonically substituted for each other in 
 two places with good effect. 
 
 A particidarly good instance of this way of using the enharmonic 
 change, in treating the chord of the augmented sixth, may be found 
 in Dr. Crotch's Oratorio of "Palestine," in the chorus "Let Sinai tell."* 
 
 * See Examples at the end of the work, Nos. 4 and 8. 
 T
 
 138 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 By combining this plan with the alternate use of the chords of 
 the diminished seventh and augmented sixth, the following curious 
 chromatic sequence may be constructed — 
 
 d. 
 
 i^gP 
 
 
 -Q. 
 
 &^Jgl 
 
 l2^ 
 
 :^#:^ 
 
 :t3^:^=fe 
 
 m 
 
 --^ 
 
 fS>- 
 
 ^t^^it;^ 
 
 -& 
 
 b7 ,6 
 5 B5 
 
 6 ^6 ^6 6 
 
 4 B^ B5 4 
 
 I 
 
 ,b6 
 
 b4 
 
 b5 b£ 
 
 4 5 B5 4 
 
 &c., &c., &c. 
 
 This formula may be found useful when a sudden modulation to a 
 remote key is required. 
 
 10. The chord of the augmented sixth can be inverted- 
 
 FiTst Inversion. 
 
 ^ 
 
 < g^ % 
 
 Roots. 
 
 1% 
 
 D 
 G 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 U- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -&- 
 
 j^. 
 
 -TTT 
 
 bfi 
 4 
 
 G 
 
 -t 
 
 b 
 
 C 
 
 i 
 
 -^^ 
 
 =i^ 
 
 b5 
 
 D 
 G 
 
 :i 
 
 ^3=^ 
 
 tted: 
 
 :z2: 
 
 G 
 
 -^ 
 
 iq: 
 
 B7
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 139 
 
 U 
 
 ^ 
 
 s; 
 
 :z2: 
 
 ■^- 
 
 '^ 
 
 -^- 
 
 ^gzz=t:g: 
 
 ^- 
 
 ^ '^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 :z2: 
 
 €r-^p - 
 
 ie 
 
 ^ 
 
 b7 
 
 Roots. 
 
 
 1 
 
 DT 
 
 G 
 
 i% 
 
 D 
 G 
 
 G 
 
 Second Inversion. 
 
 i 
 
 _^ 
 
 r^z 
 
 ^E^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 -C^ 
 
 ^ P P- 
 
 :?2: 
 
 -^^ — ^ 
 
 :f^ 
 
 -C^ 
 
 i?^ 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 ^ 
 
 v^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 i^i: 
 
 ^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -fe- 
 
 Roots. 
 
 D 
 G 
 
 G 
 
 ii n 
 
 G 
 
 G 
 
 «'6 
 
 D 
 G 
 
 6 
 
 G 
 
 i 
 
 ^§=t 
 
 r^ 
 
 <^ 
 
 (S I 'T^ L^' 
 
 Roots. 
 
 D 
 G 
 
 G 
 
 Third Inversion. 
 
 -^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 or, 
 
 ^^=^- 
 
 Roots. 
 
 -s»- 
 
 D 
 
 G 
 
 C7 
 
 G 
 
 
 T 2
 
 140 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Note. — Dr. Day denies that the interval of the augmented sixth can be inverted, on 
 the ground that the harmonics derived from the secondary root must not be placed below 
 those derived from the primary. 
 
 But in the first place we may imagine the roots to be distant as many octaves below 
 as we please, so that we can always suppose the two roots to be at their proper interval 
 apart, viz. a twelfth. 
 
 And, in the next place, the chord has been used in an inverted position by many of 
 the most esteemed composers with excellent effect. The earliest instance being in Weldon's 
 Anthem " Hear my crying," near the end of the concluding movement, (Vide Boyce's 
 Collection of Cathedral Music, vol. ii. p. 218, of the editions of 1768 and 1788.) 
 
 Weldon was a pupil of Henry Purcell, and died in 1736.* 
 
 11. As this seems the most fitting place for explaining the meaning 
 of what is called " false relation," or " cross relation f it may be stated 
 that by these terms are signified certain harmonic incongruities between 
 two different parts or voices, which are exceedingly offensive, and 
 generally forbidden. 
 
 The general rule is, that " when a note of the same name occurring 
 in two successive chords is altered by an accidental, it must be sounded 
 by the same part or voice, otherwise forbidden false relations will 
 ensue." Thus — 
 
 -23=1 IS wrong, but fm — 3 . ^~" i^ right. 
 
 -^- 
 
 -^r 
 
 The reason of which is, that the false relation gives the impression 
 of two different keys simultaneously used; for, in the former and incorrect 
 example here given, the treble — 
 
 C2: 
 
 • See Short Examples at the end of this work, Nos. 1 and 2.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 is part of a melody iii C minor, while the other parts — 
 
 141 
 
 2!> 
 
 -& 
 
 clearly belong to C major. 
 
 If, however, the note to be altered is doubled, it need only progress 
 accordmg to the above rule in one of the parts, otherwise consecutive 
 octaves would ensue — 
 
 —9 f^- 
 
 S 
 
 E 
 
 -iS*- 
 
 P<S>- 
 
 i 
 
 By licence false relations are allowed in purely dominant modu- 
 lations, when occuiTing between different symmetrical phrases or groups; 
 thus — 
 
 •tS»- 
 
 ^ 
 
 r^rr 
 
 -is>^ 
 
 5? 
 
 i 
 
 -tr 
 
 r r T r 
 
 where the two phrases are enclosed in brackets, and the false relation 
 of the G and Gitt is not harsh or unpleasant. 
 
 Where the roots proceed regularly -from dominant to tonic in a 
 descending cycle of fifths, or where such regular cycle is symmetrically 
 reversed, false relations may sometimes be tolerated: for example — 
 
 :^: 
 
 =z± 
 
 ^ 
 
 or 
 
 z:^ 
 
 iSh- 
 
 -^1 
 
 G 
 
 D 
 
 ' — 3j^ 
 
 D 
 
 G
 
 142 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 because "the reo-iilar resolution of the dissonant notes in each case con- 
 soles the ear, and mitigates the harshness of the false relation. 
 
 Great composers have occasionally used considerable licence in the 
 matter of false relations ; but we do not recommend the young com- 
 poser to follow their example. We have given some curious and 
 exceptional instances at the end of this work.* 
 
 It may also be observed that in many cases the interposition of an 
 intervening chord will not save the false relation : for instance — 
 
 ^ 
 
 or even /m;— ^rL:*r^ 
 
 In each of these cases the harsh effect of the false relation remains, 
 because the intervening dominant chords belong equally to the major 
 and minor mode, and therefore do not interfere with the impression 
 produced by the two incongruous tonic chords between which they are 
 placed. 
 
 In strict counterpoint the rules against false relations are even more 
 exactly enforced. The above observations, however, will suffice for the 
 student's ordinary guidance. 
 
 * See Short Examples, Nos. 16, 17.
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 1. In dealing Avitli the chord of the augmented sixth, it was only- 
 found necessary to make use of one interv^al belonging to the dominant 
 root, i.e. the minor ninth; all the rest bemg derived from the secondary 
 or supertonic root. 
 
 But whenever we find a chord with a minor third and a minor 
 seventh, we may be sure it comes from two roots. 
 
 For the minor seventh demands a majoi' third, or leading note, to 
 enable it to resolve regularly. 
 
 If we substitute a minor third, our root is necessarily altered. 
 Thus — 
 
 Js 
 
 ,G>^-=^ 
 
 « 
 
 :g: 
 
 %- 
 
 -&- 
 
 7 
 
 is a regular resolution of the chord of the dominant seventh of D to 
 the tonic common chord of G. 
 
 Here, of course, the leading note FJf rises to the octave of the 
 tonic, G.
 
 144 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 But let us substitute F natural, and a totally different effect will 
 be produced on the ear — 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 I^X 
 
 ziz: 
 
 For here, evidently, we must regard the F natural as the minor 
 seventh of the dominant root G, while the A and the C are as evidently 
 the fifth and minor seventh of the supertonic or secondary root D. 
 
 This chord then has clearly a double root — 
 
 -Gf- 
 
 S: 
 
 -^- 
 
 ■<s»- 
 
 -iS>- 
 
 'CJ' 
 
 s 
 
 -&- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 "Z2; 
 
 Z2: 
 
 7 
 
 D 
 G 
 
 7 
 
 G 
 
 and the supertonic discord is resolved first, and then the dominant dis- 
 cord, just as was found to be the case in the chord of the augmented 
 sixth. 
 
 2. This is a most important chord in several ways ; for, in the first 
 place, its first inversion has been known to almost all theorists and 
 didactic writers on harmony as the " chord of the added sixth," or 
 " great sixth " —
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 145 
 
 ^q: 
 
 :^2 
 
 -<Sf- 
 
 and they treat of it as though it were the triad of the subdorainant 
 with the arbitrary addition of this "added sixth," which is an interval 
 entirely foreign to that root. 
 
 It is submitted that such an explanation is wholly unwarranted and 
 unphilosophical. 
 
 For the harmonic sound No. 13 ( see paradigm, Chapter lY) is 
 clearly connected with donfiinant harmony, if with any, and is most 
 remote from that part of the harmonic series which gives the tonic 
 triad. Therefore, if tliis chord belong to the root F, it can only do 
 so on the supposition that F is a dominayit root, and that it belongs 
 to the key of B flat. 
 
 But as the chord in question does not belong to B flat, and does 
 belong to the key of C, it follows that F cannot be the root of the 
 chord. 
 
 Nor can D be the root, as we have abeady shewn, because the 
 third and seventh from such a root camiot botli be minor, as they 
 would be in this case. 
 
 C, again, cannot be the root, as the F would be a fourth, and the 
 A a sixth — intervals which are not, strictly speaking, natural harmonics. 
 And even supposing we regarded the F and A as represented by those 
 very imperfect and doubtful sounds, Nos. 11 and 13 in the series of 
 harmonics, we should still not find them to be connected with C as 
 
 u
 
 140 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 tlieir root, for tliey would then be only applicable to C if it were 
 regarded as a dominant root ; but this is not the case, for the chord 
 does not belong to the key of F, but to that of C. 
 
 Again, Dr. Day argues at length to prove that the root is the 
 dominant G, bearmg its fifth, seventh, ninth, and eleventh. 
 
 But to this explanation there are several grave objections. 
 
 The first is that the F in this chord, especially when in the bass, 
 has a habitual tendency to rise, and is quite devoid of that peculiar 
 doiivncard character which marks the dominant seventh : nor is it a 
 sufiicient answer to this objection to reply that this downward tendency 
 is destroyed by the absence of a leading note; for an ordinary dominant 
 seventh with the thii'd omitted, still retains the tendency to descend 
 very unmistakeably, as the following examjole will sufficiently shew — 
 
 S 
 
 -s>- 
 
 -»s- 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 ' 7^- 
 
 Of course it may be said that this argument also applies to the 
 explanation given in this section. But it should be borne m mind 
 that we hioio the downward tendency of the fundamental seventh, 
 and connect it in our minds with the great flatness of that interval 
 as it a^Dpears in nature ; whereas we know that a real perfect fourth 
 or eleventh does not exist anywhere among the harmonics, and that 
 the interval which occupies the eleventh degree of the series, and is 
 supposed to represent the fundamental eleventh, is so very sharp as to 
 be much more like an augmented fourth or eleventh than a perfect one.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 147 
 
 Therefore it is against the indications of nature to treat (jf the 
 fundamental eleventh as thougli its natural tendencies could form the 
 basis of any argument. 
 
 The next objection is the unnecessary intrusion of the eleventh as 
 a fundamental harmony. 
 
 For in all cases in which this interval is supposed to exist, it may 
 equally well be considered to be either the minor seventh of a secondary 
 root, or a dissonance by suspension. Wliy then intrude it here ? 
 
 3. Without going further into this matter, let it then be assumed 
 that the " chord of the added sixth," as it is generally and erroneously 
 called, is nothing more than the first inversion of the chord of the 
 minor seventh with a minor third ; and that it is derived from two 
 roots, the dominant and the supertonic. 
 
 This last chord has three inversions — 
 
 ^ 
 
 -<s 
 
 ■-3 
 
 ^ 
 
 22: 
 
 g- 
 
 /I 
 
 1 r-' 
 
 
 
 
 ' 1 
 
 <rv 
 
 
 1 
 
 D 
 
 G 
 
 i 
 
 -B- 
 
 s^ 
 
 "C7 
 
 7^C2. 
 
 1^21 
 
 ^ G 
 
 G 
 
 When used in the minor mode, the A, which is the ninth of the 
 root G, becomes a minor ninth, A flat. 
 
 Or, taking the key of A minor, as before, for our examples, Ave shall 
 have the chord And its inversions as follows — 
 
 u 2
 
 148 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 i 
 
 •7 
 
 m 
 
 
 -s>- 
 
 7 
 
 B 
 
 iP 
 
 ^^_ 
 
 _c:z: 
 
 7 
 
 E 
 
 -o- 
 
 C2z: 
 
 -^ 
 
 Z35: 
 
 _Q 
 
 T^ 
 
 B 
 
 IE/ 
 
 1*^ 
 
 t 
 
 ?:^ 
 
 _^ 
 
 :?2: 
 
 
 A 
 
 =^^ 
 
 
 B 
 
 VE 
 
 T^- 
 
 7 
 
 E 
 
 l^^ 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 i^: 
 
 ^ 
 
 A 
 
 6 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 B 
 
 
 6 
 5 
 
 E 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 4. Sometimes, especially in modem music, the regular resolution of 
 the first inversion of this chord is curtailed by the omission of the 
 dominant chord, which usually intervenes between the double -root chord 
 and its final tonic resolution. This curtailment may take place either in 
 its major or minor variety. Thus — 
 
 S' 
 
 B 
 
 ^ 
 
 IS" 
 221 
 
 or 
 
 -s>- 
 
 1^21 
 
 -&: 
 
 ^ 
 
 icz: 
 
 1^21 
 
 -^ 
 
 m- 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 221 
 
 5 
 
 F 
 
 D 
 
 5 
 
 D 
 
 6 
 5 
 
 B 
 E 
 
 Sometimes the minor discord is followed by a major tonic triad, 
 after the manner of what is called a " Tierce de Picardie " (see Chapter 
 XIII, 3), when the follomng result is produced — * 
 
 * See Short Examples at the end of the work, No. 18.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 149 
 
 'Gh 
 
 ^ 
 
 S 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 122: 
 
 And sometimes this occurs when the whole passage is in the major 
 key, and when the preceding chord is also itself major, thus — 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -G^ 
 
 221 
 
 In all these cases the chord has been preceded by that of the sub- 
 dominant; but this is far from being always the case. Moreover, the 
 uninverted chord of the minor seventh and third, as well as its second 
 and third inversions, may occasionally be treated after a similar manner; 
 as will be seen by the following examples — 
 
 n tf 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 1 I 
 
 
 ^ J 
 
 
 y ft u. ^ r^r-i 
 
 ^^ 
 
 <-^ 1 '^-J,^-) 
 
 ^^ 
 
 >^ f^^i^^ 
 
 s< 
 
 
 ■ -f-j 
 
 /T it H f^^ 
 
 c^ 
 
 r^ hr^^^ 
 
 •^^ 
 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 if\ ^ ^ <!--^ 
 
 rj> 
 
 +f^ h^r^ 
 
 <^ ■■ 
 
 fA r^ 
 
 rj 
 
 
 ~ C^ 
 
 \5 ; r J 
 
 
 ft<^ w <^ 
 
 rD 
 
 CJ o 
 
 
 c^ 
 
 (^ 
 
 
 
 
 c;i' 
 
 
 
 
 /^' ik ] r^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (*3. 5_y. ■ -^ 
 
 ^^.^^ 
 
 rj 
 
 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 r:,* 
 
 V^ tt 
 
 &^ 
 
 
 ■-0 
 
 
 
 
 
 — ■ — m ' 
 
 
 
 
 ■ c>- 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 E 
 
 D 
 
 7 b5 
 
 « D 
 
 E 
 A 
 
 1 
 
 E 
 
 D 
 
 Bad.
 
 150 
 
 r 
 
 (S>- 
 
 m 
 
 <^ 
 
 -G>- 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY 
 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 :^ 
 
 IS 
 
 :g^ 
 
 3g=g=t=5g 
 
 as: 
 
 
 &=;^ 
 
 >s>- 
 
 6 
 44 
 '6 
 
 -(S^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 -«©- 
 
 Bad. 
 
 '^-<r<&y(S'<$!kSyf>^^^~^^^
 
 CHAPTEH XIII. 
 
 Of Cadences or Closes. 
 
 1. We are now sufficiently advanced to speak of Cadences, or, as 
 they are sometimes called, Closes. 
 
 It is most important in a piece of music that every period, or 
 separate clause, and especially the conclusion of the whole, should tell 
 the ear exactly what it is intended to convey. It may be compared 
 to ordinary speaking in this; for it is evidently essential to good 
 speaking that the inflexions of the voice, as well as the words 
 employed, should indicate whether any sentence be intended to be 
 a final conclusion, or only a temporary but incomplete rest in the 
 sense, or an exclamation, or an interrogation. So in writing, it is 
 necessary carefully to observe correct punctuation for the same reason : 
 the sense will often depend in a considerable degree on the right use 
 of the various stops, the comma, the semicolon, the colon, the full stop, 
 and the symbols of exclamation and interrogation. In music the same 
 sort of result depends on the right use of Cadences; and they are 
 accordingly various in kind, and in their application. 
 
 2. The perfect cadence, or full close, is composed of a dominant 
 triad, or a chord of the dominant seventh succeeded by a regular
 
 152 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 resolution into the tonic common chord, which last should always be 
 placed on the strong place or " down-beat " of the measure. Example — 
 
 -^^ 
 
 w 
 
 --^ 
 
 -Gh 
 
 z:^: 
 
 :q." 
 
 22: 
 
 It is still considered a perfect cadence, even when dissonances and 
 retardations are introduced into the chord ; although they somewhat 
 weaken its effect, in most cases. Example — 
 
 The perfect cadence corresponds exactly to a full stop in writing, 
 and shoidd be employed whenever any portion of a piece of music is 
 brought to its completion, and perfect rest is therefore called for. 
 
 3. If the piece is serious and solemn, and it is desirable to intensify 
 the effect of the final perfect cadence, it is usual, especially in sacred 
 pieces, to add to it a plagal cadence. 
 
 This cadence is composed of the major or minor triad of the sub- 
 dominant, followed by the major triad of the tonic. Examj)le —
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 153 
 
 "T j- 
 
 122: 
 
 Z2; 
 
 -&*- 
 
 %■ 
 
 Both triads, properly speaking, should be introduced on the down-beat 
 of the measure. 
 
 It is often allowable and desirable to modulate regularly into the 
 key of the subdominant, so as to introduce the plagal cadence ; and here 
 also dissonances are admissible on the final bass-note. Example — 
 
 i 
 
 2^ 
 
 tJ^ g^- 
 
 :^ 
 
 e 
 
 :z2: 
 
 zz 
 
 -Gh 
 
 '^ ~^zj- 
 
 -g - ^- 
 
 -/S 
 
 r 
 
 -i::^ 
 
 T^ 
 
 :t^ 
 
 fS*- 
 
 :i^ 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 ^ 
 
 2i: 
 
 f 
 
 where the first four notes contain a perfect cadence in A minor ; after 
 which follows a regular modulation into the key of the subdominant 
 D minor, including the dissonance of the ninth by suspension, and thus 
 forming a regular plagal cadence to the final chord of A major. 
 
 When the major third is thus mtroduced into the final chord of 
 a piece in a minor key, it is called the " Tierce de Picardie," from the 
 district in which it is said to have been first used in this manner. 
 
 The plagal cadence may be used also without a j)revious perfect 
 cadence, provided the impression of the key in which the piece is to 
 conclude is sufficiently strong on the ear. 
 
 X
 
 154 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 This precaution is requisite, to avoid a craving after the key of 
 the subdominant after the piece is concluded, which is certain to ensue 
 if the final chord partake in the least of a dominant character. 
 
 It is allowable to substitute inversions of the subdominant triad for 
 its fundamental position, if convenient. Example — 
 
 32: 
 
 s= 
 
 -e 
 
 :z2: 
 
 r^r 
 
 or 
 
 ms^ 
 
 &- 
 
 -«s>- 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 @^ 
 
 32 
 
 321 
 
 32: 
 
 But the effect of this ending is not quite satisfactory to the ear. 
 It should, therefore, be used with discretion. 
 
 4. When it is wished to make a kind of rest or division in a piece 
 of music, so as to lead the ear to desire a resumption of the movement, 
 after, as it were, taking breath, it is usual to employ what is called 
 the Imperfect Cadence, or half-close. 
 
 This is the reverse of the perfect cadence, and consists of the major 
 common chord of the dominant, preceded by the major or minor common 
 chord of the tonic, either plain, thus — 
 
 :q: 
 
 s 
 
 -& 
 
 321 
 
 or varied by dissonances by suspension-
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 155 
 
 a=^ 
 
 a 
 
 Z2: 
 
 r^ 
 
 i 
 
 SE 
 
 p¥ 
 
 a 
 
 =s^ 
 
 122: 
 
 -Gf- 
 
 -TTT 
 
 5 - 
 
 4 3 
 
 or by Inversions of the tonic chord, thus — 
 
 i 
 
 
 -?^ 
 
 icz: 
 
 or thus- 
 
 @^ 
 
 -(S»- 
 
 -^' 
 
 zz: 
 
 ^ 
 
 221 
 
 r F 
 
 ^ 
 
 tS^- 
 
 r± 
 
 :q: 
 
 t 3 
 
 When a melody is regularly divided into two parts by a double 
 
 bar, it is very usual to let the former part end with an imperfect 
 
 cadence, and the latter part with a perfect one. As an example of 
 this we will quote a well-known single chant — 
 
 1 CL 
 
 "^ rzr 
 
 23 rj' 
 
 ^ 
 
 221 
 
 -©- 
 
 -Gf- 
 
 -&- 
 
 'C7- 
 
 22" 
 
 22" 
 
 "C2" 
 
 ^- 
 
 221 
 
 221 
 
 221 
 
 3! 
 
 ZIZ22: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 221 
 
 221 
 
 6 6- 
 
 Imperfect 
 Cadence. 
 
 5 - V. 
 
 4 3 
 
 V 
 
 Perfect 
 Cadence. 
 
 These three are the only regular kinds of cadence or close, — the 
 perfect, the imperfect, and the plagal. 
 
 X 2
 
 156 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 5. The following passage from Logier'^' will clearly explain how to 
 introduce a perfect cadence. 
 
 "When the chord of the fundamental seventh, or dominant harmony, 
 proceeds direct to the tonic, it is called a ' perfect cadence,' as at {a) 
 in the following example — 
 
 za=^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 :r:^ 
 
 s: 
 
 -o- 
 
 n- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 1221 
 
 :s^ 
 
 ® 
 
 -(Sl- 
 
 f^ 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -<Si- 
 
 ^g 
 
 :g=t 
 
 -^ 
 
 "O' 
 
 -(S^ 
 
 c> 
 
 =g-~ 
 
 i^: 
 
 :^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 e 
 
 izz: 
 
 22 
 
 -/^ 
 
 22zz: 
 
 1^2: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 22 
 
 -<S^ 
 
 be 
 
 " It must have been observed, that by a continued modulation from 
 key to key, we are kept in a state of constant excitement, approaching 
 even to a painful sensation, so that the ear becomes desirous of rest. 
 Therefore, when we have modulated for some time, it becomes necessary 
 either to return to the key from which we set out, and there conclude ; 
 or, if we wish to proceed still further, first to make a close in the key 
 at which we have arrived, and, after modulating for some time longer, 
 to come at last to a final close. 
 
 " We must not, however, stop upon any tonic at which we may 
 have arrived [as at (6) in the above example] ; for, as the great object 
 of a cadence is to lead the ear to a quiet state, an abrupt termination 
 must destroy the efiect intended. It might be supposed that the per- 
 fect cadence, described above, would be sufficient for this purpose, yet 
 we find that this is really not the case. It is true that proceedmg 
 
 * " System of the Science of Music," p. 82.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 157 
 
 direct by the chord of the fundamental seventh to its tonic forms a per- 
 fect cadence, with which the ear would be sufficiently satisfied, where 
 modulations have not recently occurred [as at (c) in the above example]; 
 yet the frequency of its occiurrence in a course of modulation, although 
 it may not destroy, materially weakens the decisive and concluding 
 effect it would naturally produce under other circumstances. Therefore, 
 when we arrive at the tonic of any key to which we have modulated, 
 and desire to come to a decided and satisfactory close, the ear must 
 be gradually soothed into a quiescent state by the introduction of a few 
 chords, so constructed that they shall not only have a tendency to con- 
 duct the ear to a state of rest, but shall also be calculated to produce 
 a strong impression of the key m which it is intended the close shall 
 take place. 
 
 " The chords best calculated for this purpose are those of the sub- 
 dominant and dominant; for the intervals of these chords (including 
 also those of the tonic) embrace the whole of the diatonic scale : so that, 
 in fact, by hearing those three chords at the close of a modidation, 
 we receive an impression of every interval of the key in which we 
 thus conclude. See (d) in the following example — 
 
 (d) {e) (/) 
 
 ■n — I '-h ^ I I , — -n ! !V - I 
 
 1^21 
 
 z:2: 
 
 -(S»- 
 
 g-±=g=Uzgz=a 
 
 J^=^=^ 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 B 
 
 T2~rj 
 
 -iS>- 
 
 iq: 
 
 2:± 
 
 Z2: 
 
 ■jr±. 
 
 1^21 
 
 I^Z 
 
 " However, a frequent recurrence of the simple chords of which this 
 cadence is constructed, would produce a heavy and rather monotonous
 
 158 
 
 THE I'lilNClPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 effect, whicli is much relieved by the introduction of the dissonance of 
 the fourth upon the dominant, as at (e). 
 
 " On account of the frequent occurrence of the final cadence, com- 
 posers have been induced to seek for every possible variety, and great 
 liberties have been taken for this purpose. The fourth, as it appeared 
 in the last example, at (<?), was properly prepared; but a sixth is also 
 sometimes introduced, which, it will be perceived, cannot be prepared, 
 and must be considered as a licence, as at (/)." 
 
 But that is not all. 
 
 Still further to secure variety, the double-root chord of the minor 
 seventh and minor third, especially its first inversion (which Logier 
 calls the chord of the added sixth), is often substituted for the chord 
 of the subdominant. And it should be borne in mind that in employ- 
 ing this chord the seventh of the secondary root should be prepared as 
 if it icere a dissonance of suspension. 
 
 .cl. 
 
 _C2_ 
 
 -iS>- 
 
 _Ql 
 
 i: 
 
 -Q- 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 T^ 
 
 ■■(^- 
 
 hS^ 
 
 jCi.- 
 
 i^^: 
 
 -<^- 
 
 W^ 
 
 hS>- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -e>- 
 
 "?rr 
 
 -e>- 
 
 -s»- 
 
 i^z: 
 
 -QQ- 
 
 Q_ 
 
 Si 
 
 -QQ- 
 
 -^— P^ 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 'Z2. 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 22: 
 
 :P2 
 
 -o- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 -e>- 
 
 ^2: 
 
 6 
 5 
 
 -(f^- 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 -O-
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 159 
 
 Sometimes tlie supertonic seventh is altogether 
 omitted, and then two curious results follow : first, we 
 get a chord exactly like the first inversion of the 
 minor triad of the supertonic; but in reality it is 
 only a dominant chord of the added ninth in its 
 third inversion : and secondly we avail ourselves of the 
 licence, peculiar to this form of the cadence, to intro- 
 duce without preparation not only the dissonance of the 
 sixth, but also that of the fourth. 
 
 Examples — 
 
 ^ 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 --^ 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 Root. 
 
 9 
 7 
 5 
 
 C* ' 
 
 ^2: 
 
 ^2: 
 
 -^- 
 
 1fS>- 
 
 '-^- 
 
 ?2: 
 
 22 
 
 Z2: 
 
 Z2 
 
 iS>- 
 
 cj : 
 
 Roots 
 
 -&■ 
 
 &—^ 
 
 -&■ 
 
 C G 
 
 G 
 
 &c., &c., &c. 
 
 Note. — It occurs frequently that a common chord, the hass of which is a third below 
 the tonic of our key, is interpolated between the tonic and subdominant (or substituted 
 chord). If we are in a minor key, this choi*d will be a major chord. If we are in 
 a major key, the contraiy will be the case. Examples — 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 i^ 
 
 -G>- 
 
 :r2 
 
 fls 
 
 1?*=^ 
 
 -tSt- 
 
 -Gf- 
 
 -zj-
 
 IGO 
 
 THE PRTNCTPLER OF HARMONY. 
 
 0. Ill order still further to avoid monotony, other modifications and 
 curtailments are sometimes introduced : 
 
 i. The subdominant or other substituted chord is omitted, the ? or 
 ^ being retained upon the dominant, thus — 
 
 t=^- 
 
 -^- 
 
 s 
 
 ^- 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 s 
 
 r 
 
 ^ 
 
 &- 
 
 -(S»- 
 
 :c2: 
 
 ii. Or the subdominant or substituted chord retained, while the 
 dominant V or V is omitted, thus — 
 
 ^2: 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 ^^^i 
 
 -(S»S>- 
 
 221 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -o- 
 
 fS> — 
 
 -o- 
 
 iii. The same, omitting the seventh of the supertonic, thus — 
 
 ^ 
 
 M 
 
 
 m 
 
 -iS>- 
 
 :^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 -o-
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 IGl 
 
 iv. Introducing the chord of the dominant seventh on the super- 
 tonic root, thus — 
 
 i 
 
 
 fSt- 
 
 ^p^ 
 
 -/S*- 
 
 ^=^ 
 
 -e>- 
 
 s 
 
 -Gt- 
 
 g 
 
 z^zz=z?:± 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 b7 
 
 V. Introducing the first inversion of the same chord- 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 -^- 
 
 f± 
 
 :^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 ^<s^ 
 
 r j r j 
 
 "O" 
 
 4 3 
 
 vi. Introducing the second inversion of the same chord- 
 
 J 3 I 
 
 ^ 
 
 SI «s- 
 
 Mr 
 
 S=l 
 
 -^2_ 
 
 -<S| 
 
 :^ 
 
 :g=^^ 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -s- 
 
 ^2: 
 
 fS>- 
 
 
 b7 
 
 -<S^- 
 
 vii. Or the chord of the minor ninth on the supertonic root — 
 
 
 g_^^i^- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -s(- 
 
 - g:3 rj 
 
 Gt- 
 
 ~Z2~- 
 
 W^^^^ 
 
 « 
 
 -&- 
 
 3 
 
 :z2:
 
 102 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 viii. Or the first inversion of the same chorcl- 
 
 ± 
 
 -m 
 
 -G>r 
 
 m 
 
 # 
 
 -iS»- 
 
 i^: 
 
 m 
 
 -^ 
 
 -w 
 
 a 
 
 22 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 Ix. Or tlie second inversion of the same chord- 
 
 -I- 
 
 :^=^: 
 
 :g=^^^ 
 
 iq: 
 
 f^ 
 
 1^21 
 
 ^ 
 
 e 
 
 lS>- 
 
 g 
 
 b5 
 
 D6 
 4 
 
 
 221 
 
 X. Or the chord of the augmented sixth — 
 
 -^ n 
 
 --gr 
 
 W^ 
 
 '■^ 
 
 lis 
 
 ^ 
 
 ZS2: 
 
 -<s- 
 
 • r-> r ^ 
 
 -^*' 
 
 Z2: 
 
 di 
 
 xi. Or the inversion of the same chord- 
 
 i^ 
 
 IS 
 
 S^'' — 
 
 1221 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^Gk 
 
 -^j- -7:y 
 
 o- 
 
 ^21 
 
 ^21 
 
 fe: 
 
 D2
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 163 
 
 xii. Or, lastly, a new chord, which shall be explained in the fol- 
 lowing section — 
 
 XT 
 
 -^ 
 
 -9&- 
 
 W=^ 
 
 1^3: 
 
 t?:^- 
 
 icz: 
 
 
 m^. 
 
 :^- 
 
 m 
 
 fSK- 
 
 1)6 
 
 :^t 
 
 :^2: 
 
 7. On comparing our new chord in No. xii. with that in No. iii., 
 it will be seen that the only difference is the accidental depression of 
 one interval, viz. the fifth of the dominant root G. 
 
 But this interval so depressed forms no part of the harmonic 
 series of G. 
 
 All the rest of the chord, however, belongs to it. 
 
 From what root then is this obtruded D b to be derived ''. 
 
 Clearly from C, of which it is the minor ninth. 
 
 But judging by the analogy of the double root-chords explained 
 above, one might think that such a derivation of the chord from 
 
 the two roots ^ would lead us to consider it as belonging rather to 
 
 the key of F, of which those roots are respectively the dommant and 
 supertonic. 
 
 And to a certain extent this is true ; and thus we see a connection 
 between this cadence and the plagal cadence, where a transient modu- 
 lation into the key of the subdominant actually takes place. 
 
 This new chord is then originally, though remotely, a subdominant 
 chord, though actually built on the tonic and dominant ; and whatever 
 
 Y 2
 
 1(34 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 elements of modulation it may possess are neutralized by the essentially 
 dominant character of the rest of the cadence. 
 
 Such then is the analysis of this remarkable and very beautiful 
 chord. 
 
 It is peculiarly suited to the minor mode, although occasionally it 
 may be followed by a major conclusion. 
 
 To distinguish it, it will be advisable to call it the " pathetic 
 cadence " : a name given to it by some authors on account of its peculiar 
 character. Dr. Crotch, Callcott, and most English theorists, have named 
 it the " Neapolitan sixth ^^ but such a name is very unmeaning, as it 
 certainly was at no time pecuhar to the Neapolitan composers. 
 
 It is susceptible of two mversions ; but they are difficult to mani- 
 pulate, and of doubtful advantage. Therefore they may be passed over 
 in this place.
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 1. Cadences which lead from the key, may be fitly termed 
 "cadences of modulation." Of these there are many kinds. 
 
 a. Irregular Cadences, or perfect cadences out of the key, designed 
 not for final closes, but for variety. Examples — 
 
 From C to A minor. 
 
 ip 
 
 m 
 
 ■3=t 
 
 -© 
 
 "^^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 n — sg- 
 
 Z2C2: 
 
 -^- 
 
 p: 
 
 :q: 
 
 From F minor to A flat. 
 
 M^S 
 
 f 
 
 o- 
 
 q: 
 
 
 ^^-^=5g 
 
 (S>- 
 
 (S>- 
 
 b7 
 b5 
 
 te: 
 
 p6 
 bo 
 
 6 
 
 b4 
 
 b7 
 
 ^22 
 
 =l2^
 
 1G(> 
 
 THE PKlNCirLES OF HAILMOXY. 
 
 i 
 
 From 1) minor to A minor 
 
 ^a^s: 
 
 5 
 
 22 
 
 3 
 
 5^ 
 
 =S- 
 
 :^ 
 
 -G>- 
 
 T2-- 
 
 lOii. 
 
 (3. Incomplete Cadences, which close not on the tonic triad, but on 
 its first inversion, introduced by the third inversion of the 
 preceding dominant chord, thus — 
 
 cz: 
 
 ±t=g 
 
 
 2± 
 
 '.^21 
 
 -(S" 
 
 -o- 
 
 ^?=p- 
 
 iq: 
 
 -^- 
 
 -(S»- 
 
 y. False Cadences, where the cadence, after proceeding regularly as 
 far as the chord of the dominant seventh, is suddenly broken 
 in upon by the intrusion of a foreign chord ; which must, 
 however, be such as to allow all the intervals of the pre- 
 ceding chord to be regularly resolved, thus — ■ 
 
 n. 
 
 i 
 
 231 
 
 22: 
 
 2? 
 
 22: 
 
 
 £ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 =s 
 
 3 
 
 H _g__a 
 
 32 
 
 •<S»- 
 
 :?2: 
 
 :?z2i 
 
 ^ 
 
 6 
 4 
 
 S 
 
 :22:
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 167 
 
 111. 
 
 IV. 
 
 ^ 
 
 -<si 
 
 ISZ 
 
 ffi 
 
 ^s 
 
 -^ 
 
 VS 
 
 s=^ 
 
 -s 
 
 ^2: 
 
 cz: 
 
 z:^: 
 
 -e^*^ 
 
 e 
 
 fS- 
 
 :t=e 
 
 -lir^ ' 
 
 ±fc 
 
 -s* 
 
 -s>- 
 
 ICZ 
 
 V. 
 
 -A- 
 
 VI. 
 
 ^ — ^-^- 
 
 22 
 
 -(SI- 
 
 #1 
 
 ^^ 
 
 :qq: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 =to: 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 -<S'- 
 
 -«s>- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^- 
 
 ■&- 
 
 ^21 
 
 i^z: 
 
 bo 
 
 7 
 
 "^:?" 
 
 :c2: 
 
 ^^- 
 
 In No. i. the dominant bass, instead of descending to tlie tonic, 
 rises a whole tone. 
 
 In No. ii. the same progression is accompanied by dissonances by 
 suspension. 
 
 In No. iii. the dominant bass rises a semitone. 
 
 In No. iv. the same is shewn in the minor key. And it must be 
 observed here that in the minor key the bass can only rise a semitone, 
 never a whole tone ; as, if it did, the intruded chord would produce 
 too violent a transition for the ear to bear. 
 
 In No. V. the same in another minor key, but in a different position, 
 and succeeding a pathetic cadence. 
 
 In No. vi. the intermediate notes are entirely omitted, making the 
 progression short and sudden.
 
 IGR 
 
 TIIK PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY 
 
 It is evident that no real modulation is effected in any of these 
 cases. They are merely false cadences disappointing the ear, and 
 requiring a subsequent cadence to restore a feeling of rest. 
 
 If then we really wish to remain in the key to which the false 
 cadence has led us, we must make a regular cadence in that key for 
 the purpose, thus — 
 
 :-i 
 
 X2: 
 
 JQ- 
 
 22 
 
 1^3^ 
 
 -<S 
 
 -<st 
 
 :q: 
 
 g=^ 
 
 :i^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^^£ 
 
 C2: 
 
 ?2: 
 
 -g-- 
 
 -&■ 
 
 22 
 
 1221 
 
 \y 
 
 u. 
 
 ^ 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 -st 
 
 ^ 
 
 S=^-g 
 
 zt 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 -(Sf- 
 
 4 
 
 fS>- 
 
 1221 
 
 /^ 
 
 :22: 
 
 -eS"- 
 
 j:± 
 
 -s>- 
 
 : r - > ^^ 
 
 -^<sJ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ?2: 
 
 ^1/ 
 
 And it will be seen that, by combining these two examples, we 
 can modidate from key to key, as far as we please — ■ 
 
 -8: 
 
 
 s»- 
 
 m 
 
 T^ 
 
 -f^ . -P- 
 
 -fS^ 
 
 io: 
 
 ^fS»- 
 
 "fX^ 
 
 =^ q =g5= 
 
 4^ 
 
 fe 
 
 t^
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 1G9 
 
 
 icz: 
 
 :c2: 
 
 -Gh 
 
 'JOL 
 
 -s*- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -o- 
 
 -G^ 
 
 -o- 
 
 In the foregoing example (bar 5) an enharmonic substitution of BG 
 for C b has been employed, to avoid extreme keys ; at bar 7 we return 
 to our original key. And at the end of the example a plagal cadence 
 with dissonances has been added, in order to shew the use of such 
 cadences to intensify the force of a perfect cadence, and to induce 
 a feeling of final repose in the tonic. 
 
 If, however, we do not wish to modulate after the false cadence, 
 we can always return to the original key by means of the chords 
 of either the augmented sixth, the diminished seventh, or the seventh 
 on the supertonic ; thus — 
 
 /r\ 
 
 n\ 
 
 r^. 
 
 r\ 
 
 ITS 
 
 fr\ 
 
 rs 
 
 |g=:ttj 
 
 iq: 
 
 -^ 
 
 P^^a^s^ 
 
 22: 
 
 fS>- 
 
 Eg 
 
 :^ 
 
 \u 
 
 b7 
 
 b6 
 
 -&- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 T21 
 
 fS>- 
 
 T2L 

 
 170 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Of course utiier inversions may be used, and dissonances introduced, 
 wherever it can be done without violating any of tlie preceding rules. 
 
 d. Interrupted, or Broken Cadence. Where a rest is placed where 
 the tonic should be ; as in the foUowmg example from Logier 
 (p. 214)- 
 
 Allegro. 
 
 ■M 
 
 /TS 
 
 l^ 
 
 '&. 
 
 f 
 
 / 
 
 d: 
 
 ^^ 
 
 /Tn 
 
 P 
 
 --m-- 
 
 ^ 
 
 :^=E= 
 
 ~-^- 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^. 
 
 =|: 
 
 fag— g=:l 
 
 ■z=a 
 
 iJ4»-j^-^w 
 
 
 Cf^^. 
 
 / 
 
 ^=^ 
 
 <s- 
 
 *^- 
 
 e^ 
 
 nc 
 
 ^^ 
 
 J r^ 
 
 5S 
 
 :^ 
 
 s=e 
 
 
 ff 
 
 :i=F 
 
 i 
 
 =^ 
 
 ^=^: 
 
 r r 1-" 
 
 r J F 
 
 =1: 

 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 171 
 
 €. Irregular False Cadence. Where the chord of the dominant 
 seventh, instead of being resolved regularly into its tonic, 
 passes into another fundamental discord, all its intervals, how- 
 ever, being regularly resolved. In this case the bass descends 
 a semitone, and the root of the new discord is the supertonic ; 
 thus — 
 
 ^ 
 
 (S>- 
 
 -<s 
 
 s 
 
 :z2: 
 
 :2:2 
 
 22 
 
 G)- 
 
 ^<S>- 
 
 ^s 
 
 P2: 
 
 :Sq: 
 
 z^. 
 
 m 
 
 ■iSt- 
 
 :^± 
 
 z± 
 
 u^- 
 
 22 
 
 -^ ^ 
 
 6 
 
 jr2L 
 
 hi 
 
 or wdth any other inversion of the minor ninth, or of the 
 chord of the dominant seventh, on D. 
 
 The chord of the added ninth may also be similarly em- 
 ployed. 
 
 ^ Susjxmded Cadence. Where, instead of allowing the dominant 
 to proceed at once to its resolution, a few modulations are 
 interposed ; thus — 
 
 -/S 
 
 :^ 
 
 t. 
 
 iq: 
 
 Z2 
 
 -Gh 
 
 i2^ 
 
 S 
 
 -<sf 
 
 WEB 
 
 2^^ 
 
 is: 
 
 fe^n 
 
 ^. 
 
 If 
 
 ij 
 
 8^-g: 
 
 p£ 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 -f^ 
 
 221 
 
 -Gf^ 
 
 Z2 
 
 fS^ 
 
 T2L 
 
 rrj 
 
 221 
 
 b7 b7 
 
 b? 
 
 b7 
 
 b7 
 
 4 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 z2
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 
 1 . It has been already sliewn (Chapter VI, sect. 3, and Chapter XI, 
 sect. 9) how wide a field of varied moduhition is opened to the com- 
 poser by the equivocal character of the chord of the diminished seventh 
 and its inversions, as well as of the chord of the augmented sixth, when 
 these are treated enharmonically. Also it was shewn, in Chapter X, 
 section 1, how to modulate progressively, or by way of sequence, by 
 means of the chord of the dominant seventh and its inversions. 
 
 As a supplement to these observations it will be weU to point out 
 three other irregular or deceptive ways of modulating by means of this 
 last-named chord, which are often of great service to the composer. 
 
 2. The minor seventh in the dominant chord, instead of descending, 
 may ascend chromatically to a note of its own name, provided it thus 
 becomes a leading note, and ascends afterwards to a new tonic, thus — 
 
 _C2 
 
 i 
 
 fe: 
 
 C2: 
 
 
 -^-
 
 THE rniNOlPLE.S OF HAiLMONY. 
 
 173 
 
 or it may be followed by a false cadence, thus, in the case of this 
 example, modulating to E minor, or to E flat major. Only provided 
 always that the progression of the leading note be as in the example. 
 Either of these chords of the seventh may be used in any of their 
 inversions, if the above condition be strictly observed. The leading 
 note of the first chord here is allowed to descend. 
 
 3. Another variety of resolution takes place when the chord of the 
 dominant seventh is succeeded by the first inversion of the dominant 
 seventh of a root a minor third below its own root — 
 
 ih- 
 
 -^- 
 
 -^^- 
 
 -^— H 
 
 ffi^ h' \^ f^ \ 
 
 "k ' 1 ' 
 
 J 
 
 /m^: 
 
 rzi 
 
 nn^ 
 
 _ . f^ J 
 
 (if. j ■"! 1 
 
 v_^ 1 1 1 
 
 
 Roots. G E A 
 
 For the second of these chords a diminished seventh on the Gjf, arising 
 from the same root E, may be substituted. 
 
 4. The third irregular resolution of this chord is when the interval 
 of the minor seventh falls to the fifth of the next root, while the 
 leading note ascends a whole tone instead of a semitone. It is usually 
 confined to the first inversion of the chord, as in the annexed example — 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^F=^ 
 
 S 
 
 -<s«- 
 
 :t^ 
 
 G 
 
 D
 
 174 
 
 THE PlUNCirLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 5. Hitherto every device we have examined has had for its object 
 the attainment of variety in modulation. But very often there may be 
 a transition or progression from one key to another, either for a chord 
 or two, or permanently, without any modulation properly so called. 
 In such cases dominant harmony must be altogether laid aside, and the 
 progress must be from one tonic triad to another. All that is wanted 
 for this is some note in common between two adjoining chords, in the 
 same part, as in the following example — 
 
 ^ 
 
 T2: 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 -^ 
 
 -i«5>- 
 
 ^s>- 
 
 BEEB 
 
 -S*- 
 
 -JUt. 
 
 =F 
 
 :^ 
 
 .C2. 
 
 e 
 
 Z2: 
 
 4^ 
 
 -& 
 
 -& 
 
 z^: 
 
 :^ 
 
 -Gt- 
 
 -^ 
 
 .CL. 
 
 ^■=8: 
 
 ts>- 
 
 m^ 
 
 --g— g: 
 
 :p=: 
 
 --Bi 
 
 -is»- 
 
 :S 
 
 q: 
 
 T^ 
 
 T^ 
 
 T^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 22: 
 
 Z2 
 
 -^ ^ ' d: 
 
 This example has been simply constructed by taking the ascending 
 scale as a treble melody, and harmonizing each note with the three 
 triads of which it formed a part : treating it alternately as an octave, 
 a third, and a fifth. 
 
 It is obvious that every note is susceptible of three such harmonies, 
 and that only such of them really belong to the natural scale, as coin- 
 cide with the chords found for it in Chapter lY. Those which consist
 
 THE PKTNCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 175 
 
 of the imperfect or diminished triad are ambiguous and comparatively 
 useless. Still they Imve their place, and are therefore reckoned here 
 with the rest. 
 
 6. The first note of the scale is most naturally accompanied by its 
 lower octave, or tonic, as a bass, with its proper triad, major or minor. 
 It may also have the subdominant for its bass, of which it is the fifth ; 
 as for instance in a plagal cadence, when that note is in the treble — 
 
 1=1 
 
 :z2i 
 
 -&- 
 
 :z^z 
 
 But we may also take the third heloiv (either major, if we are in 
 a minor key, or minor, if we are in a major key), and thus get a new 
 bass, or, as it is called, a modified bass, which in the key of C would 
 be A B or A b — 
 
 m 
 
 B- 
 
 or, if in the minor- 
 
 :z2: 
 
 zi: 
 
 1^- 
 
 B 
 
 /S^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 :Z2: 
 
 2:^=1 
 
 which gives variety without modulation. 
 
 7. The second of the scale has only one natural bass, namely, the 
 dominant, of which it is the fifth. There are, however, the two fol- 
 lowing modified basses —
 
 17G 
 
 THE PRTNCTPLRS OF TTARMONV 
 
 I 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 S 
 
 or, 
 
 -o- 
 
 i 
 
 Z2: 
 
 # 
 
 -<s- 
 
 Of these the former, i. e. the octave, is good ; while the latter, the 
 third below, is to be avoided, because of the diminished fifth it contains, 
 which is a doubtful and unsatisfactory interval, suggesting the first 
 inversion of the chord of the dominant seventh, but without the octave 
 of the root; or else it might be an imperfect chord of the minor ninth 
 on the third of the scale, omitting both the root and the leading note, 
 and thus being vague, equivocal, and unsatisfactory to the ear. 
 
 8. The third of the scale has only one natural bass, which is the 
 tonic itself. But it may be accompanied by two modified basses, i.e. one 
 a fifth, and the other an octave below it, of which the former is to be 
 preferred, being the relative minor — 
 
 i 
 
 S 
 
 s>- 
 
 T^ 
 
 23 
 
 9. The fourth of the scale has only one natural bass, namely, the sub- 
 dominant, of which it is the octave. It may, however, be accompanied 
 by two modified basses ; one a third, and the other a diminished fifth 
 below it. The last is of course undesirable, being the leading note, 
 and bearing the imperfect triad —
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMOXY, 
 
 177 
 
 i 
 
 X^ 
 
 ^=^ 
 
 -Gh 
 
 10. The fifth of the scale has two natural basses, the tonic and 
 the dominant. It may also be accompanied by one modified bass, the 
 third below — 
 
 B: 
 
 22: 
 
 C^- 
 
 r^i 
 
 T^ 
 
 11. The sixth of the scale is naturally accompanied by the sub- 
 dominant. It has two available modified basses, which are the fifth 
 and the octave below — 
 
 a: 
 
 e 
 
 -G>- 
 
 2^2: 
 
 12. The seventh of the scale has only one natural bass ; it has con- 
 sequently two available modified basses. But one of them should be 
 used with caution, as it is the seventh or leading note, and bears the 
 imperfect triad — 
 
 A a
 
 178 
 
 THE PrtlNOTPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 1=^ 
 
 
 C2: 
 
 1^ 
 
 -G> 
 
 13. Tlie following example will shew the use of these modified 
 basses, to secure variety, and to save continual change of key at the 
 same time — 
 
 III 
 
 2^ 
 
 
 Z3 7Z K- 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 aa^: 
 
 :& 
 
 ^ 
 
 m=m 
 
 -Gh -Gt- 
 
 «- 
 
 -zi- 
 
 m& 
 
 (S»- 
 
 o^ 
 
 32: 
 
 ; rj CA- 
 
 -«s>- 
 
 i^i: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 izrzn. 
 
 -&- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^- 
 
 -Q ^. 
 
 B^B 
 
 ipzuc 
 
 i 
 
 -s- 
 
 Bzz3 
 
 :z2: 
 
 a 
 
 
 ^-' — "S*- 
 
 22: 
 
 is»- 
 
 ^^ 
 
 lS>— 1 
 
 22ZZCZ 
 
 fS- 
 
 (S>- 
 
 2:i 
 
 Z2: 
 
 ^s*- 
 
 :o 
 
 :q: 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 Here no fundamental discords, nor suspensions, nor retardations have 
 been vised, yet sufficient variety has been secured solely by the use of 
 modified basses.
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 1. It has already been explained how to produce sequences of 
 various kinds.* In each case the result was a perpetual modulation 
 round and round a cycle of keys. Now as it is obvious that such 
 modulation, unless sparingly employed, must become very wearisome to 
 the ear, it is desirable to find some way of combining the advantages 
 of a regular sequence with the power of remaining in one key. And 
 this can be done by treating dominant sevenths and ninths in a manner 
 somewhat analogous to that by which the modified basses and triads 
 were obtained. 
 
 2. If a chord of the dominant seventh — 
 
 i 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 ZX 
 
 be only 'partially resolved, that is to say, if the seventh fall while tlie 
 leading note is suspended, the result will be as follows — 
 
 * See Chapter VI, section J), and Chapter XI, section 9, and Chapter XV, section 2. 
 
 A a 2
 
 180 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 fS- 
 
 C2IZZ\ 
 
 s>- 
 
 s> 
 
 -^^ 
 
 t^ 
 
 T^ 
 
 where the ear remains unsatisfied, and craves some further resokition. 
 This can be obtained by allowing the B to fall, as though it were the 
 dissonance of the ninth on the root A, in its first inversion; thus — 
 
 -9—^— 
 
 r^ 
 
 A rD 
 
 
 ff ^ ^ - 
 
 ' r^ f-^ 
 
 l^ J ^ 
 
 — 1 I 
 
 
 r*\' ^^ 
 
 i^' ■-'-■- 
 
 V^ 1 rj 
 
 
 Roots. G A 
 
 where we see that it is a sort of false cadence, and that the B is 
 really the dissonance of the ninth by suspension. 
 
 But suppose that, with a view to establish a regular progression 
 of the basses from fifth to fifth, we change the bass from C to F, at 
 the same moment that the B descends to A, we shall then introduce 
 another dissonance — 
 
 I 
 
 ^s»- 
 
 :c2: 
 
 ^ 
 
 -CL 
 
 icz: 
 
 rs»-
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 181 
 
 and this may be regarded as the dissonance of the ninth on the root D, 
 necessitating the descent of the dissonant note E to D — 
 
 &- 
 
 S>r 
 
 12:2; 
 
 ^P"-^^^ 
 
 22 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 ±2Z 
 
 ^ 
 
 I^ 
 
 .Q. 
 
 m 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 1^- 
 
 ^ 
 
 In order, however, to keep up the progression of basses as before, it 
 will be necessary to let the basses change to B at the same time, thus 
 producing a new dissonance of the ninth on the root G, each dissonance 
 being in the first inversion. But instead of resolving this by allowing 
 the A to descend to G on the same bass, we change the bass to E, 
 thus turning the note D into a dissonance, and once more necessitating 
 its descent to C. 
 
 Without analyzing this process further, we will give the whole 
 sequence, and afterwards remark on some of its chords — 
 
 is- 
 
 :Z2: 
 
 -<2- 
 
 S 
 
 CZ] 
 
 
 r ' V 
 
 3. Now it will be observed that in this last example the tenor, or 
 third part, has been varied, so as to lack the symmetry of the other 
 parts. This has been done to avoid the hidden octaves which appear 
 in the previous short example between the bass and tenor in each bar.
 
 182 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Indeed such a sequence of sevenths as this is most perfect and pure 
 when the tenor is omitted, and when the harmony is consequently in 
 three parts. 
 
 We will now give the same sequence in three -part harmony, and 
 then assign the proper roots to each chord — 
 
 fSK- 
 
 122: 
 
 -o- 
 
 T2=^&- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 PT 
 
 -&- 
 
 T^ 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 c ^ I — ^ — I rj 
 
 ^ 
 
 r^ 
 
 I 
 
 zi 
 
 T2L 
 
 ■jCt. 
 
 :^ 
 
 z± 
 
 -&■ 
 
 7 7 
 
 D G 
 
 -^ 
 
 GAD 
 
 7 7 
 
 G C 
 
 F 
 
 7 
 
 D 
 G 
 
 7 7 
 
 G A 
 
 7 
 
 c 
 
 7 
 
 D 
 G 
 
 7 
 
 G 
 
 C 
 
 Here it will be perceived that the roots proceed regularly from A 
 to F, when an interruption occurs, in the shape of a double-root chord, 
 succeeded by an ordinary dominant seventh on G. 
 
 The chords marked * might have been treated as first inversions 
 of the triad of B flat, with the dissonance of the ninth, C ; but then 
 w^e should have been forced to modulate out of the key, which woidd 
 liave destroyed the symmetry and character of our sequence. 
 
 It was preferable therefore to look on these chords as double-root 
 chords of the minor seventh and minor third (commonly called the 
 " seventh on the second degree " ), leading back to the same dominant 
 harmony with which we started, and with which the sequence after- 
 wards closes. 
 
 4. By adding notes a third above the treble of the above sequence 
 of sevenths, the second chord of every bar is converted into a chord 
 of the ninth —
 
 TTTE PRTN0IPLE8 OF HARMONY 
 
 183 
 
 S: 
 
 S 
 
 fS>- 
 
 ^^^^^Fi^ 
 
 ~-^- 
 
 iS: 
 
 I -I fif^,--^ 
 
 S- 
 
 T2L 
 
 ^ 
 
 F--' -^*- -<S- -7--r 
 
 (S^ 
 
 <2. 
 
 ^2: 
 
 lS>- 
 
 22: 
 
 ^ 
 
 S 
 
 fS>- 
 
 22: 
 
 -s* 
 
 22 
 
 -^ 
 
 orzr. 
 
 ^ ? 
 
 Again, by taking tlie original sequence of sevenths, and adding 
 a tenor part progressing in sixths below the alto or second part, the 
 first chord of every bar is converted into a chord of the ninth — 
 
 ^1 — r j- 
 
 P^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ?2: 
 
 m rHrW^S ^^^ 
 
 Bfei^#g 
 
 -^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 -^z 
 
 
 ^2: 
 
 ^EEEEp 
 
 ^2: 
 
 -<S' 
 
 :^ 
 
 r 
 
 -s^ 
 
 9 
 7 
 
 Or again, by combining these two sequences, a complete sequence 
 of ninths and sevenths in five-part harmony is produced — 
 
 s 
 
 t^- 
 
 -s= 
 
 -r> 
 
 ?2: 
 
 ^ ^rvZTT^ 
 
 -o- 
 
 ^: 
 
 T^ ^' 
 
 n 
 
 "py 
 
 -<=- -f2- 
 
 
 # 
 
 -^ 
 
 22: 
 
 -<s»-
 
 184 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OE HARMONY. 
 
 5. By using the inversions of the chord of the dominant seventh, 
 a great variety of sequences can be obtained — 
 
 fe^^m 
 
 -s^ 
 
 22: 
 
 P^p^^ 
 
 E 
 
 r=B=rr-^ 
 
 is- 
 
 <2_ 
 
 T2L 
 
 f3- 
 
 T2L 
 
 :^ 
 
 -P=,^ 
 
 F^f-=p^-^^ 
 
 1^21 
 
 -^21 
 
 ISZ 
 
 fS>- 
 
 C2: 
 
 1^=^ 
 
 zz 
 
 X2 
 
 Ei=^ 
 
 16 
 5 
 
 
 Z2| 
 
 «S^ 
 
 j,^-pj^ =d; 
 
 
 22=g 
 
 IS> *S>- 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 ■-T J^IZ^^^^~' 
 
 1<s^- 
 
 ^1 f ^ I r f " n^^^ 
 
 Q_ 
 
 ?2: 
 
 s>- 
 
 # 
 
 i 
 
 -^; 
 
 ^ 
 
 q: 
 
 22, 
 
 ^- 
 
 g 
 
 lS- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -C^- 
 
 )^ fS>- 
 
 ^ 
 
 xz: 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 1^2: 
 
 --g:- 
 
 2!2:
 
 THE PRTNX'IPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 18: 
 
 B: 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^- 
 
 ifcz: 
 
 ->S'- 
 
 n 
 
 'J5^- 
 
 -<s- 
 
 fe 
 
 te; 
 
 :g: 
 
 ?-T-F 
 
 f^: 
 
 
 _C2_ 
 
 -£2_ 
 
 IC^ 
 
 r^ ^_ _^r^ 
 
 -G^ 
 
 T^L. 
 
 "cr 
 
 -T& 
 
 :c5: 
 
 -s<- 
 
 -e^- 
 
 23L 
 
 -<S^ 
 
 i^:^: 
 
 :z3: 
 
 -^y 
 
 ~Gh 
 
 ^=§= 
 
 -o- 
 
 -s^ 
 
 "r:^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 t=^ 
 
 'JT^ 
 
 icz: 
 
 T^^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 -^- 
 
 "^S 
 
 i^z: 
 
 -^ 
 
 A 
 
 P^Sei 
 
 -S>- 
 
 .Ci 
 
 -C2_ 
 
 -S*- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 :^ 
 
 :fci: 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 O- 
 
 -^ 
 
 «2_ 
 
 :p 
 
 
 &C. 
 
 * N.B. This is not veiy good, as it contains hidden eights. 
 
 ?=: 
 
 \H: 
 
 m^ 
 
 
 .r i flg qig^g^: 
 
 
 :a=d 
 
 i^T rjf f Cf-' ^^]°- 
 
 g=i 
 
 g 
 
 :?=: 
 
 :& 
 
 e^E5 
 
 .^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 hS^ 
 
 ^=?:^=p= 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 - 
 
 ^ 
 
 6 
 
 &C., 
 
 &c., &c. 
 
 Bb 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 5 
 
 6
 
 186 
 
 THE PIUNCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 From these specimens tlie student will see his way to the elabora- 
 tion of other forms of sequence according to the method here indicated. 
 
 The last seventh must be a real chord of the dominant seventh, 
 either in its fundamental position, or inverted, so as to lead to the 
 close on the tonic. All the other sevenths which occur in sequence are 
 of course different from the fundamental seventh, and only derive their 
 force from the dissonances of suspension from which they arise ; and 
 from the symmetrical progression of the basses, which gives an impulse 
 as it were to the whole sequence, and invests it all through with 
 a quasi dominant character. Of course it is possible to substitute a 
 real dominant seventh at any stage of a sequence, and thus modulate 
 into any key which that seventh leads to. This is a very useful way 
 of availing oneself of these sequences in the course of a piece. 
 
 The annexed example is intended as an exercise for the student to 
 harmonize — 
 
 IS 
 
 ~r - > o 
 
 ^ 
 
 -tS- 
 
 -G>- 
 
 irzt 
 
 :c2: 
 
 i^± 
 
 iS>- 
 
 ^: 
 
 ^. 
 
 :23 
 
 6 .5 6 
 4 3 
 
 6-76 76 5- 6 
 
 3 4t- :i - 4 3 4 
 
 5 6 
 4 
 
 m^ 
 
 o- 
 
 'Z21 
 
 3 
 
 -^- 
 
 af: 
 
 6 4 
 
 (Sh- 
 
 (S»- 
 
 -O- 
 
 1221 
 
 4t- 6 
 
 7 6 5- 
 5 4 4 3 
 3 
 
 T-ff^fS^ 
 
 22Z3 
 
 -C2: 
 
 : g_rj. 
 
 :q_ 
 
 2± 
 
 -^ 
 
 ~j:2l 
 
 -«s>- 
 
 -^- 
 
 Z2 
 
 6 6 7 
 f 
 
 5 - 
 4 3 
 
 7 B6 
 
 4 3 ?8 i - 
 
 m 
 
 7 6 7 6 7 6 
 
 W\ 
 
 -^- 
 
 -(^ 
 
 icz 
 
 tS^ 
 
 22: 
 
 — .-^. 
 
 -& 
 
 22: 
 
 -G)~ 
 
 -HSW 
 
 22 
 
 -^-=^^^=3 
 
 -^- 
 
 22: 
 
 9 8 
 
 7 - 
 
 8 7 
 
 t 3
 
 THE PKINCIPLES OF HAKMOXY. 
 
 187 
 
 6. Towards the close of this example occur a series of ascending 
 notes, each figured 7 6. It will be well to sav a few words about 
 these. 
 
 Of course the simplest way of preparing these dissonances is — 
 
 :c± 
 
 gfc g^E^dsJg^ 
 
 -&■ 
 
 -^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 m 
 
 22: 
 
 -s>- 
 
 s 
 
 -Gf'' 
 
 which produces an ascending sequence. But this leads to the con- 
 sideration of what this would be without the dissonances. 
 
 It would then become an ascending sequence of sixths accompanied 
 bv thirds ; thus — 
 
 i 
 
 iS^- 
 
 22: 
 
 W- 
 
 s 
 
 :q: 
 
 -«s^ 
 
 ^z: 
 
 -o- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 B. 
 
 ~JZL 
 
 T^ 
 
 ^- 
 
 Roots. C 
 
 6 
 
 G 
 
 6 
 
 D 
 
 6 
 
 E 
 
 ] &c. 
 
 And these may either be derived from the tonic and dominant roots, 
 or from modified basses, such as were described in the last Chapter. 
 
 B b 2
 
 188 THE PJUNCrrLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Or the same may bo written in a descending sequence- 
 
 4 
 
 :q: 
 
 -<s- 
 
 :{ife 
 
 s 
 
 -<S 
 
 J^ 
 
 :a 
 
 -Gf 
 
 -(SI- 
 
 zr:^- 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 -is>- 
 
 -^^ 
 
 m^ 
 
 32: 
 
 (^ r:sr 
 
 -& 
 
 122 
 
 -& 
 
 la 
 
 Roots. 
 
 6 
 D 
 
 6 
 
 B 
 
 6 
 
 A 
 
 6 
 
 G 
 
 'A 
 
 D 
 
 -0- 
 
 G 
 
 And this descending sequence of sixths admits of course of dis- 
 sonances to each note — 
 
 a 
 
 w 
 
 ^^^i^ 
 
 T- 
 
 r 
 
 -&- 
 
 1^ 
 
 g 
 
 -s»- 
 
 r 
 
 [#5! 
 
 22: 
 
 (S>- 
 
 ^2: 
 
 -<s^- 
 
 22 
 
 -Gh 
 
 -^ 
 
 Roots. G 
 
 6 
 
 E 
 
 7 6 7 6 
 
 D C 
 
 7 6 7 6 
 
 D A 
 
 7 6 7 6 
 3 - 
 
 G 
 
 D 
 
 G 
 
 There is always considerable risk and difficulty in adding a fourth 
 part in harmonizing a sequence of sixths, as there is danger of making 
 hidden consecutive octaves or fifths. 
 
 The following are some of the best methods of doing it — 
 
 -& — I 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 22: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 22: 
 
 22: 
 <s>- 
 
 — ^— ^ Tr~- o ~~- ~—^ =g:^= &-^:r =^ 
 
 -«s»- 
 
 1221 
 
 22: 
 
 22: 
 
 ^ 
 
 22: 
 
 -^ 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 22: 
 
 -s»- 
 
 -Gh 
 
 -J 
 
 * 
 
 22:
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HAKMONY. 
 
 180 
 
 1^21 
 
 'f^' 
 
 -S>-fS^ 
 
 :a: 
 
 -«s>- 
 
 < CQ 
 
 :^- 
 
 (^ — 1 — 
 
 p±p 
 
 :^ 
 
 ^^» — 
 
 iTziai^:: 
 
 1^» 
 
 -.s>- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 :a 
 
 ^g:- 
 
 Y 
 
 -^- 
 
 3= 
 
 ?3=s; 
 
 The sixths may always alteniatc witli tifths, provided the iiftlis do 
 not produce the effect of consecutlves, Avhich tliey must do, more or 
 less, if they are on the accented beat, or (as it is called) the down- 
 beat — 
 
 -s"- 
 
 :r2 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 -Gl 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -<s^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 -s>- 
 
 -s>- 
 
 "P5- 
 
 I^Z 
 
 r^r 
 
 :cr. 
 
 1^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -(S- 
 
 m^ 
 
 zz 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 221 
 
 a^ 
 
 -Gh^ 
 
 -&■ 
 
 .Tzz^iz^: 
 
 565656 65 ^^-^ 6 5 "^ — ^ 6 5 
 V ,, / V 
 
 Not so good. 
 
 Good. 
 
 This sequence of fifths and sixths, liowever, is not easily practicable 
 in descending — 
 
 ^-r-jXJ — J j K^J ^ 1 
 
 6 5 
 
 6 5 
 
 ^^ 
 
 6 5 
 
 6 5 
 
 r^-r 
 
 The hidden fifths are here too offensive.
 
 CHAPTEK XVII. 
 
 1. When the tonic or dominant root is sounded and held on, while 
 harmonies belonging to the supertonic, dominant, tonic, and subdomi- 
 nant, are made use of in the upper parts, it is called a " pedal," or, as 
 the French say, " le point d'Orgue." Any of the above harmonies may 
 be freely used on a pedal, and many cases occur where this resource 
 enables a composer easily to introduce discords which otherwise would 
 seem crude and harsh. 
 
 The dominant pedal is generally introduced whenever it is wished 
 to excite a special craving for the tonic of the original key of a piece 
 of music, after protracted modulations; or towards the close of a fugue, 
 for the same purpose. 
 
 The tonic pedal is only used by way of protracting the final cadence, 
 introducing the plagal cadence gradually, or intensifying the concluding 
 feeling of repose in the main key.' 
 
 2. The way to use a pedal can be best explained by example, and 
 a specimen is therefore given ; of course it is supposed to come not 
 near the commencement, but towards the end of a piece in the key 
 of C. It is introduced by a few prefatory chords, and succeeded by 
 a regular conclusion in the key of the piece —
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 191 
 
 -^. ^=P: 
 
 1 h 
 
 ©>- 
 
 ?= 
 
 -4=^ 
 
 3 
 
 S: 
 
 -Ci_ 
 
 :gt: 
 
 <s»- 
 
 :^=^ 
 
 -iS»- 
 
 o: 
 
 -ts>- 
 
 -(S* — ' 
 
 m^ 
 
 ;g--4-lj| 
 
 1^ 
 
 B^ 
 
 -i^ 
 
 -<2. 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 HS>- 
 
 i2: 
 
 i 
 
 6 b: 
 
 -G> <S>- 
 
 -^ 
 
 !to' 
 
 .C± 
 
 -Gh 
 
 J^^J^jd^Jl 
 
 3e^^ 
 
 (S>- 
 
 S 
 
 ?2Z2:^, 
 
 ?2: 
 
 qg=?^ 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 :c± 
 
 ^#^rr^ 
 
 g: 
 
 s: 
 
 ^^"^ 
 
 ff 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 ■o' 
 
 2^ 
 
 "~N. ..^ 
 
 □oa 
 
 *= 
 
 fi^ 
 
 ^: 
 
 -H<S>H- 
 
 -HO(+- 
 
 -H(S>H- 
 
 ^^s>H- 
 
 4<- 
 2 
 
 744- 9^7b9-8b9 87 656 6 
 
 5 2 7657t 7. 705 434 4 
 
 5 4 3 
 
 
 "^=t^ 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 z:^::t^a^:i^z^ 
 
 G>— 
 
 i^E^^^^S 
 
 M: 
 
 rt 
 
 2^ 
 
 7rj~T 
 
 :^=R 
 
 :^ 
 
 :iM 
 
 -^ 
 
 rtS*f- 
 
 4 4f 
 
 6 
 
 44- 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^f^ 
 
 9 
 
 «7 
 
 D4 
 
 i i 
 
 
 6 b7 
 5 
 
 : J J I ^ 
 
 i 
 
 rrs 
 
 ".22: 
 
 -^ 
 
 is: 
 
 ■ c^ 
 
 &: 
 
 -•—IS*- 
 
 r 
 
 -TTJ- 
 
 221 
 
 z:i 
 
 ^7^-^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 1^2 
 
 Zli 
 
 3 
 
 -Gh 
 
 - 7 - 
 * t 3 
 
 .HS-H
 
 \\i2 
 
 TIfK I'lUNOIPLES OK irAHMONV. 
 
 Dissonances and sequences may Ije introduced freely on a pedal 
 
 bass, to vary the effect,* 
 
 Note. — Many persons prefer neglecting the pedal altogether in the thorough-bass 
 figuring, and ])lacing the figures under the next lowest part, just as they would if no 
 pedal were there. Either plan is good. If the pedal passage in this example were so 
 figured, it would appear as follows : — 
 
 &c., &c., &,c. 
 3. Sometimes, though rarely, a long note like a pedal is intro- 
 duced in an upper or inner part of the harmony. It is necessary in 
 that case to be very careful not to let it clash with dissonances which 
 resolve upon it, especially fundamental ninths, major and minor. It is 
 very rarely that an inner or upper part will bear this treatment, though 
 many instances may be quoted, from the works of some of the greatest 
 masters, where such a contrivance produces a surprisingly good effect. 
 The proper name for it is an " Inverted Pedal." 
 
 * See Examples at the end of tlie work, Nos. 3. 3, 9, 10, 11.
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 1. A HARMONY is Said to be "broken," when the intervals of which 
 it consists are not heard simultaneously, but successively, yet so as to 
 produce on the ear the same harmonic effect as though they were 
 sounded together. Thus the following chords are shewn first unbroken, 
 and then broken in various ways — 
 
 I 
 
 -e^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 E 
 
 CJ^ 
 
 s 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -o- 
 
 "C7- 
 
 W 
 
 1^21 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 E 
 
 -S>- 
 
 -(^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 ■C7" 
 
 
 m 
 
 22: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 s 
 
 -^ 
 
 C
 
 194 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 
 22: 
 
 w 
 
 m 
 
 i^aa: 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 -<S»- 
 
 When chords are broken, care must be taken, first, that every note 
 requiring any fixed progression or resolution, shall proceed correctly, and 
 be resolved according to rule ; and secondly, that no conseciitive fifths 
 or octaves arise in consequence of the new forms taken by the chords 
 wlien broken. 
 
 2. Before going further, it may be mentioned that when a whole 
 phrase or passage is played simultaneously in two or more difierent 
 octaves, such octaves are not regarded as faulty consecutions, but the 
 part so reinforced is said to be "doubled in octaves." Any number of
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 195 
 
 real parts may be so doubled in octaves, provided always that no con- 
 secutive fifths ensue — 
 
 1. 
 
 I 
 
 ■i 
 
 2q: 
 
 f 
 
 iF^=ii 
 
 ^=^M^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 11. 
 
 n 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 m^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 r 
 
 '^' 
 
 ~-^- 
 
 111. 
 
 -^ m- 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 d: 
 
 :^ 
 
 -^- 
 
 
 T^ 
 
 This last example (iii.) however must be regarded as faulty, on 
 account of the consecutive fifths between the second and third parts of 
 the harmony. At the same time, it must be admitted that Beethoven 
 has made use of just such a consecution as this in the first movement 
 
 C C 2
 
 196 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 of his "Sonata for Pianoforte and Violoncello, or Horn, in F" (Op. 17), 
 as well as in one or two other places. 
 
 Thus any of these doublings in octaves would be allowed, especially 
 in instrumental music. And still more would it be correct to double 
 the bass in octaves, which indeed is almost universally done in piano- 
 forte and organ music, and in that for a full orchestra. 
 
 3. The permission to double in octaves will account for the apparent 
 consecutives in the example of broken harmony given above, in the 
 last two bars especially. And it is just in such cases as this that the 
 student has the greatest need of care and discretion, so as to know 
 when and how to avail himself of this resource without infringing the 
 rules of counterpoint. 
 
 Above all he should remember that consecutive fifths can never be 
 excused under plea of " doubling," although consecutive octaves can. 
 He should also remember that the whole phrase, and not one or two 
 notes of it, must be doubled in octaves; otherwise the rule against 
 consecutive octaves will still be infringed upon. 
 
 4. From the consideration of broken chords the transition is easy to 
 that of what are called " passing notes." 
 
 These " passing notes " should be regarded as nothing more than 
 embellishments, and as in no respect affecting the harmony. 
 
 They form no part of the essential chords belonging to the melody, 
 and serve only as connecting links between successive notes when such 
 notes are more than a minor second apart. 
 
 For example, take the melody of the common chord ascending and 
 descending, as at i. in the following example.
 
 THE PllINCirLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 197 
 
 It is allowable to interpolate passing notes between these essential 
 notes, which do not affect the bass or harmony. These passing notes 
 are indicated by dots at ii., and are written in the usual way at iii., 
 where the essential notes are distinguished by a horizontal line over 
 them — 
 
 j=± 
 
 ^ 
 
 @^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 :q: 
 
 -<S'- 
 
 u. 
 
 ^ 
 
 F 
 
 .C^. 
 
 ^^^EE 
 
 F-^ 
 
 t=- 
 
 @± 
 
 :q: 
 
 -Or 
 
 -rr 
 
 -^~ 
 
 lU. 
 
 -m £^^m^ 
 
 ^- 
 
 s" 
 
 ZJ' 
 
 "m- 
 
 ICZ 
 
 -<s^- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -(S"- 
 
 -(S*—- ^ 
 
 -8^ 
 
 :22: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 "B^ 
 
 'IZSl 
 
 -<s- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -s^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -fS*- 
 
 ^ 
 
 It will be observed that in this example the passing notes are 
 placed on the ZM2accented parts of the measure. When this is the case 
 they are called "unaccented passing notes."
 
 198 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 5. When passing notes occur on the accented part of the measure, 
 they are called "accented passing notes." Example — 
 
 *- 
 
 s^^ 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 r^- 
 
 Ji^^ 
 
 utii^ 
 
 '-et 
 
 ^~~r 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -- — s>- 
 
 -e?*- 
 
 -^or 
 
 m^ 
 
 :q; 
 
 -s> 
 
 22: 
 
 -s>- 
 
 -^- 
 
 -& 
 
 -^ 
 
 'jr2-_ 
 
 -O- 
 
 These are more dissonant than unaccented passing notes, because 
 they are heard at the same time that the bass and the rest of the 
 harmony are struck, while the unaccented are not heard till afterwards. 
 The following example from Logier will shew this — 
 
 s 
 
 p=^q^ 
 
 (S>- 
 
 -Q_ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 UbiL 
 
 -Gh 
 
 .CI. 
 
 S>-— -f G > " f-O— }] 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -G>- 
 
 _Q- 
 
 -<Si- 
 
 g^^ 
 
 1221 
 
 ?2: 
 
 :^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 12:2: 
 
 ^ 
 
 :p: 
 
 £ 
 
 :r2~: 
 
 6 6 6 
 
 6 6 6 
 
 E^E^EEi^ 
 
 ^^;^z^r>.^^^ 
 
 _Q_ 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -«s»- 
 
 
 — ^ ^^ 
 
 .^2_ 
 
 ^ 
 
 xz: 
 
 -^- 
 
 22: 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 2:2: 
 
 6
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 199 
 
 A=;h=^r^-^-ih-'='-ir^iS^.U^^=-^ 
 
 I 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 <S»- 
 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 r^r 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 _^2_ 
 
 :^2: 
 
 122: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 ? 
 
 q: 
 
 (S>- 
 
 zz: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -o- 
 
 .22. 
 
 (> - 7 
 
 = i 
 
 ^J=d=j^ f =-J:zz^^^- n ^d^ 
 
 -<s- 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -C2_ 
 
 22: 
 
 -^- 
 
 -s>- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 J..^^:^ A.IA ^ J^l.J^ 
 
 ^. 
 
 ^ 
 
 # 
 
 :2 
 
 22: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 22: 
 
 122: 
 
 P 
 
 3:^ 
 
 It will be remarked that in these examples passing notes are intro- 
 duced not only into the melody, but also into the bass and inner 
 parts ; and that in the three last tlie inversions of the chord are 
 varied. 
 
 6. A chromatic scale may be easily produced by interposing passing 
 notes between the lohole tones of a diatonic scale ; only it is not usual 
 or desirable to insert one between the sixth and seventh degree, as the 
 effect is harsh — 1 i^ I K 
 
 G> 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 :q^ 
 
 J2: 
 
 'B^ 
 
 4:^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 6 - 
 5 - 
 
 Roots. C 
 
 G 
 
 C F 
 
 c 
 
 F 
 
 6 7 
 
 G 
 
 C
 
 200 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Eveiy one of these inserted semitones might also be harmonized as 
 essential notes, which would involve various modulations. Thus— 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 fc 
 
 g 
 
 W\ 
 
 ^ 2 ^ 
 
 4z=f 
 
 ^=^ 
 
 ;if^=f: 
 
 4t- 
 2 
 
 6 - «5 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^i 
 
 it 6 
 
 41- 
 
 -ly \ 
 
 3^ 
 
 s^ 
 
 ^i^"""!"^^ 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 «^ <i^ 
 
 :f=* 
 
 44- 
 2 
 
 i 6 
 
 ^<h 
 
 Note. — When the parts proceed by contrary motion, whole chords may be introduced as 
 "passing chords," intervening between fimdamental discords and their resolutions; thus — 
 
 M^^^^^^^kE3E^ 
 
 Z± 
 
 ■^- 
 
 \ <S>- 
 
 ^KHJL 
 
 r^^^^^, 
 
 F 
 
 1^ 
 
 -^' 
 
 ? -' % ^ 9 I e IT i_i § 
 
 ria 
 
 r^ ' 
 
 -<& 
 
 -&- 
 
 7 
 
 t 5 
 
 i&i 
 
 Passing chords. 
 
 7. When no passing notes can be introduced, use is made of what 
 are called ^Wtiixiliory votpn."
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 2U1 
 
 They may be written either above or below the melody, and may 
 be either accented or unaccented. 
 
 If helovj the melody, they should be only half a tone below. 
 
 If above the melody, they may be either a half or a whole tone 
 above, as the case requires. 
 
 Simple Melody. 
 
 s 
 
 w=^^ 
 
 -0- 
 
 d S d -^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^2: 
 
 ? 
 
 ■# — m- 
 
 ES? 
 
 6 6 ^666 
 
 Auxiliary Notes added. 
 
 T^ 
 
 ^^=m 
 
 6 6 
 
 4 
 
 4 6 G 6 
 
 2 i i 
 
 3 
 
 zz 
 
 ^ 
 
 S 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 sf 
 
 fefe 
 
 ^ f 
 
 :c2: 
 
 ^ 
 
 5=^ 
 
 Simple Bass. 
 Dd
 
 202 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 -<s- 
 
 ^ 
 
 22: 
 
 -C3- 
 
 ^^^^ 
 
 Auxiliary Notes in the Bass. 
 
 8. When the notes of a melody move by a skijD, i.e. by intervals 
 greater than a third, passing notes may skip also to a semitone below 
 an ascending mterval — 
 
 -^ g^ P— 
 
 or to a semitone or whole tone above a descending interval — 
 
 ^m 
 
 § 
 
 ^ 
 
 or 
 
 i 
 
 i=t± 
 
 1(S>- 
 
 Auxiliary notes, under similar circumstances, skip beyond the interval 
 to return — 
 
 -^ — 1 
 
 
 p — 
 
 1 — 
 
 ^— I 
 
 II 
 
 X 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ■^^ 1 
 
 ff\^ * 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 
 
 vU 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 11 
 
 eJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 9. Chromatic passing notes and auxiliary notes, if accented, exercise 
 a very great influence on the harmony ; so great, indeed, that it is 
 often difficult to determine whether they should be treated as such, 
 or as real and essential notes —
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 203 
 
 SE^^lE^ 
 
 iz=i 
 
 -G^ 
 
 'jr:il 
 
 'W=^ 
 
 J=i 
 
 -<SH 
 
 -z± 
 
 -Gi 
 
 -e»- 
 
 :«^- 
 
 :<S>- 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 "C?" 
 
 In this example the AJf in the second bar is treated here as a 
 chromatic passing note leading from AG to B. But it is more than 
 doubtful whether this is not wrong (although it is the usual way of 
 writing it), for the other notes of the chord indicate a change of root, 
 and if the note be wiitten B'? instead of AJf, it at once shews itself 
 as part of the chord of the minor ninth on root A, superposed on the 
 tonic pedal G, of which A is the su]3ertonic. On the whole it appears 
 therefore preferable to consider this note as an essential one, and to 
 write it B flat, in spite of custom. 
 
 In the third bar, on the other hand, the F sharp must be treated 
 as an auxiliary note, as it forms no essential part of the harmony of 
 the root A, from which root the chord is evidently derived. 
 
 Note. — Accented auxiliary notes are usually called '^ appnggiaturas,'' as they are sup- 
 posed to be a kind of buttress or leaning support to the note before which they are 
 placed. 
 
 10. This last example, in its third bar, introduces another rather 
 doubtful case — 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^' 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 -s^ 
 
 -G^ 
 
 D d 2 

 
 204 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 For the treble part might be Avritten, with good effect, thus — 
 
 ■± 
 
 A^. 
 
 ^ 
 
 <^- 
 
 -G>- 
 
 :q: 
 
 @5 
 
 1t^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 o- 
 
 in whicli case tlie question arises, " What is the derivation of the 
 F sharp?" 
 
 It cannot be a passing or auxiliary note, as it moves to D by 
 a skip of a major third. 
 
 May it not be an instance of a double-root chord on the roots D 
 and A? 
 
 If so, it would be a sort of anticipation of the succeeding chord 
 of D, and would be an analogous case to that remarkable passage in 
 the quartett " When the ear heard her " in Handel's Funeral Anthem — 
 
 ^^^, 
 
 
 s;s 
 
 6 7 
 
 4 5 
 
 where the treble goes up to G on the bass Ab, and where the chord 
 is an imperfect " chord of the added sixth " (as it is erroneously called),
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 205 
 
 which we have proved to be derived from the dominant and sub- 
 
 dominant roots, which here would be -nu- This explanation is not 
 
 altogether conclusive, however, as the major ninth of the F ougJit to 
 be resolved, of course, by descending a whole tone ; or, if suspended, 
 it ought to be suspended in the same part and in the same octave, 
 neither of which conditions is observed in the present case. 
 
 It is probably an isolated example of licence, peculiar to Handel. 
 
 11. In the works of old Church writers of the English school, 
 
 especially Purcell, Blow, and Croft, it is no uncommon thing to meet 
 
 with a combination of the minor sixth with the major third, which is 
 treated as a fundamental discord — 
 
 If it is, in truth, a fundamental discord, it can be no other than 
 a fundamental minor thirteenth, and of course must be resolved into 
 the key of F. 
 
 The thirteenth division in the harmonic series certainly does give 
 a sound which approximates more or less closely to this interval, at 
 least it is not more different from it than the true harmonic funda- 
 mental minor seventh is from the tempered minor seventh which we 
 are obliged to use in music ; only, whereas the natural minor seventh 
 is too jiat, the natural minor thirteenth is too sharp. 
 
 But we may perhaps safely regard the above chord as a funda- 
 mental chord of the minor thirteenth, and use it, if need be, with the 
 rest of the harmonic series ; thus —
 
 206 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 \^^^^^?^ 
 
 It produces a peculiarly plaintive and pathetic effect when judiciously- 
 introduced. But the student should not be too lavish of such extreme 
 discords. 
 
 Very often it has more the appearance of an auxiliary note or 
 appoggiatura ; for instance — 
 
 ^ 
 
 :«!2: 
 
 z±^ 
 
 &-= — • 
 
 22^2: 
 
 22: 
 
 icz: 
 
 ^m-- 
 
 3g 
 
 -^G- 
 
 — (S>- 
 
 ,^ 
 
 22: 
 
 -O- 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 nzn 
 
 :r± 
 
 ir2L 
 
 And at other times it may be looked upon as an ordinary suspension. 
 Of course this can only be when it is regularly prepared in the pre- 
 ceding chord. 
 
 There is some difficulty in considering the minor thirteenth as an 
 available portion of the harmonic series of the dominant root, since we 
 have rejected the fundamental eleventh. 
 
 But in the first place the harmonic sound which represents the 
 latter interval is nearer to an augmented than to a perfect eleventh, 
 whereas the harmonic No. 13 is fairly near to the minor thirteenth.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 207 
 
 And in the next place there are really no cases in which the sup- 
 posed fundamental eleventh may not be equally well regarded either 
 as an inner (or upper) tonic pedal, or as a suspension, or as the minor 
 seventh of the supertonic, as has been already shewn. 
 
 It appears therefore unnecessary and unphilosophical to have re- 
 course to the "augmented foiu-th in the third octave" in the harmonic 
 series, that sound being very much out of tune, more so indeed than any 
 other natural harmonic sound in the first four octaves firom the root. 
 
 12. Under some circumstances it admits of a doubt whether the 
 chord of the fundamental minor thirteenth may not be more correctly 
 written as an augmented fifth — 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 for (as has been shewn above, Chapter XI, section 2) nature does give 
 us that interval in perfect tune. 
 
 And indeed if we invert the minor thirteenth, so as to put it in 
 the bass, it does actually produce a chord of the augmented fifth "'" — 
 
 :^ 
 
 or 
 
 Roots. E 
 
 A 
 
 13. The major thirteenth is correct and in tune as found in the 
 series of natiu-al harmonic sounds. It is represented by the cube of 
 3, or 27. For 3 is the fifth ; 3 x 3 = 9 is the ninth or supertonic ; 
 3 X 3 X 3 = 27 is a fifth again above that, i.e. the major thirteenth. 
 
 * See Short Examples at the end of this book. No, 13.
 
 208 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Hence are probably derived such cliords as — 
 
 'r^- 
 
 ^=^- 
 
 Z3: 
 
 -^rx 
 
 ic^^ 
 
 cz 
 
 Z2CZ 
 
 -Gh 
 
 ^: 
 
 3 
 
 z± 
 
 3 
 
 :^2 
 
 (S»- 
 
 C2: 
 
 which indeed cannot well be explained in any other consistent way. 
 
 14. The province of the science of harmony does not extend further 
 than those various points which have been explained in this treatise. 
 
 If the student wishes to become a composer, he must add to these 
 a diligent study of counterpoint, fugue, form, and instrumentation. 
 
 Having thus counselled him, we will now leave him to apply what 
 
 has here been taught, both by analyzing the works of great masters, 
 
 and by harmonizing melodies according to the rules given in this 
 work.
 
 EXERCISES 
 
 ON THE PRECEDING CHAPTERS. 
 
 No. 1. — Exercise on the Chord of the Dominant Seventh, 
 
 (Chapter II, 7, 8.) . 
 Fill in the omitted notes in the incomplete chords. 
 
 ZZ!2: 
 
 -«s>- 
 
 :z2: 
 
 i 
 
 * C J' 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 - r^ b 
 
 E 
 
 ^ 
 
 -nr 
 
 TU- 
 
 fe 
 
 -S»- 
 
 Z2_ 
 
 J— rj 
 
 ,CJ - 
 
 "< : ^ q: 
 
 :z2: 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 zz: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -s»- 
 
 4W 
 
 -s>- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 :z2: 
 
 :if^ 
 
 =S= 
 
 ^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 
 "cr 
 
 -s>- 
 
 -o- 
 
 icz: 
 
 M: 
 
 E e
 
 210 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 No. 2. — Exercise on the Chord of the Added Ninth. 
 
 (Chapter II, 9.) 
 
 Fill in the omitted notes in the incomplete chords. 
 
 -C^_ 
 
 g^fjE 
 
 :q: 
 
 1^ 
 
 -<s» — 
 
 E 
 
 -^&- 
 
 -s>- 
 
 J2Q. 
 
 -<5>- 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 rf 
 
 ZZ 
 
 :r j r w> _ 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 t:?- 
 
 -(S»- 
 
 i 
 
 i: 
 
 :z2: 
 
 -H<S>H- 
 
 ^a^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -«s>- 
 
 -o- 
 
 rj < ^- 
 
 -<s- 
 
 1W 
 
 No. 3. — Exercise on the same. 
 
 Take the two preceding exercises and transpose them into all the 
 major keys.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 211 
 
 No. 4. — Exercise on the Inversions of the Common Chord and their 
 
 Thorough Bass figuring. 
 
 (Cliapter III, 2, 3.) 
 Fill in the omitted notes according to the figuring. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 2i 
 
 3 
 
 :^ — ^ — ^ 
 
 :^= 
 
 E^=g— g 
 
 zi 
 
 ^ 
 
 "O 
 
 "Cr 
 
 ^1 
 
 g^E^ 
 
 T^ 
 
 o- 
 
 P2: 
 
 i^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 i^ 
 
 -<s? 
 
 la 
 
 S' Gi 
 
 6 5 
 
 4 3 
 
 6 6 6 6 
 
 ^^ 
 
 :z2 
 
 -«^ 
 
 ^ ^j ^ 
 
 i^ 
 
 q: 
 
 i^i: 
 
 P2=fe=i:^ 
 
 SEfe^E^ 
 
 ^ -Ts. r-- ^ 
 
 1^2: 
 
 ^2: 
 
 zd: 
 
 iq: 
 
 ^ ^ J 
 
 -&■ 
 
 z± 
 
 j:^ 
 
 "cr 
 
 » 6 
 
 be 
 
 '^^- 
 
 i^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -& 
 
 ^- 
 
 T^ 
 
 T^ 
 
 ^- 
 
 -& 
 
 m 
 
 t^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 4 
 
 -T^ I r^ 
 
 -^- 
 
 D 6 t 
 
 :^ 
 
 q: 
 
 -r± 
 
 <s>- 
 
 :^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 E e 2
 
 212 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 No. 5. — Exercise on the Chord of the Dominant Seventh mid its 
 Inversions, to he filled in like the last. 
 
 (Chapter III, 3—6.) 
 
 f^ d 
 
 -S ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 t^ 
 
 ^^=t^ 
 
 r=^ 
 
 g=?F=F 
 
 i 
 
 21 
 
 :P2: 
 
 J^ 
 
 :r± 
 
 tt 
 
 5 6 6 
 
 f 
 
 l?P3=3^= 
 
 ~S — T 
 
 1 1 
 
 r-r:r-^^ 
 
 -^ ^ 
 
 n — • 
 
 i(^ * r 
 
 
 __ • 
 
 
 
 [ 
 
 
 y> ) \ 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 (©f# \ — r 
 
 ^=^ 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 — r~'¥~\ 
 
 ^ "^ - 
 
 tLLi_J_J_ 
 
 — S* — 
 
 
 \ ^_! 
 
 "^^^—^ 
 
 r> 
 
 — 1 i — 
 
 07 
 
 kM^: — r 
 
 — ^ — 
 
 — ^* ■» — 
 
 \— 
 
 
 ^f f" 
 
 — m — 
 
 -^ — S t- 
 
 J- ' ^ 
 
 — & — 
 
 =3t: 
 
 — «sJ — 
 
 •J 
 
 T^r^g — ^ 
 
 ^~if^ — r~" 
 
 
 1 1 1 ! 
 
 
 %^ 
 
 j# 
 
 ^ — U— 
 
 -J-J-^ 
 
 d ' 
 
 • 
 
 1 ^ ! U 
 
 No. 6. — Exercise 07i the same. 
 Transpose the last exercise into all the major keys.
 
 THE rniNCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 213 
 
 No. 7. — Exercise on the Inversions of the Chord of the Added Ninth. 
 
 (Chapter III, 9—15.) 
 
 i 
 
 4^ 
 
 rs>- 
 
 m 
 
 s 
 
 1^=1^ 
 
 1^- 
 
 -^- 
 
 -&^ 
 
 :r± 
 
 :r2 
 
 ^t^ES 
 
 3 
 
 :^=^ 
 
 ^s>- 
 
 nipz 
 
 ir:r 
 
 -<s^ 
 
 _gj r :;^ 
 
 i^i 
 
 f^- 
 
 g^ 
 
 P r> - 
 
 hS* 
 
 -(S*^ 
 
 22: 
 
 fS>- 
 
 -s>- 
 
 <s>- 
 
 :^: 
 
 Z2 
 
 1^2 
 
 ^ r:^ 
 
 5 6 6 
 
 3 4)- 
 3 
 
 :^^=R 
 
 1^2L 
 
 (S>- 
 
 gzip j 
 
 e 
 
 q: 
 
 z:^: 
 
 ^ 
 
 n d r ^ 
 
 -^^ — h 
 
 :^ 
 
 c^ 
 
 32 
 
 a 
 
 b5 
 
 -b— f^- 
 
 e 
 
 ^EE^3E^ 
 
 -lS>- 
 
 C6 
 
 X2: 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 inz 
 
 (S>- 
 
 :^ 
 
 -^- ^ ^ 
 
 b7 !57 
 
 r^ g p : 
 
 1, ^^ 
 
 4 R 7 
 
 -<S^
 
 211 
 
 THE riUNCirLE.S OF HAUMONY. 
 
 No. 8. — Exercise on the Ascending Major Scale. 
 (Chapter IV, 4.) 
 
 :M 
 
 ^^^ 
 ^^=^=?^ 
 
 i*^ 
 
 :^=^ 
 
 iS^zfe 
 
 &? 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^-^ 
 
 6 6 6 6 
 
 C5 
 
 iA 
 
 P 
 
 1^- 
 
 ^=* 
 
 ^^i: 
 
 ^=^ 
 
 ^— ^ 
 
 ^=^r 
 
 ^&^E^ 
 
 :p::^:^ 
 
 ^^3^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 6 6 6 6 
 
 4 6 
 
 No. 9. — Exercise on the Descending Major Scale. 
 (Chapter IV, 5, 6.) 
 
 m> 
 
 is 
 
 FEE^ 
 
 -^—0- 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 3^ 
 
 6 6 ^ fi :^- 
 
 6 6
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY 
 
 215 
 
 rr—w 
 
 a 
 
 ? 
 
 -q: 
 
 ±izjL 
 
 :^=^ 
 
 « ^r:i 
 
 I 
 
 <^- 
 
 <«=i^ 
 
 fefc 
 
 g^^ 
 
 ?:^ 
 
 
 I' f 
 
 6 (J 5 
 4 3 
 
 No. 10. — Exercise on the Ascendmg Minor Scale. 
 
 (Chapter V, 6.) 
 
 i 
 
 53 
 
 :« 
 
 ^ 
 
 s; 
 
 =ip=i^ 
 
 -1 
 
 s--*— * 
 
 ^E5 
 
 ^ 
 
 :^=qc 
 
 ^S3EfS 
 
 « t 
 
 fi (j 
 
 6 6 6 
 
 i 
 
 -N 
 
 i^- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -s>- 
 
 E^3 
 
 ^ — #■ 
 
 6 e 
 
 t^- 
 
 3 
 
 "C?' 
 
 'O' 
 
 ^^
 
 216 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 No. 11. — Exercise on the Chord of the Minor Ninth and its Inversions. 
 
 (Chapter VI, 1 — 8.) 
 
 C2: 
 
 w- 
 
 T2L 
 
 r^L 
 
 ^ r ^- 
 
 v:2: 
 
 -^h-^ 
 
 -Gl- 
 
 (S ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 T2L 
 
 ^: 
 
 22: 
 
 fe 
 
 22 
 
 hS*- 
 
 -O-!- 
 
 -1^ 
 
 ?2: 
 
 fS>- 
 
 22: 
 
 i^: 
 
 e 
 
 -jit. 
 
 -Gi- 
 
 S 
 
 :r2~: 
 
 fS>- 
 
 @5 
 
 4:2: 
 
 (S>- 
 
 ?2: 
 
 1^- 
 
 :^: 
 
 -si^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 f 
 
 
 :p2=zi^ 
 
 -iS>- 
 
 22: 
 
 -i(S»- 
 
 nfe 
 
 ?2: 
 
 -iSt- 
 
 -tt:?-' 
 
 IQ 
 
 i^ 
 
 C2_ 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 22: 
 
 «P= 
 
 Q . 
 
 g5 
 
 Q ^ 
 
 :?!2: 
 
 p? 
 
 s 
 
 d7 
 
 6 
 
 T^~~~^ 
 
 :r2 
 
 2:i=^ 
 
 22 
 
 -^ 
 
 -^ rj- 
 
 -s>- 
 
 gTT~T"^=p 
 
 :q: 
 
 ^ — ^ 
 
 r^ 
 
 I 
 
 X2: 
 
 -f5 
 
 D5 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 'I
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 217 
 
 -& r ^ G- 
 
 -^ 
 
 2± 
 
 22 
 
 'G* <5^ Gf- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 i=p p ^ 
 
 -JiS'- 
 
 221 
 
 :i^ 
 
 :fe± 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 b7 
 
 5 
 
 n7 
 
 C5 
 
 d5 
 
 C7 
 C5 
 
 I 
 
 XT 
 
 g^ C^ 
 
 :1f^ 
 
 iq; 
 
 -^ 
 
 g 
 
 J^ 
 
 e* Gt Gh 
 
 -& 
 
 W- 
 
 
 s 
 
 ff rJ rJ — rJ ^- 
 
 b7 d6 
 
 5 4 
 
 6 P7 
 
 4 tl5 
 
 6 6 
 
 igr^ ? r^— ^- 
 
 -f^ fS> .<s>- 
 
 -^ r^ io — &p- 
 
 br^ . 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 -1^ «s> <s- 
 
 «5 
 
 -tf(^ r-^ 
 
 D7 
 D5 
 
 ^.^- 
 
 b5 
 
 ip2=:f2i 
 
 "vT 
 
 b5 
 D 
 
 ^^2: 
 
 g g p p p- 
 
 -C2- 
 
 i^ 
 
 T21 
 
 -&- 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 :g^: 
 
 ^P=^P==^ 
 
 :q: 
 
 ^s*- 
 
 .6 
 
 &4 
 
 3 
 
 :g^ 
 
 B7 
 
 -S'- 
 
 22: 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 Ff 
 
 ~t:7 
 Do 

 
 218 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 T^ 
 
 T^- 
 
 e 
 
 "r^ &- 
 
 -i^>- 
 
 -«5t- 
 
 i^- 
 
 -Gt- 
 
 -j:2L 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 ^^- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 &i 
 
 a? 
 
 C5 
 
 fii 
 
 D5 
 
 g ^^ P ^- 
 
 :P2: 
 
 P 
 
 z:^: 
 
 -(S- 
 
 i^z 
 
 -o- 
 
 ^ 
 
 :S=2: 
 
 -S»- 
 
 22: 
 
 :g 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 1221 
 
 ,6 D7 
 
 Go — 
 
 No. 12. — Exercise on the Descending Minor Scale. 
 
 (Chapter VII, 1, 2.) 
 
 ^ p I rj P p 
 
 i^ 
 
 3 
 
 i^ 
 
 T2L 
 
 ■&- 
 
 -(S»- 
 
 ?2iz: 
 
 ^ 
 
 -P-^- 
 
 &- 
 
 ^ 
 
 r-^ Q 
 
 ^ 
 
 -G>- 
 
 -1^ 
 
 6 
 
 6 ,6 
 
 b5
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 219 
 
 i 
 
 ^^- 
 
 hc^j^ 
 
 ~f^—r 
 
 -Gf- 
 
 'fSh-if, 
 
 ;»p=^^ 
 
 -(S> 
 
 =5^- 
 
 -1^- 
 
 m 
 
 ^=X^- 
 
 1^I± 
 
 1 ^- 
 
 ^= ^ 
 
 6 
 
 b 
 
 6 « 
 
 ■c^f-J?:;/— ^- 
 
 b D6 
 
 qi=q==r- 
 
 ■^ 
 
 -^ — ^^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 1^21 
 
 -s^ 
 
 22: 
 
 P-p-tf^ 
 
 -iS* 
 
 ^i=^: 
 
 ^^^: 
 
 (S>- 
 
 ' ^ P f^T- g: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 '^—rzr- 
 
 '^ ^ ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 b7 
 
 B5 
 
 Q » 
 
 i ^ b^ 
 
 b 
 
 :g> ^ t^ 
 
 -iS"- 
 
 3=^ 
 
 :?^ 
 
 iq: 
 
 -&- 
 
 -zJ- 
 
 ~CJ 
 
 i^ 
 
 _C2_ 
 
 .Q- 
 
 P2=^=^ 
 
 |S^ 
 
 # 
 
 1^21 
 
 5 
 
 (S>- 
 
 ^:^i4^±^^ 
 
 22 
 
 » 6 
 
 6 t 
 
 a P5 7 
 
 6 )t 
 
 :^z:z 
 
 -^± 
 
 :^=P: 
 
 e 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -fS? 
 
 -^ 
 
 "C?" 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^- 
 
 2i 
 
 -G>- 
 
 -^± 
 
 ^=^^-^-- 
 
 -& 
 
 iq: 
 
 5 6 
 
 i 
 
 b 
 
 6 6 
 
 b5 
 
 4^ 
 2 
 
 ^ I 
 
 \ t 
 
 F f 2
 
 220 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 i 
 
 No. 13. — Exercise on Dissonances by Suspension. 
 (Chapter VIII, 3—7.) 
 
 rzi 
 
 Sfi 
 
 ifS- 
 
 321 
 
 O- 
 
 :^ 
 
 i^z: 
 
 -r2L 
 
 fS>- 
 
 -CZ. 
 
 *y 
 
 ^TZTTZgZi: 
 
 T^ 
 
 -^- 
 
 s 
 
 z:± 
 
 :c2: 
 
 :q: 
 
 -Si' 
 
 Z2 
 
 « t 3 ^ ^ t 3 ' 
 
 
 :?2= 
 
 ^ 3 ^ M 3 
 
 -»4^ <S>- 
 
 22: 
 
 JUL 
 
 -(SI- 
 
 f^^^a 
 
 -fs- 
 
 
 z^: 
 
 -p— P— r± 
 
 -is>- 
 
 2:2: 
 
 -(S»- 
 
 -^^-^ 
 
 ^:=1 
 
 2bir 
 
 ^" ^ <^ cJ ; vd~f^ 
 
 6 4 
 
 -5 - 5 6 9 69865 
 
 4 3 4 5 M - 
 
 I^ 
 
 -l^- 
 
 :^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 .Q- 
 
 ^^- 
 
 X2: 
 
 1^2: 
 
 zz 
 
 ^tat 
 
 :^ 
 
 i^ 
 
 -&^ 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -is»- 
 
 frt 
 
 1^21 
 
 -iS*- 
 
 T^ 
 
 1% % %\ ^% 
 
 5 Go ce 6 
 
 3 
 
 1^:2: 
 
 6 (i 6 
 
 ^-^ 
 
 -s»- 
 
 7 6 5
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 221 
 
 No. 14. — Exercise on Retardations. 
 (Chapter IX, 1—4.) 
 
 
 -G^ 
 
 :-t=* 
 
 :<^ ^ 
 
 . g * =: 
 
 «S^^^^ 
 
 i3 
 
 ^^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 ^Ei 
 
 z:± 
 
 3 
 
 ^ 
 
 5 6 7 8 
 
 I »'S 
 
 M 
 
 :^^=f^ 
 
 :^i=^ 
 
 ?:^ 
 
 & — " 
 
 @^ 
 
 t=- 
 
 ?n=^=f: 
 
 *=#= 
 
 :^: 
 
 ^21 
 
 :fe 
 
 I % I 
 
 i 
 
 4^ 6 
 2 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^51 
 
 i^^^ 
 
 " Q eJ- 
 
 ^ — rj 
 
 P^ 
 
 SZ 
 
 6 7 6 7 8 
 
 -f5h- 
 
 rj -r^ 
 
 Z3:
 
 222 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 No. 15. — Exercise on the same. 
 
 S^^ 
 
 5^fe 
 
 t3tX3 
 
 7 G 6 7 6 
 
 y - 
 
 76 6 56 56 76 
 
 ^^ 
 
 6 7 6 6 5 - 
 4 5 4 3 
 
 ^E^^ 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3^ 
 
 ^— ^ 
 
 56 7 6 6 41- 56 76 7 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 7 « ^ 
 
 65-6 5 - 78 
 
 4 3 4 3 5- 
 
 4 3 
 
 No. 16. — Exercises on the Harmonization of Melodies. 
 
 (Chapter X, 4.) 
 
 1. 
 
 *t 
 
 
 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 
 .^ 
 
 
 
 y ^ *\ 
 
 m ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 — <i. 
 
 .^ 1^ 1 1 
 
 A '* A * 
 
 W \ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■^ 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 f(\\ V - * 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 i * " 1 
 
 V/ 4- • I 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 ' 1 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 =3F 
 
 H* ^ 
 
 -^ ^ - 
 
 :4: 
 
 S 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 ^^ee£ 
 
 I ^1 
 
 :ifat 
 
 -«s^-
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 223 
 
 ^^^^ 
 
 r p 
 
 i> J r 
 
 q^=p: 
 
 ^:^ -ni^r_r 
 
 ^ -9- '-^ '^ -^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ]^ 
 
 i^ 
 
 u. 
 
 E 
 
 s 
 
 -^i:^ 
 
 3 
 
 X2: 
 
 — \ \ — ^ rd — ^ ^ 
 
 fe^-j^ 
 
 -<s- 
 
 22: 
 
 5^ 
 
 -tS^ 
 
 ^^ j=f= 
 
 i^ 
 
 W 
 
 iV— ^— ^ 
 
 22_ 
 
 P g fS^-r& f^ 
 
 1^2: 
 
 ^^ig 
 
 tip 
 
 ?2=^ 
 
 ^^^- 
 
 2± 
 
 "or 
 
 fe
 
 224 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 111. 
 
 ^4?=1=1^ 
 
 ^ r ^ ^ 
 
 g 
 
 S^i3 
 
 :^=e=^=^r+^^ 
 
 -^ J > J B<J ^^ 
 
 7^ 
 
 T^-p — ^ 1 h ^ ^ ^ ^ > r- T !? r • 
 
 ^)_2 ^'__^ — #L. ^ — .^ W . ^ k- ?- — I 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^Ee 
 
 J ^ 
 
 Z2 
 
 No. 17. — Exercise on the Cliord of the Augmented Sixth. 
 
 (Chapter XI, 7, 8.) 
 
 .^L^ P~rP rj I ^ ~ r ^ n ~^^ x 
 
 = RP~^ J ^- J: 
 
 -o- 
 
 s»- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 v::^-^ 
 
 i^ 
 
 ^^tr]--^ 
 
 S^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 e 
 
 :^ 
 
 -(^ 
 
 -(S»- 
 
 221 
 
 22 
 
 -&^ 
 
 Lir^ 
 
 -e^ 
 
 I 6 
 
 t ? 
 
 6 7 
 
 ^666 J
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 225 
 
 -if— ^^, — 
 
 «s>- 
 
 ^2Z issz: 
 
 lO- 
 
 -<s/ 
 
 <s>- 
 
 ^ 
 
 fcj:^ 
 
 (S»- 
 
 2:± 
 
 t::;^ 
 
 Z2 
 
 -(S/- 
 
 "?:3" 
 
 ^=^: 
 
 :ftc^: 
 
 11? 
 
 ^^- 
 
 f 
 
 «5 6 
 
 122 
 
 -S^ 
 
 -iS> 
 
 ^2: 
 
 -(S> — 
 
 i 6 
 
 b 
 
 § 7 
 4 5 
 
 No. 18. — Exercise on the same ivith Enharmonic Changes and Inverdons. 
 
 (Chai^ter XI, 9, 10.) 
 
 Z2: 
 
 ¥^ 
 
 m^^. 
 
 ^^- 
 
 nf2±^ 
 
 22 
 
 3 
 
 is^ 
 
 D6 D7 6 6 - 7 6 ^B t 6 6 
 
 4»- #5 _ 4t- - b5 * 4)- 6 
 
 :b q b 2 (, 5 
 
 3 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -o- 
 
 6 5 
 
 4 « 
 
 P==P=^ 
 
 be 6 
 
 ^•#^=q: 
 
 22: 
 
 :^ 
 
 tS'- 
 
 iS>- 
 
 -<s- 
 
 HS- 
 
 b 2 
 
 '2 I 
 4 3 
 
 9 8 
 bt 3 
 
 b7 
 Q5 
 bb 
 
 bS 
 
 b7 
 
 IS 
 
 p^ 
 
 *^ 
 
 -<s^ 
 
 ^ b c ^ ,. rJ 
 
 is:± 
 
 CJ 
 
 -o- 
 
 b6 
 4 
 
 "? 9 8 5 - 
 
 H 4 3 
 
 D 
 
 b7 
 
 b5 
 
 9 8 
 
 @S^ 
 
 Sg 
 
 ^2: 
 
 M 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 1^2: 
 
 i^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -^ 
 
 f- tt I 
 
 b7 
 b5 
 
 b5 
 
 be 
 
 D4 
 
 b7 e 
 CI5 5 
 
 9 8 
 
 7 6 
 4 - 
 
 t? 
 
 og
 
 22G 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 No. 19.— Exercise on the Chord of the Minor Seventh and Minor 
 
 Third and its Inversions. 
 
 (Chapter XII, 3.) 
 
 
 i^=r 
 
 T^~ 
 
 221 
 
 6 7 6 5 1 5 i 
 
 4 3 
 
 No. Id.— Exercise on Cadences of all hinds. 
 
 (Chapter XIII, 2—7.) 
 
 1^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 Z2 
 
 2-21 
 
 O- 
 
 Z2:- 
 
 ^ 
 
 zt^ 
 
 ^21 
 
 r^- 
 
 r:? 
 
 :^ 
 
 :P2=^ 
 
 :z2: 
 
 B6 6 6 6 5 
 
 9 § ^ 2 
 
 7 6 4 6 
 
 D6 
 
 b5 
 
 ^ 
 
 2i: 
 
 ^=?=i 
 
 hS^ 
 
 1^2 
 
 -«S>— 
 
 Z2: 
 
 fS>- 
 
 -?':M^- 
 
 221 
 
 3^ 
 
 fS>- 
 
 q: 
 
 6 6 
 
 ^iS 
 
 m 
 
 f 1-8 
 
 6 6 7 r: _ 
 
 5 jj t D 
 
 4*- 6 P6 
 2 4 
 
 ae 6 
 
 b5 
 
 06 
 b5 
 
 M 
 
 _rJ g^ 
 
 z± 
 
 ?2: 
 
 --^- 
 
 ■T± 
 
 m 
 
 6 D6 
 
 n 

 
 THE rUINCIPLER OF HARMONY. 
 
 227 
 
 No. 21. — Exercise on the same. 
 (Chapter XIV, 1.) 
 
 fS»- 
 
 :c2: 
 
 
 '-T^- 
 
 5S 
 
 Z2 
 
 - ?rr 
 
 til 
 
 6 7 
 
 IZZC2 
 
 fS>- 
 
 :ip 
 
 4^ — t^- 
 
 -^-- 
 
 rj rJ 
 
 -^ — 
 
 Z2. 
 
 :^J 
 
 ^^ 
 
 6 7 
 
 4J- 
 2 
 
 7 B 
 
 n 
 
 T^- 
 
 m 
 
 :^ 
 
 i^^zfet 
 
 J2Z 
 
 12^ 
 
 -<s'^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 -& 
 
 b7 
 
 b 6 b 
 
 S 
 
 ip2: 
 
 i==: 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 rzjr-r_ 
 
 (S>- 
 
 :i^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 fS>- 
 
 221 
 
 -eS*- 
 
 b7 
 
 (55 
 
 n 
 
 1 
 
 b7 
 
 b7 7 6 
 
 m^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 z:?:^: 
 
 ■is>- 
 
 ^: 
 
 ^2: 
 
 :?:± 
 
 <^J rJ 
 
 ^ 
 
 b7 
 b5 
 
 6 7 
 
 /Ov 
 
 :^ 
 
 I^ZJt^ 
 
 i?:^: 
 
 :^=^ 
 
 ^s>- 
 
 }G^- 
 
 Tzti?dz 
 
 D6 
 
 ^ i 
 
 6 
 
 [t^- 
 
 -C'- 
 
 -^: 
 
 1^1 
 
 •^-^ 6 
 
 :?:± 
 
 "O" 
 
 Gg2
 
 228 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 No. 22. — Exercise on Irregular and Deceptive Cadences. 
 (Chapter XV, 2—4.) 
 
 ^^^. 
 
 T- 
 
 -G>- 
 
 -&■ 
 
 22 
 
 im 
 
 -G*- 
 
 j?g:±= -^ fl< - y -S - 
 
 7 6 6 5- 
 
 4 » - 
 
 -7 
 #5 
 
 » 
 
 T2: 
 
 ^i 
 
 :^2z=:tf?^ 
 
 -«s- 
 
 q: 
 
 ^21 
 
 2i 
 
 SE^ 
 
 :i^ 
 
 -c^- 
 -« 
 
 7 6 D7 6 5 
 
 5 4 J 
 
 D5 6 6 
 
 ^^^^ 
 
 T^ 
 
 V^-=^^^=^ 
 
 -^-- 
 
 
 6 6 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 7 4 3- 
 
 5 
 
 ^===^-^r ^^^ 
 
 -^ f^-n 
 
 m 
 
 :a: 
 
 :z3: 
 
 -<s^ 
 
 22 
 
 6 6 D 
 
 5 5 
 
 4 1( 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^^^e 
 
 221 
 
 :5^2=r^ 
 
 -o- 
 
 -^ flg> 
 
 221 
 
 6 6 
 
 Q5 
 
 7 6 
 
 D7 
 
 D7 
 5 
 
 5 6 
 
 7=^ 
 
 m^B 
 
 -o- 
 
 t=^ 
 
 hS^ 
 
 2ZZ=^ 
 
 e 
 
 22: 
 
 -.s-- 
 
 l^- 
 
 6 5 - 44^ 
 
 4 5 - 3 
 
 7 ~6 ^^ 5 - 
 
 4 7 4 « 
 
 6
 
 THE nilNCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 229 
 
 No. 23. — Exercise on Modified Basses. 
 
 (Chapter XV, 5—13.) 
 
 (S(h"^r] r 
 
 ^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 ^21 
 
 -f^-^ 
 
 ^- 
 
 :^ 
 
 22 
 
 "C7 
 
 -S^ 
 
 22 
 
 ^2=^ 
 
 _Q. 
 
 iS>- ^ 
 
 #2=^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ICZ 
 
 q: 
 
 Q5 
 
 6 7 7 
 
 li 
 
 No. 24. — Exercise on Sequences. 
 (Chapter XVI, 2—6.) 
 
 B 
 
 'JL ^ f 
 
 f^ ^ ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 6 6 
 
 f- 
 
 D6 
 
 ^r ^ M f — f \ f -v-^—f- 
 
 -T^-n — r^—f- 
 
 v.=L4: •_! — * \ J J 1_ 
 
 -t— -1- — J ^ 
 
 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 
 
 7 6 
 
 :^=i 
 
 i^ 
 
 i^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ti 
 
 -^ ^ 
 
 =^=r=P^ 
 
 =t: 
 
 6 6 6 6 6 
 
 6 7 6 7 6 
 
 5656 56 56Q76 
 
 rf=i^ 
 
 '^ 
 
 iffz^g^-: 
 
 8 7 
 
 6 5 6 8 7 
 5 
 
 6 6 7 6 7 
 
 i ^ i ^ 
 
 D7 
 5 
 
 4t- 6 B 
 
 6 6 
 5 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 iczf: 
 
 ^ 
 
 at:^ 
 
 -^"^.i- 
 
 2z: 
 
 ,6 9 6 
 
 b5 
 
 6 7 8 7 5 - 
 5 4 3
 
 230 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 No. 25. — Exercise on the Introduction oj Dominant and Tonic Pedal. 
 
 (Chapter XVII, 1—3.) 
 
 ^ 
 
 t--^=^ 
 
 p_j}fi-^ 
 
 -^ — P : 
 
 -Q- 
 
 -^ 
 
 T2L 
 
 e^^^ 
 
 £ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -^ I f^ 1^ 1^ p ^p 
 
 -C2. 
 
 iS- 
 
 ^f=Ptt«: 
 
 :^ 
 
 44- 
 2 
 
 6 B 6 
 4 4 5 
 
 r-p— p 
 
 =^ 
 
 1^=^ 
 
 -:^ 
 
 1 — I — p- 
 
 tztzit 
 
 Add the two inner parts without figures. 
 
 W, 
 
 22: 
 
 22: 
 
 22: 
 
 :q: 
 
 I 
 
 #-^ 
 
 ^2: 
 
 :^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 e 
 
 ^2: 
 
 :^ 
 
 :z2z 
 
 @3. 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 -^S' 
 
 Z2: 
 
 22: 
 
 1^21 
 
 1^2: 
 
 S 
 
 -fS>- 
 
 :a: 
 
 S 
 
 icz: 
 
 -(Sl- 
 
 :^ 
 
 la: 
 
 zi: 
 
 hS'- 
 
 3 
 
 ?2=:^:
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 231 
 
 i 
 
 t=^=^ 
 
 t^- 
 
 <^- 
 
 1:2 
 
 S 
 
 j:± 
 
 IQ 
 
 Cr^: 
 
 2:2 
 
 -o- 
 
 Z2 
 
 "O 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 ■^::^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^2: 
 
 22 
 
 ■c^ 
 
 iS>- 
 
 -^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 ^21 
 
 g> -^ ,^-gL,-g_^^ 
 
 cz: 
 
 "C?" 
 
 "C2" 
 
 '^ ^ — 
 
 "^" 
 
 
 221 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 221 
 
 P-i — <s^-^ 
 
 ff r j> p p: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 irr 
 
 S 
 
 -<S'- 
 
 :z2 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 22: 
 
 IQ 
 
 22: 
 
 ■^5" 
 
 "C?' 
 
 .C2. 
 
 L^I 
 
 (S^ 
 
 fiS- 
 
 fS"- 
 
 rS^ 
 
 -«S-=- 
 
 -e*-:- 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 :^± 
 
 ^ 
 
 2:i 
 
 -|S>- 
 
 ^ 
 
 ict 
 
 "22" 
 
 Q • 
 
 -C?- . "^2"
 
 232 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 No. 26. — Exercise on Breaking of Chorda. 
 (Chapter XVIII, 1.) 
 Break this harmony in as many ways as possible. 
 
 m^ 
 
 icz: 
 
 -o- 
 
 :2z: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 "TT 
 
 m 
 
 -^ 
 
 -<SH 
 
 zz 
 
 -G>- 
 
 -rjL 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -^ 
 
 7 6 
 
 No. 27. — Exercise on Passing Notes and Auxiliary Notes. 
 
 (Chapter XVIII, 4—8.) 
 
 Adorn this melody with passing notes, and with auxiliary notes. 
 The bass and inner parts also. 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■P^ 
 
 y 1 7 * i 
 
 
 
 
 rj • 
 
 
 ,^:j H" 1 ■■ 
 
 yl r> • ' -^ 
 
 — ' --^ 
 
 
 
 rj . 
 
 r' 
 
 ffn * ' 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 —^ 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 M^\) Z 
 
 
 
 
 _ 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 r:i . 
 
 
 rmY W *' 
 
 
 r-j • 
 
 
 
 h-" 
 
 rj 
 
 l^'l ^ t' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 V^k * 1 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 ^ z 
 
 
 
 
 
 7 6 6 
 5 
 
 6 Be 
 
 i 
 
 J^_ 
 
 :^ 
 
 i^- 
 
 iS>- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^s>- 
 
 221 
 
 T2L 
 
 221 
 
 hS^- 
 
 r:> » 
 
 i=^ 
 
 -<S)- 
 
 r J Q 
 
 :C2IZZZZZ2 
 
 ^ i
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 233 
 
 ^^ -1^ 
 
 i^ 
 
 /S>- 
 
 jQ. 
 
 icz: 
 
 -^2. 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -<s^ 
 
 /S>- 
 
 -G>-^ 
 
 -o • 
 
 icz: 
 
 ;^2: 
 
 221 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 H^ 
 
 -^^ 
 
 6 D 
 
 e t 
 
 5 - 
 4 3 
 
 No. 28. — Exercise on the Chord of the Fundamental Thirteenth and 
 
 its Inversions. 
 
 fm\' 
 
 <Si 1 
 
 1 %r^ 1 
 
 1 — — 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 — ^ — 1 
 
 r^ 
 
 iP' ( 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 rj 
 
 
 
 rj 
 
 
 
 v^ I 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 D7 6 
 5 - 
 
 t 3 
 
 
 5 6 
 6 
 
 8 7 
 6 5 
 
 b - 
 
 @3^ 
 
 22zzr 
 
 -s>- 
 
 iq: 
 
 -«s>- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 1^2: 
 
 -<s^ 
 
 76 76 76 5- 
 
 4 - 44^ 3 
 
 6 7 
 5 - 
 
 7 6 
 
 ^ 
 
 Z23: 
 
 :q: 
 
 :tt^ 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 221 
 
 1^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 I 6 
 
 7 6 
 
 6 ,6 
 
 b5 
 
 9 8 
 
 9 8 
 
 D7 6 
 5 — 
 
 6 5 
 
 # 
 
 : Q 
 
 'JZZ. 
 
 7 
 
 -(S»- 
 
 icz: 
 
 :i^ 
 
 Hh 
 
 :^ 
 
 -7"^ 
 
 « - 
 
 n\ 
 
 - rj I rj — H
 
 234 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 List of Fundamental Chords. 
 
 Vll. Vlll. 
 
 zz 
 
 :^: 
 
 1^21 
 
 ^a 
 
 22: 
 
 :?!2: 
 
 221 
 
 
 -«s*- 
 
 -s»- 
 
 -1^- 
 
 -^- 
 
 22: 
 
 -(S^- 
 
 22: 
 
 22: 
 
 -s>- 
 
 :cz: 
 
 -JZL 
 
 22: 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 — <s^ 
 
 -s*- 
 
 Roots. 
 
 m 
 
 22: 
 
 22: 
 
 22: 
 
 22: 
 
 22: 
 
 -<S'- 
 
 -s>- 
 
 -<S'- 
 
 -<s- 
 
 -«S'- 
 
 XVI. 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 XVU, XVlll. 
 
 -G- 
 
 XIX. 
 
 -«s- 
 
 -<S'- 
 
 -G>- 
 
 -Gf- 
 
 -G>- 
 
 g: 
 
 :g 
 
 -e^- 
 
 -(S- 
 
 :5g 
 
 ^S'- 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 -s»- 
 
 '(S*- 
 
 .<s>- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^- 
 
 -o- 
 
 =<s>^ 
 
 J@- 
 
 ^<s- 
 
 -^ 
 
 -G>- 
 
 -G>- 
 
 -G^ 
 
 Df 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 hS^- 
 
 -«S^ 
 
 Roots. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 tI9 
 7 
 
 tJ5 
 
 
 (lt\' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (<?;• 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 V.-' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 & — ^ 
 
 1 — Gt ' 
 
 1 — ^ 1 
 
 — 1 
 
 — — I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 D9 
 
 d9 
 
 d9 
 
 69 
 
 '/ 
 
 7 
 
 7 
 
 7 
 
 7 
 
 t 
 
 % 
 
 % 
 
 t 
 
 i
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 235 
 
 xxii. xxm. XXIV. XXV. xxvi. xxvii. xxviii. xxix. 
 
 -O- 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 -&- 
 
 C7 
 5 
 
 -<S^ 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 -'S*- 
 
 -^» — 
 
 Roots. 
 
 C5 
 
 6 Jj 
 
 f 'i 
 
 -&- 
 
 -G) 
 
 -^ 
 
 -<S»- 
 
 -<S»- 
 
 -<S^ 
 
 -SH 
 
 t9 
 7 
 
 P9 
 
 7 
 
 09 EC 
 
 XXXI. xxxu. 
 
 XXXIU. XXXIV. XXXV. 
 
 XXXVll. XXXVUl. XXXIX. 
 
 Ma 
 
 -^^ — n 
 
 321 
 
 =s= 
 
 :zz: 
 
 -TTT 
 
 i^ 
 
 -7^^ 
 
 -<^- 
 
 -^ 
 
 =8=^=3 
 
 jcz: 
 
 "C^ 
 
 Tg: 
 
 -^ 
 
 KZ 
 
 -^- 
 
 le- 
 
 1^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 'TTj' 
 
 -ys*- 
 
 Roots. 7 
 
 C5 
 
 7 
 
 *1 
 
 7 
 
 9 
 
 -(S*- 
 
 -s*- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -•s*- 
 
 -«s>- 
 
 -s>- 
 
 -<s*- 
 
 -<s>— - 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 -o- 
 
 -s>- 
 
 -o- 
 
 b9 
 
 '? 
 
 &9 
 
 7 
 
 Q9 
 7 
 
 1)9 
 
 b9 
 
 H li 2
 
 236 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 xl. 
 
 Z2: 
 
 xli 
 
 5S 
 
 xHi. 
 
 1^ 
 
 xliii. 
 
 xliv. 
 
 xlv. 
 
 xlvi. 
 
 xlvii. 
 
 
 
 IgzziiS^fe 
 
 :feS: 
 
 xlviii. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ?:22: 
 
 ~o~ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 <s>- 
 
 ^^- 
 
 ^'S^ 
 
 ^-^ 
 
 Roots. ]' 
 
 b9 
 
 1^ 
 
 -S»- 
 
 I^IT 
 
 Z2: 
 
 bb 
 
 b6 
 44- 
 2 
 
 6 
 
 t>5 
 
 
 be 
 
 B5 
 bb 
 
 b9 
 
 7 
 
 b9 
 t 
 
 b9 
 
 b9 
 
 b9 
 
 b9 
 
 b9 
 
 b9 
 
 1^2: 
 
 ib 
 
 b9 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 b6 
 
 b 
 
 b9 
 
 7 
 
 b9 
 
 r^\' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rj> 
 
 V^- r^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rT> 
 
 i*^"! 
 
 
 K^ c> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r:^ 
 
 ' «S 
 
 1 (S> — 1 
 
 — & — ' 
 
 1 — o — 
 
 — <s» — -J 
 
 L — (S> — ' 
 
 — <s» — 1 
 
 1 ^ 1 
 
 
 xlix. 
 
 1. 
 
 li. 
 
 lii. 
 
 :g: 
 
 liii. 
 
 liv. 
 
 -<s- 
 
 Iv. 
 
 icz: 
 
 Ivi. 
 
 221 
 
 Ivii. 
 
 :?2: 
 
 Iviii, 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 -<S>- 
 
 -(S»- 
 
 -fS'- 
 
 -G)- 
 
 IQ! 
 
 iS>- 
 
 -<S»- 
 
 122 
 
 :<S^ 
 
 ic^: 
 
 :z2: 
 
 jQ_ 
 
 -©•- 
 
 -O- 
 
 -G>- 
 
 -f^- 
 
 -«^ 
 
 -iS>- 
 
 -G>- 
 
 Z2: 
 
 B5 
 
 Roots. 
 
 d5 
 
 & 
 
 m- 
 
 -<s> — >- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 L- s" — 
 
 L- o — I 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 J s^ 
 
 — 'S> 
 
 — s>— 
 
 — *s> — Ij 
 
 09 
 
 B9 
 7 
 
 V 
 
 ¥ 
 
 13 
 
 7 
 
 13 
 
 7
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 237 
 
 lix. 
 
 
 "C?" 
 
 zz: 
 
 Roots. 
 
 Ix. 
 
 Ixi. 
 
 Ixii. 
 
 22: 
 
 -o^ 
 
 fe 
 
 ^ 
 
 ?:><^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 7 
 
 Ixiii. 
 
 S 
 
 
 Ixiv. 
 
 -^ 
 
 -Q- 
 
 Ixv, 
 
 zz: 
 
 ■^>- 
 
 
 
 
 di3 
 
 7 
 
 B13 
 
 7 
 
 « 
 
 di3 
 
 7 
 
 a\3 
 
 Ixvi. 
 
 Ixvii. Ixviii. 
 
 Ixix. 
 
 Ixx. 
 
 Ixxi. 
 
 Ixxii. Ixxiii. Ixxi^ 
 
 122: 
 
 zz 
 
 TO" 
 
 22: 
 
 22: 
 
 zz 
 
 Z2: 
 
 -?:^ 
 
 S!3- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -<s^- 
 
 :ig: 
 
 ^ 
 
 22: 
 
 -o- 
 
 tt^ 
 
 :^f^ 
 
 22: 
 
 _c2_ 
 
 ::?=: 
 
 22: 
 
 Z2: 
 
 22: 
 
 -^ 
 
 Roots. 
 
 CJ^3 
 
 Be 
 
 1:7 
 
 D5 
 D4 
 
 CIS 
 
 D9 
 
 7 
 
 
 13 
 
 13 
 
 13 
 
 6 
 
 24 
 
 B13 D13 
 
 % 
 
 /^* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (^. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 V-^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J — <s> ' 
 
 1 — t^ — 1 
 
 1 (S» — I 
 
 
 
 
 :i3 
 
 For an explanation of the chords in the above list, the following 
 references are given to the body of the work : —
 
 238 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 Chap. II. 
 Chap. Ill, 2, 3. 
 
 Chap. Ill, 9 — 12. 
 
 Chap. Ill, 13—15. 
 
 Chap. VI, 2—8. 
 
 Chap. XII, 1—3. 
 
 Chap. XII, 3. 
 
 y Chap. XI, 4—10. 
 
 No. xxxvii. 
 No. xxxviii. 
 No. xxxix. 
 No. xl. 
 No. xli. 
 No. xlii. 
 No. xliii. 
 No. xliv. 
 No. xlv. 
 No. xlvi. 
 No. xlvii. 
 
 No. xlviii. . Chap. XIII, 7. 
 
 No. xlix. 
 No. 1. 
 No. li. 
 
 No. Hi. 
 No. liii. 
 No. liv. 
 
 No. Iv. 
 No. Ivi. 
 No. Ivii. 
 No. Iviii. 
 No. lix. 
 No. Ix. 
 No. Ixi. 
 No. Ixii. 
 No. Ixiii. 
 No. Ixiv. 
 No. Ixv. 
 No. Ixvi. 
 No. Ixvii. 
 No. Ixviii. 
 No. Ixix. 
 No. Ixx. 
 No. Ixxi. 
 No. Ixxii. 
 No. Ixxiii. 
 No. Ixxiv. 
 
 Chap. Ill, 6, and Chap. 
 XV, 5, 7, 9, 12, 13. 
 
 Chap. VI, 8 (note), and 
 Chap. XV, 5, 7, 9, 12, 13. 
 
 > Chap. XVIII, 11—13.
 
 SHORT EXAMPLES 
 
 FROM THE 
 
 WORKS OF VARIOUS GREAT MASTERS. 
 
 No. 1. 
 
 ?Ee 
 
 '■^r-m- 
 
 SE 
 
 J=d: 
 
 321 
 
 e 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 - fj*^^-— r 
 
 J 14^ 
 
 -Q 
 
 z:± 
 
 ^t^ 
 
 ^I 
 
 be 
 
 4 
 
 Z b- 
 
 5*=^=*: 
 
 =F 
 
 be o I 
 4 8 In 
 
 Koots. 
 
 izi 
 
 ^ 
 
 SEE 
 
 ^^=b: 
 
 -c^ 
 
 -s^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 -Gh 
 
 From Weldon's Anthem " Hear my crying," referred to in the note 
 to Chapter XI, section 10. 
 
 This is supposed to be the earHest example of an inversion of the 
 chord of the augmented sixth. Here * it is analysed.
 
 240 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 No. 2. 
 
 i 
 
 ^J-3: 
 
 et g] 
 
 ce, 
 
 f 
 
 ^ "^s 
 
 ^lA 
 
 3E^ 
 
 ^ *-w 
 
 i^55^ 
 
 S 
 
 -^ -^ 
 
 f 
 
 Roots. 
 
 i 
 
 ^21 
 
 s: 
 
 1 
 
 /^ s b 1 * 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^ — 
 
 1 — 
 
 
 
 ^ — 
 
 — ^ — 
 
 fr)^ — ^ 
 
 — f. 
 
 gra 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 L: ^ J^ 
 
 --i-.- 
 
 =fcj 
 
 r 1^ 
 
 » — 
 
 ^^^^^ 
 
 Nt^^ — 
 
 Roots. 
 
 
 1* 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^^^ \ 
 
 1 ^ V- 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 1
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 241 
 
 i 
 
 t=^P 
 
 ^ 
 
 &^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ gra 
 
 - ee 
 
 ^=^^ 
 
 pour 
 
 moi. 
 
 —7^ 
 
 i 
 
 -^^ 
 
 Roots. 
 
 r r 1 
 
 n 
 
 ^■wi^-w 
 
 m 
 
 r==^ 
 
 -o- 
 
 pp 
 
 ^ r ^ h r 
 
 ^ — ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 gra - ce. 
 
 I 
 
 Mi 
 
 gra - ce, 
 
 ^.■.: 
 
 >b->^ !^ 
 
 •^ 
 
 ;^ 
 
 ^B^^ 
 
 ■^^ 
 
 
 I 5 
 
 ^^^^ 
 
 Roots. 
 
 -e( ^ 
 
 I 1
 
 242 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 / 
 
 /r\ 
 
 ei^fn* 
 
 :^=t=5S^1 
 
 /tN 
 
 ^^ss 
 
 w^^ 
 
 
 ffra 
 
 SS 
 
 ce pour moi. 
 
 4 
 
 i^=W^£: 
 
 f 
 
 -M=^- 
 
 ce 
 
 Roots. 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 -F-F- 
 
 From the conclusion of " Eobert, toi que j'aime," from Meyerbeer's 
 Opera of " Robert le Diable," where a most pathetic effect is produced 
 by the introduction of the inversion of the chord of the augmented 
 sixth at *, where the D b is admirably sustained by the second 
 bassoon.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 243 
 
 No. 3. 
 
 i5i 
 
 IS 
 
 ^ 
 
 fjgg 
 
 s 
 
 ^t=g 
 
 Som - - bre fo - ret. 
 
 de-sert, triste 
 
 et sau - va 
 
 -^ 
 
 ge. 
 
 1 I 3 ^ II '^3 .-0- 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 kj- 
 
 S: 
 
 5=t^ 
 
 i^-^ 
 
 
 1=1^ 
 
 Roots. 
 
 iS^Ei 
 
 j- 
 
 j- 
 
 j-^ 
 
 f^ 
 
 f^ 
 
 From Rossini's Opera " Guillaume Tell." At "'* the chord of the 
 augmented sixth inverted, and of course based upon a dominant and 
 supertonic root, is introduced on a tonic pedal, thus involving three 
 simultaneous roots — a rare case. 
 
 r 1 2
 
 244 
 
 THE rniNClPLEfc) OF HARMONY. 
 
 No. 4. 
 
 From the opening of Haydn's " Creation," where another inversion 
 of the chord of the augmented sixth is seen at '". This is a very 
 peculiar combination of dominant and supertonic harmonies, as both the 
 roots bear their respective major thirds, and the minor seventh of the 
 supertonic is omitted. The chord marked f is to be regarded as a dis- 
 sonance by suspension and retardation ; but as it is prolonged and 
 emphatic, both the roots are here assigned : for in every case of sus- 
 pension or retardation two roots must overlap of necessity, though it 
 has not been thought requisite always to record them both in the 
 pages of this book. In the following examples it has been thought 
 needless to write the roots in a separate stave.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 245 
 
 No. 5. 
 
 
 f=fc5 
 
 ^S 
 
 -b- 
 
 -e^ 
 
 -!S»- 
 
 4S>- 
 
 ^S>- 
 
 -Y^h- 
 
 m 
 
 From a Minuet from Haydn's Symphony in I), where at * we see 
 a chord of the augmented sixth on roots E and B introduced on the 
 pedal A, thus involving three simultaneous roots, as in No. 3. 
 
 No. 6. 
 
 i 
 
 s 
 
 yjzBzzE^ 
 
 j l ^ JJ - 
 
 d? 
 
 221 
 
 -^ 
 
 His mighty griefs . re - dress. 
 
 5=5=5=5^=^=^^9=^ 
 
 h±: 
 
 ^^ 
 
 1^=^=^=^ 
 
 at3t 
 
 H 1 (- 
 
 ^t:^t=W=it 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^=^^ 
 
 From Handels " Samson." At * there is a very good example of 
 the employment of an enharmonic change, to modulate suddenly from 
 D to Eb/
 
 246 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 No. 7. 
 
 ±t±=^ 
 
 ^5 
 
 3^3=?=^ 
 
 Thy re-buke hath bro - ken his heart. 
 
 1^- 
 
 E 
 
 :1^ 
 
 -Gh 
 
 ^- 
 
 — ^^ 
 
 From Handel's " Messiah." At * there is a beautiful enharmonic 
 change to modulate suddenly from G minor to E minor. Here the 
 enharmonic change is between two different parts of the harmony, 
 instead of the same part, as is usual. 
 
 No. 8. 
 
 From the chorus "Let Sinai tell," in Crotch's Oratorio "Palestine," 
 where at * there is a chord of the augmented sixth resolved en- 
 harmonically to introduce a sudden modulation from DiJ minor into 
 D d major. The effect of this is truly magnificent and sublime.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 247 
 
 No. 9. 
 
 ^' ^ ^^ 
 
 -eh -&r 
 
 ^- z' N- 
 
 ^ 
 
 i=-- r^3: 
 
 i 
 
 ^^ 
 
 22: 
 
 22 
 
 z:^: 
 
 f7 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 .J 
 
 ST 
 
 «^^ 
 
 ^=?E^ 
 
 J^ 
 
 *=] 
 
 lEt 
 
 ^^^^^^g 
 
 4' 
 
 -<^ 
 
 ^=^^^3 
 
 & 
 ^ 
 
 ^1 
 
 1^ 
 
 4-^- g^T7>^ -«-g-^-> 
 
 ^31 
 
 r:]l.r-^ r^ 
 
 fe&l^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 Example of an inverted dominant pedal from Beethoven's Pastoral 
 Symphony (No. 6).
 
 248 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 No. 10. 
 
 
 Y^=fC=T^ 
 
 Z2: 
 
 T^~ 
 
 T^- 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 s: 
 
 i2: 
 
 i^ 
 
 I 
 
 r 1 
 
 r:^^ 
 
 J^ 
 
 ? 
 
 rrri I 
 
 f^^ 
 
 f 
 
 ^^^- 
 
 r llJ 'y-Lj ' jj I jii 
 
 :^t;^- 
 
 2i 
 
 z^t 
 
 :^=2i 
 
 2± 
 
 :?:± 
 
 s: r 1 
 
 ~^ 
 
 Example of tonic, dominant, and supertonic pedals combined, from 
 the same. Here, in reality, there is only a double pedal, for the super- 
 tonic G does not hear any harmony of its own.
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 249 
 
 No. 11. 
 
 ^sm 
 
 g. 
 
 > 1 ^ 
 
 -^1 =1- 
 
 toi 
 
 ! 1 I 1 
 
 
 -^-^ 
 
 -^ ^ 
 
 =^ 11 
 
 ?= 
 
 to:at 
 
 ?i 
 
 J^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 i2^3ti^ 
 
 s 
 
 *=t 
 
 ^ 
 
 i^^^^^ 
 
 
 r rr 
 
 From Beethoven's Symphony No. 5, in C minor, where we see a 
 curious and original upper pedal held on by the Clarinet, and singularly 
 resolved by rising chromatically to the leading note of another key, for 
 a transient modulation, in order to introduce the perfect cadence. 
 
 Kk
 
 230 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 No. 12. 
 
 t-r^^- 
 
 m 
 
 " g r • ^ -r^^ 
 
 My faith shall cling un - - sha 
 
 I 
 
 he^i 
 
 ^g^ - 
 
 &;& 
 
 a?: 
 
 &«;— j—^^^qfcjzg 
 
 
 I I 
 
 I I 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^i^^^i^=^^ 
 
 ^5^"^ 
 
 l^ 
 
 # 
 
 b»^ 
 
 i 
 
 s-^^ 
 
 §g -r~ i'^- q=^ 
 
 Si 
 
 :Jf=^5Fi:^ 
 
 iii: 
 
 i^: 
 
 :«^ 
 
 ken to Thee, my Sa 
 
 
 s^# 
 
 dJ 
 
 S^ 
 
 ilt 
 
 viour, to 
 
 ^-^^nit 
 
 -j^ 
 
 iiSifj^s 
 
 ^^^l=Sa^^% 
 
 ^ff 
 
 
 SO'
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 251 
 
 -^-=^M=^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 P=P 
 
 — ^ r i 
 
 M—^ 
 
 fe 
 
 Thee, to 
 
 Thee, my Sa 
 
 viour. 
 
 ::fetagi|5 
 
 --«*: 
 
 I- 
 
 tJ^- 
 
 :i; 
 
 ^=^#^J: i^°^gfeg 
 
 F^fr-W--^ 
 
 ^3^ 
 
 Ktt^ 
 
 $<^ • 
 
 fflE. 
 
 * 
 
 N 
 
 ^ 
 
 From Spohr's " Crucifixion." At * there is a very clever enhar- 
 monic modidation from B b minor to E Q major. At t Spohr has 
 written E Q, for convenience of reading, but the note ought io be 
 written Fb, being the minor ninth of the root Eb. 
 
 From the Overture to Mozart's " Zauberflote." At * the B C ought, 
 theoretically, to be Cb, and it would then be an imperfect inversion 
 of the chord of the minor thirteenth on the root Eb. As B 2 it could 
 only form part of the chord of G, which is not possible. 
 
 K k 2
 
 252 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 No. 14. 
 
 li 
 
 -C2- 
 
 ^ (S — I — (S> 
 
 2Z 
 
 ^ 
 
 g 
 
 -S>- 
 
 fire that wastes 
 
 her 
 
 lo - ver's heart 
 
 S 
 
 ^- 
 
 -TJ 
 
 ^ 
 
 -«S^ 
 
 fire, 
 
 Hnt^Sizji 
 
 make 
 
 -O- 
 
 her feel 
 
 the 
 
 -^- 
 
 ^¥ if==f^ 
 
 4-^ 
 
 fire, 
 
 make 
 
 her 
 
 E:-*gzzti 
 
 ^21 
 
 9 
 
 s 
 
 is- 
 
 iS>- 
 
 cz: 
 
 :^ 
 
 -fS>- 
 
 fire that wastes 
 
 /S^ 
 
 her 
 
 lo 
 
 vers 
 
 Wi^ 
 
 -o- 
 
 <s>- 
 
 fire 
 
 that 
 
 wastes 
 
 her lo - ver's heart 
 
 ■i^- 
 
 K3 
 
 1 rJ 
 
 -G>- 
 
 -s>- 
 
 fire, 
 
 W¥^?=^ 
 
 te 
 
 fire, 
 
 fire. 
 
 -O- 
 
 make 
 
 her 
 
 feel 
 
 iS"- 
 
 S>- 
 
 that 
 
 wastes 
 
 her lo - - ver's 
 
 ^ ftr?-^^ =^ 
 
 -s^ 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 /^
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 253 
 
 -^ 
 
 lS»- 
 
 ICZ. 
 
 -n 
 
 -&^ 
 
 3E!: 
 
 way 
 
 that wastes 
 
 z:± 
 
 22 
 
 :^± 
 
 -Gh 
 
 fire 
 
 that wastes her lo 
 
 heart 
 
 w 
 
 -^ 
 
 4^ 
 
 7^ 
 
 =v 
 
 T^ 
 
 -Gh- 
 
 -7-= 
 
 -(S>- 
 
 feel 
 
 the fire 
 
 m 
 
 -eh 
 
 heart. 
 
 i 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 ^ — ^ 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 -fw^ 
 
 MfS 
 
 way 
 
 and make her feel the self - same fire 
 
 -S»- 
 
 1=^=^ 
 
 the self - same 
 
 fire, 
 
 w. 
 
 -<s>- 
 
 f l f ^ 
 
 -^W^ 
 
 heart, 
 
 and make her feel the self - same fire 
 
 ^ 
 
 *=£ 
 
 122: 
 
 :P2: 
 
 W 
 
 and make her feel the self - same 
 
 fire 
 
 %- 
 
 ^^3^ 
 
 :r±. 
 
 -Gh 
 
 izz: 
 
 ±= 
 
 I
 
 254 
 
 THE FIUNCIFLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 This passage is from De PearsalTs splendid iriadrigal " Great God 
 of love." At * the seven notes of the diatonic scale are introduced 
 simultaneously, by means of a combination of the chord of the added 
 ninth with all the practicable suspensions and retardations. The effect 
 is admirable. 
 
 No. 15. 
 
 i 
 
 I J -J- 4 J^ ! 
 
 m 
 
 ^=a 
 
 E 
 
 icz: 
 
 =F=F^±1^ 
 
 -e>- 
 
 t= 
 
 p 
 
 T=^=^ 
 
 '^- 
 
 iEE^Ei^&d^E^EU 
 
 f 
 
 ^21 
 
 
 -p -^ 
 
 From the " Cum Sancto Spiritu " in Beethoven's Mass in C. At * 
 there is the fourth inversion of the added ninth irregularly resolved by 
 contrary motion of all the parts. 
 
 No. 16. 
 
 ii 
 
 J- 
 
 
 3 
 
 P^E^ 
 
 ^&- 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^^E^ 
 
 ' -^1 Vi 
 
 uP^ 
 
 jEgr^r^fM^gg^FFf^g
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 255 
 
 From Mozart's Quartett in C (No. 6), where in eight bars tliere 
 are no less than six false relations, in defiance of the general rule. 
 Here they are introduced on purpose, in order to produce a vague, 
 sombre, and mysterious effect — which they do most admirably. 
 
 No. 17. 
 
 
 1*-^-^ 
 
 
 -r^-r 
 
 3p: 
 
 frf- ,. - 
 
 ^^ 
 
 -^— K 
 
 ^155: 
 
 1 1 
 
 ^,^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ' u I I ^ ■■ — I 
 
 135!: 
 
 &c.
 
 25G 
 
 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 From Bach's Fugue in C minor (No. 2 of the " Forty-eight Preludes 
 and Fugues"), where there are four false relations in three bars. Here 
 they are merely tolerated for the sake of the " Imitation " in the 
 counterpoint. 
 
 From Mendelssohn's " St. Paul." Example of curtailed resolution of 
 the first inversion of the chord of the minor seventh and minor third.
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 Ll
 
 EXPLANATION 
 
 OF THE 
 
 DIAGRAMS OF THE MUSICAL SCALE 
 
 AND ITS COMPONENT INTERVALS. 
 By WILLIAM POLE, F.R.S., Mus. Doc, Oxon. 
 
 The object of these diagrams is to present to the eye a representation of the relative 
 magnitudes of the various musical inten'als, analogous to the impression which they make 
 upon the ear. 
 
 The idea of doing this is not new. Mr. HuUah has long adopted the symbol of 
 a ladder representing the diatonic scale, the intervals between the third and fourth, and 
 between the seventh and eighth steps being only one half the length of the other degrees ; 
 and I believe somewhat similar figures have been used by other wi-iters ; but I am not 
 aware that any attempt has heretofore been made to represent the intervals graphically, 
 with such accuracy as to render appreciable to the eye the minute differences on which 
 the more delicate ajipreciation of the pitch of the sounds must depend. 
 
 I think the diagi-ams here given will fulfil this condition, as they have been very 
 carefully drawn, and are on a very large scale. The octave is above thirty inches long, 
 giving about two inches and a half for each semitone; and I presume that, on such 
 a scale, the minutest differences of pitch which can be distinguished by a sensitive ear, 
 will be rendered distinct to the eye. For example, the difference between the true fifth, 
 
 Ll2
 
 260 THE PRINCIPLES OF HARMONY. 
 
 and the fifth of equal temperament, is only about one-fiftieth of a semitone, which few 
 ears could detect except by its beats ; yet its existence is made perfectly evident upon 
 the diagi-am, amounting to a space of about one-twentieth of an inch, or half one of the 
 subdivisions. 
 
 A few remarks will explain the principle on which the intervals have been laid down. 
 
 The pitch of a note depends on its number of vibrations per second ; and it might at 
 first be supposed that by laying down on paper (or, as it is technically termed, " plotting ") 
 the vibrations of two given notes by a scale of equal parts, a sufficient representation 
 of the interval between them might be obtained. 
 
 But this would not do, for the reason that it would give the same interval different 
 values according to the place in the scale where it was taken, which is at variance with 
 the idea conveyed to the ear. 
 
 It is manifest that the idea foi-med through the ear of the magnitude of any interval — 
 say, for example, of an octave — is the same, whether it be taken at a low pitch, thus — 
 
 Z2: 
 
 or at a higher pitch, thus — 
 
 "TTJ- 
 
 But if these were "plotted" on paper by the number of their double vibrations per 
 second, we should have the former represented by 
 
 132 — 66 = 66 divisions of the scale, 
 and the latter by 
 
 1056 — 528 = 528 di\nsions, 
 
 which would clearly be inconsistent with the idea sought to be conveyed. 
 
 Any representation of spaces derived from the harmonic divisions of the monochord 
 WDuld also fail, for a similar reason.
 
 APPENDIX. 261 
 
 The mm*e correct method of representation is based on the principle that a musical 
 inteiTal is expressed not by the difference, but by the ratio of the vibrations of its two 
 sounds ; this ratio being always the same, at whatever pitch the interval be taken. We 
 only therefore require a convenient mode of laying doAvn this ratio on paper ; and this is 
 obtained, according to a well-known mathematical principle, by the application of logarithms. 
 If two numbers have a definite ratio, the difference between their logarithms will always 
 be equal, whatever the absolute magnitude of the numbers themselves may be. Thus, in 
 the two cases above cited, we have for the example at low pitch 
 
 For the example at high pitch 
 
 log. 132 = 
 
 2-12057 
 
 log. 66 = 
 
 1-81954 
 
 difference 
 
 •30103 
 
 log. 1056 = 
 
 3-02366 
 
 log. 528 = 
 
 2-72263 
 
 difference 
 
 -30103 
 
 To apply this principle, tlierefore, it is only necessary to take out, from an ordinary 
 table, the logarithms of the numbers of vibrations of any given notes, and the difference 
 of these logarithms will be the logarithm of their ratio. And if this latter logarithm be 
 laid down or " plotted " to any convenient scale of equal parts, the intei-val between the 
 two notes will be thereby represented to the eye, in a manner exactly conformable to the 
 idea conveyed by this interval to the ear. 
 
 On this principle the two accompanying diagrams, Plates I and II, have been con- 
 sti'ucted. 
 
 Plate I is a diagram of the extent of an octave, containing all the most usual inter- 
 mediate intervals. To form this, a scale of inches, subdivided into tenths, having been 
 fii-st drawn on the paper, the logarithmic difference representing the ratio of the octave 
 (•30103), magnified one hundred times, was laid down so as to occupy 30-103 of these 
 divisions, and within this space were also marked the other intervals, calculated in like
 
 262 THE PRINCIPLES OF HAllMONY. 
 
 manner. Tluis 17"609 inches, corresponding to the log. of H, formed the interval of the 
 perfect fifth; and 9-691 inches, corresponding to the log. of f, formed the major third, 
 and so on. 
 
 The centre, or widest column of the figure, gives the diatonic scale ; the chromatic 
 notes being placed in narrower columns on each side, the sharps to the left, and the flats 
 to the right. 
 
 It will be seen that many of the notes have been given two values ; these are the 
 equivocal notes, the exact pitch of which may be deduced in two ways, giving two 
 different values for them. For example, the second of the scale, D, may either be deduced 
 as the fifth above G (= 5* 11 5), or as the fourth below A (= 4 5 76), the former making 
 it a major tone above the tonic, the latter a minor tone, Similarly the minor seventh B? 
 may be deduced either as a minor third above G (= 25'527), or as a perfect fourth 
 above F (= 24"988), and so on for others. 
 
 On each side of the true scale is placed a column giving the positions of the various 
 notes as determined by the system of equal temperament, each semitone interval being 
 equal, and = 2"5086 inches of the logarithmic scale. The nature of the errors induced by 
 this mode of temperament will be obvious by simple inspection. 
 
 To the right of the before-mentioned scales are five columns, designed to shew the 
 natural harmonic notes to the fundamental tonic, up to the thirty-second, which is pro- 
 bably higher than they can ever be actually distinguished in practice, even with artificial 
 aids. They are laid down by the logarithmic values of their intei'vals from the funda- 
 mental, in the same way as the notes of the scale, except that in the second, third, 
 fourth, and fifth columns the equivalents for one, two, three, and four octaves respectively, 
 are subtracted from those of the time intervals, in order to bring the whole of the notes 
 within the compass of one octave. This will be clearly explained by Tables B and C. 
 
 The names of the notes marked on the diagram are arranged for the scale of C, 
 i. e. C being the fundamental or tonic, this being the simplest scale to select for an 
 example ; but the same arrangement of lines would answer for any other fundamental by 
 merely chandne the names attached.
 
 i 
 
 Hi 
 
 < 
 
 O 
 
 CO 
 
 < 
 
 c/) 
 
 n 
 
 < -1 
 
 QC 
 O 
 < -
 
 O- 
 
 .,„, 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 [,„, 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t-^-^ 
 
 
 _ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 1 . 
 
 
 [^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 _,_ 
 
 n^ 
 
 1 1 1 
 
 F 
 
 T — r 
 
 -^ 
 
 1 1 1 
 
 rr 
 
 tr. 
 
 j_^^ 
 
 r-r- 
 
 tc; 
 
 1 i . 1 1 
 
 -j- 
 
 :i; 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 r-r-H 
 
 1 1 1 1 
 
 '"'V,'br 
 
 lOPORT 
 
 o 
 
 
 ~^ 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 i— 
 
 -. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 :5 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 1 
 
 = 
 
 
 
 EQUAL 
 TEMPtRAMtNT 
 
 
 t 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 ft* 
 
 1" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 ?l 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 t ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 e 
 
 ¥5 O - 
 ^. > » 
 
 T 
 
 
 
 
 1 ^ 
 1 
 
 o 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 ? 
 1 
 
 T) 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 •? 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 ■ft 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 : 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 ?l 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ? 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 ;| 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 J 
 
 -1 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 t^ 
 
 
 
 -- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r. 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 = 
 
 
 
 
 = 
 
 
 
 „ EQUAL 
 TEMPERAMENT 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 if W'-' h J, i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 OCTAVE 
 
 z ^ 
 
 = 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 SECOND 
 
 : 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 )> 
 
 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 OCTAVE 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 = 
 
 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 
 
 = 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 ii 
 
 
 
 
 = 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 J 
 
 FOURTH 
 
 = 
 
 
 \i 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 1" 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 : 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 |i 
 
 Ii 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 OCTAVE 
 
 ) 
 
 i ) 
 i > 
 > 3 
 
 i t 
 
 It 
 
 t i 
 
 M 
 
 g >
 
 DIAGRAM OE VARIOITS S]^IALL Iin:^ERVALS 
 
 
 T 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 PI ATE 11 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 - - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 _ __"r. -_^.._.j 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■0315 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 ^ «^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 
 
 • ^84576 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .9 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '^ c 
 
 j^ 
 
 
 
 
 S< 
 
 
 S C -t- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ?? 
 
 
 _ 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 0^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <Ji 
 
 
 ■-^ 
 
 <r> 
 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 .V 
 
 •fH 
 
 
 -- 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 4J 
 
 
 •C}i8C3 
 
 
 ^9 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 C 
 
 ;^ 
 
 
 
 15 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 •% 
 
 
 
 •^;ii5C8^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 !< 
 
 
 
 
 
 "V 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 <;;:) 
 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 k, 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 ^ 6- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '"S 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 _ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r-i 
 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 L 
 
 Cy- 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 U 
 
 
 
 
 *< 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 ,^ 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ /9777.M 
 
 
 Z5 
 
 i< 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ■n. 
 
 
 
 a.' 
 
 
 
 2/^ 
 
 
 
 R. 
 
 
 .N 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 '^ 
 
 
 'iis 
 
 
 ?^ 
 
 
 S^ 
 
 
 >^ 
 
 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 <i 
 
 
 
 
 ."Ni 
 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 t;^ 
 
 
 -Ni 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 
 iL 
 
 - 
 
 "Ci 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "^1 
 
 
 *^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 >■;) 
 
 
 
 
 0^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . mcwy^^ 
 
 IZS 
 
 -# 
 
 . 
 
 :J^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — r -- -"^ 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 JJC^ 
 
 
 
 ^' 
 
 
 ~ .s 
 
 
 " 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "^ 
 
 
 
 
 s* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .^ ^, CO&fio n^^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <r^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ CC04€ . W: 
 
 -^r 
 
 2.J9 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 i> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 WJ X 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 >\ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 y 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 is 
 
 
 L^^ 
 
 
 ■i''^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 si 
 
 ifi- 
 
 
 
 t^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 r> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 '>i 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 kj 
 
 
 s.^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 APPENDIX. 2G3 
 
 Ou the left of the cliayrum is a " Scale of Proportionate Vibrations," which shews the 
 number of vibrations made by any of the notes marked, in proportion to those of the 
 fundamental, the latter being taken as 100. Tliis is in fact the scale of natural numbers, 
 to which the divisions of the diagram are the logarithms. 
 
 The smaller diagram, Plate II, contains representations of several small intei-vals, 
 drawn on the same principle and to the same scale as those in the larger diagi'am. 
 
 The Table A gives a list of the various intervals (except the harmonics) contained in 
 Diagrams I and II, with full particulars respecting their derivation and composition, their 
 exa^t ratios, and the logarithmic numbers by which their places in the diagrams have 
 been determined. 
 
 Tables B and C are devoted to the harmonics only, as already explained. 
 
 The intervals ou the diagram may be measured and compared either with a pair of 
 compasses, or by marking the distances down ou a strip of paper. 
 
 London, 
 
 March. 18G8.
 
 A. 
 
 TABLE OF THE VARIOUS MUSICAL INTERVALS CONTAINED IN DIAGRAMS I AND II. 
 
 The number in the last column determines the magnitude of the interval as laid down in the diagram. 
 
 Limiting 
 
 Notes. 
 
 Name of tlie Interval. 
 
 1 
 
 j 
 
 Derivation of the Higher Note. 
 
 1 
 Composition of tlie Interval (logaritlimic) 
 
 Ratio of Vi- 
 brations of tlie 
 two Limiting 
 .Sounds. 
 
 Logarithm 
 of this 
 Ratio. 
 
 c— c 
 
 C-B;j 
 
 Octave .... 
 
 
 
 2 : 1 
 
 125 : Gi 
 
 •30103 
 •29073 
 
 
 Major third above Gjf 
 
 Three major thirds .... 
 
 C— Cl7 
 
 Diminished octave 
 
 Minor sixth above EI? 
 
 f Minor third + minor sixth ; or t 
 L octave — s ' 
 
 48 : 25 
 
 •28330 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 C— B 
 
 Major seventh . . 
 
 \ r Equal temperament 
 1 True interval . . . 
 
 Eleven mean semitones . . . 
 Fifth + major third 
 
 15 : 8 
 
 •27595 
 •27300 
 
 
 
 i f Minor third above G . 
 
 Fifth + minor third 
 
 9 : 5 
 
 .25527 
 
 C— Bb 
 
 Minor seventh . . 
 
 ■{ By equal temperament 
 
 Ten mean semitones .... 
 
 
 •25086 
 
 
 
 t_ Fourth above F . . . 
 
 Two perfect fourths .... 
 
 16 : 9 
 
 •24988 
 
 C-AJt 
 
 Augmented sixth . 
 
 r Major third above F jf . 
 1 do. do. . . . 
 
 Major seventh — -S" 
 
 Major sixth + 8 
 
 225 :128 
 125 : 72 
 
 •24497 
 •23958 
 
 
 
 r Pythagorean .... 
 
 Three fifths — one octave . . . 
 
 27 : 16 
 
 •22724 
 
 C— A 
 
 Major sixth . . . 
 
 J By equal temperament 
 
 Nine mean semitones .... 
 
 
 ••2-2577 
 
 
 
 LTrue 
 
 r Minor sixth + s ; or fifth + t; or i 
 fourth + major third . . J 
 
 5 : -i 
 
 •22185 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C-At> 
 
 Minor sixth . . . 
 
 jTrue 
 
 I By equal temperament 
 
 Fifth + S; or fourth + minor third 
 Eight mean semitones . . 
 
 8 : 5 
 
 •20412 
 •20069 
 
 C— GJt 
 
 Augmented fifth . 
 
 1 Major third to E . . 
 
 Two major thirds 
 
 25 : 16 
 
 •19382 
 
 C— G 
 
 Perfect fifth . . 
 
 if True 
 
 I By equal temperament 
 
 
 3 : 2 
 
 •17609 
 •17560 
 
 Seven mean semitones . . . 
 
 
 
 f Major third below BP . 
 
 Fifth-s 
 
 30 : 25 
 
 •15836 
 
 C— Gb 
 
 Diminished fifth . 
 
 ■i do. do. . . 
 
 Fourth + 6' 
 
 64 : 45 
 
 •15297 
 
 
 
 [^By equal temperament 
 
 Six mean semitones .... 
 
 
 •15052
 
 TABLE OF INTERVALS (continued). 
 
 265 
 
 Limiting 
 
 Notes. 
 
 C— F 
 
 C— E 
 
 C— Eb 
 C-D# 
 
 C— D 
 
 C— Db 
 
 c— c# 
 
 (CJ— Db) 
 
 c— c 
 
 Name of the Interval. 
 
 Tritone or augment- 
 ed fourth . . . 
 
 Perfect fourth . 
 
 Major third . . . 
 
 Minor third . . . 
 Augmented second 
 
 Major .second . . 
 
 Minor second . . 
 
 Augmented unison 
 Enharmonic Diesis 
 Pythagorean comma 
 Ordinary comma (c) 
 Unison .... 
 
 Derivation of tlie Higher Note. 
 
 r Major third above D . 
 L Minor third below A . 
 
 r By equal temperament 
 LTrue 
 
 r Pythagorean , . . . 
 ■< By equal temperament 
 [True , 
 
 rTrue ...... 
 
 I By equal temperament 
 
 Minor sixth below B . 
 
 f Fifth above G . . . 
 By equal temperament 
 Fifth below A . . . 
 
 ■ Major third below F . 
 . By equal temperament 
 
 Minor sixth below A . 
 
 Composition of the Interval (logarithmic). 
 
 Fifth-S; or T+T+t . 
 Fourth + 8 ; or T+t + t . 
 
 Five mean semitones . . 
 Major third + S . . . . 
 
 Four fifths — two octaves 
 Four mean semitones . . 
 T+t; or minor third + s . 
 
 T+S 
 
 Three mean semitones 
 
 r Major seventh— minor sixth 
 1 T + s 
 
 Tone major (T) = « + c 
 Two mean semitones . , 
 Tone minor {t) = S+s . . 
 
 Diatonic semitone (S) . . 
 One mean semitone . . 
 
 Chromatic semitone («) . 
 
 S-s 
 
 Twelve fifths— seven octaves 
 
 T-t 
 
 Ratio of Vi 
 
 b rations of the 
 
 two Limiting 
 
 Sounds 
 
 45 : 32 
 25 : 18 
 
 4 : 3 
 81 : 64 
 
 5 : 4 
 
 6 : 5 
 
 75 : 64 
 
 10 
 
 9 
 
 16 
 
 15 
 
 25 
 
 24 
 
 128 
 
 125 
 
 3'^ 
 
 219 
 
 81 
 
 80 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 Logarithm 
 of this 
 Ratio. 
 
 14806 
 14267 
 
 12543 
 12494 
 
 10230 
 10034 
 09691 
 
 07918 
 07526 
 
 06888 
 
 05115 
 05017 
 04576 
 
 02803 
 02509 
 
 01773 
 
 01030 
 
 00590 
 
 00540 
 
 00000 
 
 M m
 
 B. 
 
 TABLE OF THE NATURAL HARMONIC NOTES TO C. 
 
 The sign + signifies that the harmonic note is sharper than the one named, the sign — flatter. 
 
 Number 
 in rank. 
 
 1 
 2 
 
 Upper note, 
 
 tbe lower 
 
 one being 
 
 CCC. 
 
 Octave. 
 
 Ratio of 
 Vibrations. 
 
 Logaritlim of 
 this ratio. 
 
 ccc 
 
 cc 
 
 i First Octave -j 
 > Second Octave J. 
 
 1 : 1 
 
 2 : 1 
 
 ■00000 
 •30103 
 
 3 
 
 GG 
 
 3 : 1 
 
 •47712 
 
 4 
 
 c 
 
 J I 
 
 4 : 1 
 
 •60206 
 
 5 
 
 E 
 
 
 5 : 1 
 
 •69897 
 
 6 
 
 G 
 
 » Third Octave J 
 
 J 
 
 i 
 
 6 : 1 
 
 •77815 
 
 7 
 
 Bb- 
 
 7 : 1 
 
 ■84510 
 
 8 
 
 c 
 
 8 : 1 
 
 •90309 
 
 9 
 
 d 
 
 9 : 1 
 
 •95424 
 
 10 
 
 e 
 
 
 10 : 1 
 
 1-00000 
 
 11 
 
 ftf- 
 
 
 11 : 1 
 
 1-04139 
 
 12 
 
 g 
 
 ' Fourth Octave . 
 
 12 : 1 
 
 1-07918 
 
 13 
 
 ab + 
 
 13 : 1 
 
 1-11394 
 
 14 
 
 bb- 
 
 
 14 : 1 
 
 1-14613 
 
 15 
 
 b 
 
 
 15 : 1 
 
 1-17609 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 c 
 
 db- 
 
 i 
 
 = 16 : 1 
 
 17 : 1 
 
 1-20412 
 1-23045 
 
 18 
 
 d 
 
 
 18 : 1 
 
 1-25527 
 
 19 
 
 5b 
 
 
 19 : 1 
 
 1-27875 
 
 20 
 
 e 
 
 
 20 : 1 
 
 1-30103 
 
 21 
 
 f- 
 
 
 21 : 1 
 
 1^32222 
 
 22 
 
 ft- 
 
 
 22 : 1 
 
 1^34242 
 
 23 
 
 gb 
 
 
 23 : 1 
 
 1-36173 
 
 24 
 
 g 
 
 > Fifth Octave . 
 
 24 : 1 
 
 1-38021 
 
 25 
 
 H 
 
 
 25 : 1 
 
 1-39794 
 
 26 
 
 ab + 
 
 
 26 : 1 
 
 1-41497 
 
 27 
 
 a 
 
 
 27 : 1 
 
 1-43136 
 
 28 
 
 bb- 
 
 
 28 : 1 
 
 1-44716 
 
 29 
 
 bb + 
 
 
 29 : 1 
 
 1-46240 
 
 30 
 
 b 
 
 
 30 : 1 
 
 1-47712 
 
 31 
 
 cb + 
 
 
 31 : 1 
 
 1-49136 
 
 32 
 
 a 
 C 
 
 . 
 
 32 : 1 
 
 1-50515
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 1, 2. The Stave; Clefs. 3. Notes and Rests. 4. Time-table. 5. Sharps, Flats, and 
 Naturals; Table of Signatures. 6. Classification and Table of Intervals. 7. Chords; 
 Ti'iads. 8. Motion ; Consecutive Fifths and Octaves ; Other Consecutives. ... 1 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 1. Harmony as derived from Natural Phenomena. 2. Origin of Tonic and Dominant 
 Triads. 3. Dominant Chord ; Connection of Dominant Chord and Tonic Triad. 
 4. Chai'acteristics of Tonic and Dominant Harmony respectively. 5. The same 
 further explained. 6, 7. Force of the Minor Seventh and Leading Note in Dominant 
 Harmony. 8. Resolution of Discordant Notes. 9. Chord of the Added Ninth. . . 14 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 1, Different positions of the Tonic Triad, and of the Chord of the Dominant Seventh. 
 2. Inversions of the Tonic Triad. 3. Thorough Bass Figuring. 4. Inversions of 
 the Chord of the Dominant Seventh. 5. Their Characteristics and Resolutions. 
 6. Allowable omissions of Notes. 7. Allowable doublings of Notes. 8. Imperfect 
 Resolution on the |. 2. Inversions of the Chord of the Added Ninth. 10. Reso- 
 lution of Major Ninth first. 11. Awkwardness of Fourth Inversion accounted for. 
 12. Figuring. 13. Allowable omissions of Notes. 14. How to discriminate 
 between certain Chords. 15. Additional Thorough Bass Rules 26 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 1. General Paradigm of Harmonics. 2. Origin of the Diatonic Scale and its Harmonies ; 
 Origin of Modulation ; Logier's Rule. 3. Completion of Ascending Scale ; Re- 
 marks on the Sixth and Seventh Degrees. 4. Varied accompaniments by means of 
 Inversions. 5. The Descending Diatonic Scale. 6. Other ways of harmonizing it. . 56 
 
 b
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER V. PAGE 
 
 1. The Minor Mode deducible from Nature. 2. Comparative perfection of Harmonic 
 Intervals ; Derivation of Minor Third, and proofs. 3. The same subject concluded. 
 4. The Minor Triad essentially Tonic — why so. 5. Relative Majors and Minors. 
 6. Derivation of Minor Ascending Scale. 7. Remarks of its Sixth and Seventh 
 Degrees. 8. Why the consideration of the Descending Minor Scale is deferred. . 66 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 1. Natural origin of the Chord of the Minor Ninth; Its Invei*sions and Resolution. 
 2. Allowable omissions. 3. Chord of the Diminished Seventh ; Its Inversions ; 
 The Enharmonic Change. 4. Resolution into Major by licence. 5. Enharmonic 
 Modulations. 6. Rule for discovery of Roots. 7. The same. 8. Application of 
 this rule to Diminished Sevenths 74 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 1. Descending Minor Scale. 2. Alterations of Minor Scale. 3. Various Harmonizations 
 
 of the Minor Scale. 91 
 
 CHAPTER VITI. 
 
 1. New Discords. 2. Definition of Terms. 3. Dissonances by Suspension. 4. Prepa- 
 ration and Resolution. 5. Rules. 6. Dissonances by Suspension in Inverted 
 Chords ; Rules. 7. Double Dissonances by Suspension, 8. Additional Rules for 
 certain cases - ... 95 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 1. Retardations. 2. Their Preparation and Resolution, 3. Double Retardations. 
 
 4. Retardations and Suspensions combined 112 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 1. Sequences of Dominant Sevenths. 2. Sequences of Diminished Sevenths. 3. Re- 
 versed Sequences of Dominant Sevenths, and of Diminished Sevenths. 4. Rules 
 for the harmonization of Melodies 116
 
 CONTENTS. xi 
 
 CHAPTER XI. PAGE 
 
 1. Origin of Secondary Roots, in Nature. 2. The same. 3. Application of the principle. 
 
 4. Chord of the Augmented Sixth ; The Italian, French, and German Sixths. 
 
 5. Derivation of this Chord. 6. The same. 7. The same. 8. Rules for its 
 Resolution, and Examples, 9. Treatment of it enharmonically. 10. Its In- 
 versions 123 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 1. Chord of the Minor Seventh and Minor Third. 2. Chord of the "Added Sixth." 
 
 3. Inversions and Resolutions of this Chord 143 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 1. Cadences. 2. Perfect Cadence. 3. Plagal Cadence ; Tierce de Picardie. 4. Im- 
 perfect Cadence. 5. How to introduce a Cadence. 6. Modifications and curtail- 
 ments. 7. Neapolitan Sixth 151 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 Cadences of Modulation ; Irregular Cadences ; Incomplete Cadences ; False Cadences ; 
 
 Interrupted Cadences j In-egular False Cadences ; Suspended Cadences 165 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 
 1, 2. In-egular Modulations by the Chord of the Dominant Seventh. 3, 4. The same. 
 
 5. Progression by Triads. 6 — 12. Modified Basses 172 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 1. Formation of Sequences of Sevenths and Ninths, without Modulation. 2. Derivation 
 of Sequences from Suspensions. 3. Example in Three-part Harmony, with the 
 Roots found. 4. Same with Ninths also. 5. Sequences of Inverted Sevenths. 
 
 6. Sequences of Sixths 1^9 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 1. The Pedal or "Point d'Orgue." 2. Figured Example explained. 3. Upper and 
 
 Inner Pedals ^^^
 
 xii CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. PAGE 
 
 1. Broken Harmony. 2. Doubling in Octaves, when admissible. 3. Application of 
 same. 4. Unaccented Passing Notes. 5. Accented Passing Notes. 6. Chromatic 
 Passing Notes. 7. Auxiliary Notes. 8. Passing Notes and Auxiliary Notes by 
 Skip. 9. Accented Auxiliary Notes ; Doubtful Orthography and Derivation 
 of Resulting Chords ; Appogiaturas. 10. Discords by anticipation ; Licence. 
 11. Chord of the Fundamental Minor Thirteenth. 12. Augmented Ti'iad ; Inver- 
 sion of the Chord of the Fundamental Minor Thirteenth. 13. Chord of the 
 Fundamental Major Thirteenth. 14. Conclusion 193 
 
 Exercises on the Preceding Chapters 209 
 
 Short Examples from the Works of Various Great Mastei's ......... 239
 
 c. 
 
 TABLE OF HARMONIC NOTES TO C, COMPRESSED INTO ONE OCTAVE. 
 
 The number in the last column determines the position of the note in the diagram. 
 
 Number in rank. 
 
 Upper note, 
 
 the lower one 
 
 being C. 
 
 Ratio of 
 Vibrations. 
 
 Logaritlira of 
 this ratio. 
 
 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 
 
 C 
 
 2 : 1 
 
 •30103 
 
 31 
 
 Ct> + 
 
 31 : 16 
 
 •28724 
 
 15,30 
 
 B 
 
 15 : 8 
 
 •27300 
 
 29 
 
 Bb + 
 
 29 : 16 
 
 •25828 
 
 7, 14, 28 
 
 Bb- 
 
 7 : 4 
 
 •24304 
 
 27 
 
 A 
 
 27 : 16 
 
 •22724 
 
 13,26 
 
 Ab + 
 
 13 : 8 
 
 •21085 
 
 25 
 
 Gt 
 
 25 : 16 
 
 •19382 
 
 3, 6, 12, 24 
 
 G 
 
 3 : 2 
 
 •17609 
 
 23 
 
 G\> 
 
 23 : 16 
 
 •15761 
 
 11,22 
 
 n- 
 
 11 : 8 
 
 •13830 
 
 21 
 
 F- 
 
 21 : 16 
 
 ■11810 
 
 5, 10, 20 
 
 E 
 
 5 : 4 
 
 •09691 
 
 19 
 
 Eb 
 
 19 : 16 
 
 •07463 
 
 9,18 
 
 D 
 
 9 : -8 
 
 •05115 
 
 17 
 
 Db 
 
 17 : 16 
 
 •02633 
 
 2, 4, 8, 16 
 
 c 
 
 1 : 1 
 
 •00000
 
 %>£/^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 '^mMW^\ 
 
 WmA 
 
 
 S^kV' 
 
 S^S^.>sit 
 
 :^^^^mtvi( 
 
 -f«« I «"" 
 
 
 
 
 y^fr^- 
 
 

 
 
 :^5Ss^>^ ^^ 
 
 
 ^l;KX 
 
 _ 'V NX-'- 
 
 
 ^^'fn\\ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 
 KTII? 1^ 
 
 
 " ' nvm. 
 
 H/?^, jr'-:CCt.v ■■■; 
 
 A 
 
 :■ x^ 
 
 (ifWJL 
 
 ■■/jT' Kfvi^.
 
 :».,'f- 
 
 4J-